Minnesota Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices

Transcription

1 Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices MN MUTCD Jnury 2014

2

3 MINNESOTA MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES MN MUTCD Jnury 2014

4

5 Minnesot Deprtment of Trnsporttion Office of Trffic, Sfety, nd Technology Mil Stop West County Rod B2 Roseville, MN December 30, 2013 Phone (651) TO: Holders of the 2011 Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices (2011 MN MUTCD) Trnsmitted herewith is Revision Number 3 (dted Jnury, 2014) to the "2011 Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices" (2011 MN MUTCD) s dopted by the Commissioner of the Minnesot Deprtment of Trnsporttion (MnDOT). The ttched pges to the 2011 MN MUTCD incorporte chnges or corrections brought bout by chnges in the FHWA MUTCD nd Minnesot prctices or procedures. All revised pges re ttched herewith nd shll replce corresponding pges in this mnul. The ttched Commissioner s Order No mends Commissioner's Orders 93799, nd It is importnt to retin ll Orders becuse they mend but do not replce previous Orders. The 2011 MN MUTCD including Revision Numbers 1, 2, nd 3 is vilble on the MnDOT website t This mnul will be updted nnully, typiclly ner the beginning of ech clendr yer. The ltest version will be vilble on the website fter it hs been dopted by the Commissioner of Trnsporttion. MnDOT no longer mintins miling list for printed updtes to this mnul. Users of the the mnul must fill out the Updtes Notifiction Form found on the website bove under Quick Links. When n updte/revision is mde to the mnul, n emil will be sent out dvising users to visit the website. The user must then downlod nd print the revised pges nd insert them into the printed version of their 2011 MN MUTCD. To purchse dditionl copies of this mnul or other Stte of Minnesot mnuls cll the MnDOT Mp & Mnul Sles Unit t for current costs nd ordering informtion. They re locted t the following ddress: MnDOT Mp & Mnul Sles Unit 395 John Irelnd Blvd. - MS 260 St. Pul, Minnesot Comments regrding the content of the 2011 MN MUTCD should be referred to Jnelle Anderson, MnDOT, Office of Trffic, Sfety nd Technology, phone (651) , emil ddress: jnelle.nderson@stte.mn.us. Sincerely, Susn M. Groth, PE, PTOE Stte Trffic Engineer

6

7 REVISIONS TO THE 2011 MINNESOTA UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES MANUAL ORDER NO This is the third order revising the 2011 Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices (2011 MN MUTCD). By Order number dted December 15, 2011 nd published in the Stte Register of December 26, 2011, the Commissioner of Trnsporttion (Commissioner) hs dopted the 2011 MN MUTCD estblishing uniform system of trffic control devices for streets nd highwys of the Stte of Minnesot s required by Minnesot Sttutes, Section , Subdivision 1 (2011). The 2011 MN MUTCD correltes with nd so fr s possible conforms to the current system s pproved by the Americn Assocition of Stte Highwy Officils nd the ntionl Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices (Federl MUTCD). (Minn. Stt , subd. 1 (2011); Federl Highwy Administrtion, 23 C.F.R (2011).) The Commissioner dopted revisions nd chnges to the 2011 MN MUTCD by Order numbers: dted July 12, 2012 published in the Stte Register of July 23, 2012, nd dted July 8, 2013 published in the Stte Register of August 5, A multi-gency committee hs reviewed the chnges in the 2009 Federl MUTCD nd recommended further revisions nd dditions. Pursunt to Minnesot Sttutes, Section , subd. 1 (2011), nd , subd. 2 (2011), the Commissioner hereby dopts the revisions listed below: Record of Revisions or Additions to the MN MUTCD Revision Dte Pges Revised or Added Number Issued 3 12/11/2013 v, ix, 2B-i, 2B-17, 2B-55, 2C-ii, 2C-23, 2C-26 thru 2C-36, 2D-28, 2E-11, 3B-14, 3C-1, 4G-3, 4L-1, 6A-iii thru 6A-vi, 6F-3 thru 6F-5, 6F-14, 6F-17, 6F-19, 6F-20, 6F-40 thru 6F-53, 6G-7, 6J-iii, 6J-2, 6J-4, 6J-5, 6J-7, 6J-8, 6J-10, 6J-11, 6J-14 thru 6J-21, 6J-24 thru 6J-25b, Chpter 6K (the Field Mnul) in its entirety, 7B-2, 8B-2, 9B-6, C-3, C-19, C-38, C-39, C-46, C-56 thru C-58, remove Appendix B in its entirety.

8 This Order revises Commissioner's Order number 92452, dted December 15, 2011 s revised by Commissioner's Orders numbers dted July 12, 2012 nd dted July 8, Signed this 11th dy of December Chrlie Zelle Commissioner of Trnsporttion

9 Yer Nme Commissioner s Order Number Month/Dy/Yer of Adoption 1939 Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices for Streets nd Highwys of the Stte of Minnesot /21/ Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices for Streets nd Highwys of the Stte of Minnesot /22/ Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices for Streets nd Highwys of the Stte of Minnesot /23/ Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices for Streets nd Highwys of the Stte of Minnesot /16/62 9/15/71 4/21/ Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices for Streets nd Highwys /20/ Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices for Streets nd Highwys (MN MUTCD) /15/86, 12/19/ Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices for Streets nd Highwys (MN MUTCD) /3/91 1/4/93 2/4/94 1/6/95 4/3/95 3/15/96 1/10/97 1/2/98 11/17/99 1/26/00 12/20/ Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices (MN MUTCD) /15/02 5/22/03 1/2/ Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices (MN MUTCD) /5/05 1/2/07 2/15/08 3/26/ Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices (MN MUTCD) Tble I-1. Evolution of the Minnesot MUTCD /15/11 7/15/12 7/29/13 12/11/13 MN Rev. 1 MN Rev. 2 MN Rev. 3 v Jnury, 2014

10 GUIDANCE: The Sttes should dopt Section of the UVC, which sttes tht "No person shll instll or mintin in ny re of privte property used by the public ny sign, signl, mrking, or other device intended to regulte, wrn, or guide trffic unless it conforms with the Stte mnul nd specifictions dopted under Section " SUPPORT: The Stndrd, Guidnce, Option, nd Support mteril described in this edition of the MUTCD provide the trnsporttion professionl with the informtion needed to mke pproprite decisions regrding the use of trffic control devices on streets, highwys, bikewys, nd privte rods open to public trvel (see definition in Section 1A.13). Throughout this Mnul the hedings Stndrd, Guidnce, Option, nd Support re used to clssify the nture of the text tht follows. Figures nd tbles, including the notes contined therin, supplement the text nd might constitute Stndrd, Guidnce, Option, or Support. The user needs to refer to the pproprite text to clssify the nture of the figure, tble, or note contined therein. STANDARD: When used in this Mnul, the text hedings of Stndrd, Guidnce, Option, nd Support shll be s defined in the first prgrph of Section 1A.13. SUPPORT: Throughout this Mnul ll dimensions nd distnces re provided in English units. Appendix A2 contins tbles for converting ech of the English unit numericl vlues tht re used in this Mnul to the equivlent Metric (Interntionl System of Units) vlues. GUIDANCE: If Metric units re to be used in lying out distnces or determining sizes of devices, such units should be specified on pln drwings nd mde known to those responsible for designing, instlling, or mintining trffic control devices. Except when specific numerl is required or recommended by the text of Section of the Mnul, numerls displyed on the imges of devices in the figures tht specify quntities such s times, distnces, speed limits, nd weights should be regrded s exmples only. When instlling ny of these devices, the numerls should be ppropritely ltered to fit the specific sitution. SUPPORT: The following informtion will be useful when reference is being mde to specific portion of text in this Mnul. There re nine Prts in this Mnul nd ech Prt is comprised of one or more Chpters. Ech Chpter is comprised of one or more Sections. Prts re given numericl identifiction, such s Prt 2-Signs. Chpters re identified by the Prt number nd letter, such s Chpter 2B-Regultory Signs, Brricdes nd Gtes. Sections re identified by the Chpter number nd letter followed by deciml point nd number, such s Section 2B.3-Size of Regultory Signs. Ech Section is comprised of one or more prgrphs. The prgrphs re indented but re not identified by number. Prgrphs re counted from the beginning of ech Section without regrd to the intervening text hedings (Stndrd, Guidnce, Option, or Support). Some prgrphs hve lettered or numbered items. As n exmple of how to cite this Mnul, the phrse "Not less thn 40 feet beyond the stop line" tht ppers in Section 4D-14 of this Mnul would be referenced in writing s "Section 4D.14, P7, D1, A.1," nd would be verblly referenced s "Item A.1of Prgrph 1 of Section 4D.14." STANDARD: In ccordnce with 23 CFR (b)(3), Minnesot shll revise the MN MUTCD to be in substntil conformnce with chnges to the Ntionl MUTCD within 2 yers of the effective dte of the Finl Rule for the chnges. Substntil conformnce of such Stte or other Federl gency MUTCDs or Supplements shll be s defined in 23 CFR (b)(1). After the doption nd issunce of new edition of the MN MUTCD or revision thereto, new or reconstructed devices instlled shll be in complince with the new edition or revision. In cses involving Federl-id projects for new street, highwy or bicycle tril construction or reconstruction, the trffic control devices instlled (temporry or permnent) shll be in conformnce with the most recent edition of the MN MUTCD before tht highwy is opened or re-opened to the public for unrestricted trvel [23 CFR (d)(2) nd (d)(3)]. Unless prticulr device is no longer serviceble, noncomplint devices on existing highwys nd bikewys shll be brought into complince with the current edition of the MN MUTCD s prt of the systemtic upgrding of substndrd trffic control devices (nd instlltion of new required trffic control devices) required pursunt to the Highwy Sfety Progrm, 23 U.S.C. 402(). The FHWA nd the Stte of Minnesot hve the uthority to estblish other trget complince dtes for implementtion of prticulr chnges to the MN MUTCD [23 CFR (d)(1)]. These trget complince dtes estblished by the FHWA shll be s shown in Tble I-2. December, 2011 vi

11 Rxcept s provided in the following Option,when noncomplint trffic control device is being replced or refurbished becuse it is dmged, missing, or no longer serviceble for ny reson, it shll be replced with complint device. In ddition, the section, portion of section or grphic which shll be in complince for future dtes shll be encsed in red box or continution of red box together with the complince dte which is lso in red. Tht section, portion of section, or grphic which shll hve lredy been in complince for pst dtes shll be encsed in red dshed box or continution of red box together with the complince dte which is lso in red. This user of this Mnul is encourged to refer to Tble I-2 for further informtion. OPTION: A dmged, missing, or otherwise non-serviceble device tht is non-complint my be replced in kind if engineering judgment indictes tht: A. One complint device in the midst of series of djcent non-complint devices would be confusing to rod users; nd/or B. The schedule for replcement of the whole series of non-complint devices will result in chieving timely complince with the MN MUTCD. Approved Revisions This loose-lefed edition of the MN MUTCD incorportes ll revisions which hve been pproved by the Federl Highwy Administrtor. This 2011 Edition of the MN MUTCD includes ll officil finl rulings, interprettions, nd modifictions s of December 15, A list of ll officil chnges/revisions to this mnul cn be found in the Record of Revisions strting on pge ix. As chnges/revisions re mde to ech pge, the revision number nd dte of revision will be dded nd so mrked in the outside mrgin djcent to the pproprite text or figure. The dte t the bottom outside corner of ech pge indictes the dte the officil text revisions were distributed. Symbols nd Additions This edition of the MN MUTCD continues the ntionl trend set in the Federl MUTCD towrd broder use of symbols s lterntives to word messges. Also, the following new prts hve been dded to the MN MUTCD: Appendix A1, Congressionl Legisltion Appendix A2, Metric Conversions Appendix A3, Retroreflective Sheeting Identifiction Guide Appendix C, Sign Listing MN Rev. 1 MN Rev. 3 vii Jnury, 2014

12 MN Rev. 1 Tble I-2. Trget Complince Dtes Estblished by the FHWA July, 2012 viii

13 RECORD OF REVISIONS OR ADDITIONS Revision Dte Pges Revised or Added Number Issued 12/15/2011 Issued s new mnul 1 6/15/2012 v, viii, ix, 1A-4, 1A-28, 1A-29, 2A-5, 2A-18, 2B-1 thru 2B-6, 2B-11, 2B-15, 2B-34, 2B-35, 2B-38, 2B-41, 2B-53, 2B-56, 2B-57, 2C-3, 2C-4, 2C-11, 2C-13, 2C-17, 2C-18, 2C-20, 2C-24 thru 2C-28, 2C-30, 2C-34, 2D-23, 2D-27 thru 2D-29, 2E-6, 2E-33, 2E-37, 2E-41, 2E-51, 2F-6, 2G-11, 2G-16, 2I-2, 2I-5, 2I-10, 2I-11, 2I-13, 2J-5, 2M-1, 2M-2, 2N-2, 3B-27, 3B-35, 4D-1, 4D-39, 4D-46, 4E-3, 4E-6, 4F-3, 5C-2, 6D-1, 6D-2, 6D-4, 6E-1, 6F-3, 6F-7, 6F-20, 6F-29, 6F-37, 6F-52, 6G-1, 7B-1, 7B-5, 7B-6, 7B-9, 7B-11, 7C-1, 7D-1, 7E- thru 7E-21, 8B-1, 8B-3, 8B-4, 8B-7 thru 8B-10, 8B-14, 8B-18, 8C-4, 8C-8, 8C-9, 9A-i, 9A-ii, 9B-2 thru 9B4, 9B-6, 9B-9, 9B-18, 9C-1, A2-1, C-1 thru C-8, C-15 thru C-24, C-26, C-28 thru C-31, C-33 thru C-40, C-42, C-43, C-47, C-52 thru C-60, C-62 thru C-70, C-75 thru C-77, C-79 thru C /29/2013 ii, vi, 2A-4, 2A-18, 2A-19, 2B-2 thru 2B-6, 2B-11, 2B-12, 2B-18, 2B-21, 2B-22, 2B-37, 2B-40, 2B-47, 2B-48, 2B-51, 2B-56, 2B-59, 2C-4, 2C-5, 2C-7, 2C-10, 2C-26, 2C-32, 2D-1, 2D-9, 2D-27, 2D-39, 2E-18, 2E-47, 2E-48, 2E-51, 2G-3, 2G-4, 2H-i, 2H-2, 2H-7 thru 2H-9, 2I-2 thru 2I-4, 2I-7, 2I-10, 2J-4, 2J-6, 2K-1, 2K-5, 2M-i, 2M-1, 2M-2, 2M-9, 2M-12 thru 2M-14, 3B-9, 4D-2, 4D-31, 4D-33, 6F-5, 6J-4, 6J-17, 7A-i, 7B-2, 7B-10, 9B-9, 9B-16, 9B-18, C-1, C-2, C-5, C-13, C-14, C-16 thru C-21, C-24, C-26 thru C-39, C-41 thru C-57, C-59 thru C-61, C-63 thru C-66, C-82 thru C-95, INDEX-9 thru INDEX /11/2013 v, ix, 2B-i, 2B-17, 2B-55, 2C-ii, 2C-23, 2C-26 thru 2C-36, 2D-28, 2E-11, 3B-14, 3C-1, 4G-3, 4L-1, 6A-iii thru 6A-vi, 6F-3 thru 6F-5, 6F-14, 6F-17, 6F-19, 6F-20, 6F-40 thru 6F-53, 6G-7, 6J-iii, 6J-2, 6J-4, 6J-5, 6J-7, 6J-8, 6J-10, 6J-11, 6J-14 thru 6J-21, 6J-24 thru 6J-25b, Chpter 6K (the Field Mnul) in its entirety, 7B-2, 8B-2, 9B-6, C-3, C-19, C-38, C-39, C-46, C-56 thru C-58, remove Appendix B in its entirety. ix Jnury, 2014

14

15 Chpter 2B. REGULATORY SIGNS TABLE OF CONTENTS Chpter 2B. Regultory Signs Pge Section 2B.1 Appliction of Regultory Signs B-1 2B.2 Design of Regultory Signs B-1 2B.3 Size of Regultory Signs B-1 2B.4 Right-of-Wy t Intersections B-7 2B.5 STOP Sign (R1-1) nd ALL WAY Plque (R1-3P) B-8 2B.6 STOP Sign Applictions B-9 2B.7 Multi-Wy Stop Applictions B-9 2B.8 YIELD Sign (R1-2) B-10 2B.9 YIELD Sign Applictions B-10 2B.10 STOP Sign or YIELD Sign Plcement B-10 2B.11 Stop Here For Pedestrin Signs (R1-5 Series) B-11 2B.12 In-Street Pedestrin Crossing Signs (R1-6, R1-6b,R1-9, nd R1-9b) B-12 2B.13 Speed Limit Sign (R2-1) B-14 2B.13.1 Bridge Speed Limit Sign (R2-X5) B-16 2B.14 Truck Speed Limit Sign (R2-2P) B-16 2B.15 Night Speed Limit Sign (R2-3P) B-16 2B.16 Minimum Speed Limit Sign (R2-4P) B-17 2B.16.1 This section hs been eliminted 2B.16.2 End Work Speed Zone Sign (R2-6c) B-17 2B.17 Higher Fines Signs nd Plque (R2-6P, R2-10, nd R2-11) B-17 2B.18 Movement Prohibition Signs (R3-1 through R3-4, R3-18, nd R3-27) B-18 2B.19 Intersection Lne Control Signs (R3-5 through R3-8) B-19 2B.20 Mndtory Movement Lne Control Signs (R3-5, R3-5, nd R3-7) B-20 2B.21 Optionl Movement Lne Control Sign (R3-6) B-21 2B.22 Advnce Intersection Lne Control Signs (R3-30 Series) B-22 2B.23 RIGHT (LEFT) LANE MUST EXIT (R3-33) B-22 2B.24 Two-Wy Left Turn Only Signs (R3-9, R3-9b) B-22 2B.25 BEGIN nd END Plques (R3-9cP nd R3-9dP) B.23 2B.26 Reversible Lne Control Signs (R3-9e through R3-9i) B-23 2B.27 Jughndle Signs (R3-23, R3-24, R3-25, nd R3-26 Series) B-26 2B.28 DO NOT PASS Sign (R4-1) B-26 2B.29 PASS WITH CARE Sign (R4-2) B-30 2B.30 KEEP RIGHT EXCEPT TO PASS (R4-16) nd SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT Sign (R4-3) B-30 2B.31 TRUCKS USE RIGHT LANE Sign (R4-5) B-30 2B.32 Keep Right nd Keep Left Signs (R4-7, R4-8) B-31 2B.33 STAY IN LANE Sign (R4-9) B-31 2B.33.1 DO NOT CROSS DOUBLE WHITE LINE Sign (R16-X16) B-31 2B.34 RUNAWAY VEHICLES ONLY Sign (R4-10) B-32 2B.35 Slow Vehicle Turn-Out Signs (R4-12, R4-13, nd R4-14) B-32 2B.36 NO DRIVING ON SHOULDER Sign (R4-17) nd NO PASSING ON SHOULDER Sign (R4-18) B-32 2B.37 DO NOT ENTER Sign (R5-1) B-33 2B.38 WRONG WAY Sign (R5-1) B-33 MN Rev. 3 2B-i Jnury, 2014

16 Pge Section 2B.39 Selective Exclusion Signs B-33 2B.39.1 Other Selective Exclusion Signs (R5-X1) B-35 2B.40 ONE WAY Signs (R6-1, R6-2) B-35 2B.41 Wrong-Wy Trffic Control t Interchnge Rmps B-40 2B.42 Divided Highwy Crossing Signs (R6-3, R6-3) B-41 2B.43 Roundbout Directionl Arrow Signs (R6-4, R6-4, nd R6-4b) B-41 2B.44 Roundbout Circultion Plque (R6-5P) B-45 2B.45 Exmples of Roundbout Signing B-45 2B.46 Prking, Stnding, nd Stopping Signs (R7 nd R8 Series) B-45 2B.47 Design of Prking, Stnding, nd Stopping Signs B-47 2B.48 Plcement of Prking, Stopping, nd Stnding Signs B-48 2B.48.1 Disbled Prking Signs (R7-8m) B-48 2B.49 Emergency Restriction Signs (R8-4, R8-7, R8-8, R16-X4) B-49 2B.50 WALK ON LEFT FACING TRAFFIC nd No Hitchhiking Signs (R9-1, R9-4, R9-4) B-49 2B.51 Pedestrin Crossing Signs (R9-2, R9-3) B-49 2B.52 Trffic Signl Pedestrin nd Bicycle Actution Signs (R10-1 through R10-4, nd R10-24 through R10-26) B-50 2B.53 Trffic Signl Signs (R10-5 through R10-30) B-51 2B.54 No Turn on Red Signs (R10-11 Series nd R10-30) B-52 2B.55 Photo Enforcement Signs nd Plques (R10-18, R10-19P, nd R10-19P) B-53 2B.56 Rmp Metering Signs (R20-28 nd R10-29) B-53 2B.57 KEEP OFF MEDIAN Sign (R11-1) B-54 2B.58 ROAD CLOSED Sign (R11-2) nd LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY Signs (R11-3 Series, R11-4) B-54 2B.58.1 Bridge Closed Signs (R11-2 nd R11-3c) B-54 2B.58.2 Sidewlk Closed Signs (R9-9, R9-10) B-55 2B.59 Weight Limit Signs (R12-1 through R12-5) B-55 2B.59.1 Bridge nd Structure Weight, Width nd Height Restriction Signs (R12-1, R12-5 Supplement, R12-X2, R12-X4, nd R12-X4) B-56 2B.60 Weigh Sttion Signs (R13 Series) B-57 2B.61 Truck Route Sign (R14-1) B-57 2B.62 Hzrdous Mteril Signs (R14-2, R14-3) B-57 2B.63 Ntionl Network Signs (R14-4, R14-5) B-57 2B.64 Hedlight Use Signs (R16-5 through R16-11) B-58 2B.65 FENDER BENDER Sign (R16-4) B-58 2B.66 Set Belt Symbol B-58 2B.66.1 Other Regultory Signs B-58 2B.66.2 Stte Lw Signs B-59 2B.67 Brricdes B-59 2B.68 Gtes B-59 December, B-ii

17 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 2B.16 Minimum Speed Limit Sign (R2-4P) STANDARD: A Minimum Speed Limit (R2-4P) plque shll be displyed only in combintion with Speed Limit sign. OPTION: Where engineering judgment determines tht slow speeds on highwy might impede the norml nd resonble movement of trffic, the Minimum Speed Limit plque my be instlled below Speed Limit (R2-1) sign to indicte the minimum legl speed. If desired, the Speed Limit sign nd the Minimum Speed Limit plque my be combined on the R2-4b sign. SUPPORT: There re mny secondry rods (county, township nd municipl) which hve hd speed zones estblished. These zones re in nd on the fringes of urbn districts (s defined in Minnesot Sttute, section ) where the rurl speed limit remins t tht provided in the sttutes nd continuous speed zoning hs not been wrrnted. In mny instnces, the posting of the sttutory speed limit in order to terminte the reduced speed zone would be inpproprite becuse the sttutory speed limit would be misleding nd encourge drivers to trvel too fst for conditions. Sound engineering judgement would dictte tht no numericl vlue should be posted nd tht the bsic rule ( Minnesot Sttute, section , subd. 1) should pply. OPTION: MINIMUM SPEED 40 R2-4P END SPEED LIMIT 35 SPEED LIMIT 6 5 MINIMUM 40 R2-4b R3-9dP R2-1 In order to provide for the termintion of the reduced speed zone, either Speed Limit (R2-1) sign with the ending speed limit nd n END (R3-9dP) or Speed Limit (R2-1) sign with the new speed limit my be used. 2B.16.2 END WORK SPEED ZONE Sign (R2-6c) SUPPORT: Certin street nd highwy construction nd mintennce opertions my justify the erection of regultory signs with recommended speed s determined by the pproprite rod uthority. It is necessry to instll regultory sign to inform the motorists of the end of the regultory speed zone. STANDARD: The sign shll be instlled on its own structure t the end of the zone in ccordnce with stndrd signing prctices for construction zone signs. 2B.17 Higher Fines Signs nd Plque (R2-6P, R2-10, nd R2-11) FIN E S HIGHER R2-6P STANDARD: E ND WORK SPEED ZON E R2-6c BEGIN HIGHER FIN E S ZON E R2-10 E ND HIGHER FIN E S ZON E R2-11 If incresed fines re imposed for trffic violtions within designted zone of rodwy, BEGIN HIGHER FINES ZONE (R2-10) sign or FINES HIGHER (R2-6P) plque shll be used to provide notice to rod users. If used, the FINES HIGHER plque shll be mounted below n pplicble regultory or wrning sign in temporry trffic control zone, school zone, or other pplicble designted zone. If n R2-10 sign or n R2-6P plque is posted to provide notice of incresed fines for trffic violtions, n END HIGHER FINES ZONE (R2-11) sign shll be instlled t the downstrem end of the zone to provide notice to rod users of the termintion of the incresed fines zone. 2B-17 Jnury, 2014

18 GUIDANCE: If used, the BEGIN HIGHER FINES ZONE sign or FINES HIGHER plque should be locted t the beginning of the temporry trffic control zone, school zone, or other pplicble designted zone nd just beyond ny interchnges, mjor intersections, or other mjor trffic genertors. GUIDANCE: 2B.18 Movement Prohibition Signs (R3-1 through R3-4, R3-18 nd R3-27) STANDARD: The Higher Fines signs nd plque shll hve blck legend nd border on white rectngulr bckground. All supplementl plques mounted below the Higher Fines signs nd plque shll hve blck legend nd border on white rectngulr bckground. R3-1 R3-2 N O T URNS R3-3 GUIDANCE: Agencies should limit the use of the Higher Fines signs nd plque to loctions where work is ctully underwy, or to loctions where the rodwy, shoulder, or other conditions, including the presence of school zone nd/or reduced school speed limit zone, require speed reduction or extr cution on the prt of the rod user. OPTION: Alternte legends such s BEGIN (or END) DOUBLE FINES ZONE my lso be used for the R2-10 nd R2-11 signs. The legend FINES HIGHER on the R2-6P plque my be replced by FINES DOUBLE (R2-6P), $XX FINE (R2-6bP), or nother legend pproprite to the specific regultion. The following my be mounted below n R2-10 sign or R2-6P plque: A. A supplementl plque specifying the times tht the higher fines re in effect (similr to the S4-1P plque), or B.A supplementl plque WHEN CHILDREN (WORKERS) ARE PRESENT, or C. A supplementl plque WHEN FLASHING (similr to the S4-4P plque) if used in conjunction with yellow flshing becon. SUPPORT: Section 6F.12 contins informtion regrding other signs nd plques ssocited with incresed fines for trffic violtions in temporry trffic control zones. Section 7B.10 contins informtion regrding other signs nd plques ssocited with incresed fines for trffic violtions in designted school zones. STANDARD: Except s provided in the following second Option, where specific movements re prohibited, Movement Prohibition signs shll be instlled. GUIDANCE: Movement Prohibition signs should be plced where they will be most esily seen by rod users who might be intending to turn. If No Right Turn (R3-1) signs re used, t lest one should be plced either over the rodwy or t right-hnd corner of the intersection. If No Left Turn (R3-2) signs re used, t lest one should be plced over the rodwy, t the fr left-hnd corner of the intersection, on medin, or in conjunction with the STOP sign or YIELD sign locted on the ner right-hnd corner. Except s provided in Item C In the Guidnce below, for signlized loctions, if NO TURNS (R3-3) signs re used, two signs should be used, one t loction specified for No Right Turn sign nd one t loction specified for No Left Turn sign. If No U-Turn (R3-4) signs or combintion No U-Turn/No Left Turn (R3-18) signs re used, t lest one should be used t loction specified for No Left Turn signs. OPTION: R3-4 R3-18 R3-27 If both left turns nd U-turns re prohibited, the combintion No U-Turn/No Left Turn (R3-18) sign my be used insted of seprte R3-2 nd R3-4 signs. MN Rev. 2 MN Rev. 2 MN Rev. 2 MN Rev. 2 July, B-18

19 MN Rev. 3 2B.58.2 Sidewlk Closed Signs (R9-9, R9-10) S I D EWALK CLOS E D GUIDANCE: The Sidewlk Closed signs should be used where pedestrin flow is restricted or rerouted due to rod work. The SIDEWALK CLOSED sign (R9-9) should be instlled t the beginning of the closed sidewlk section nd elsewhere long the closed section s needed. The SIDEWALK CLOSED USE OTHER SIDE sign (R9-10) should be instlled t the beginning of the restricted sidewlk section when prllel sidewlk exists on the other side of the rodwy. These signs re typiclly instlled on brricde device to ct s reminding messge to encourge complince. 2B.59 Weight Limit Signs (R12-1 through R12-5) R12-1 R9-9 WEIGHT LIMIT 10 T O NS N O TRUCKS OVER 7000 LBS EMPTY WT AXLE WEIGHT LIMIT 5 T O NS R12-2 S IDEWALK R9-10 C L OSED USE O THER SIDE WEIGHT WEIGHT LIMIT 8 T 12T 16T R12-4 LIMIT 2TONSPERAXLE 10TONS GROSS OPTION: The Weight Limit (R12-1) sign crrying the legend WEIGHT LIMIT XX TONS my be used to indicte vehicle weight restrictions including lod. Where the restriction pplies to xle weight rther thn gross lod, the legend my be AXLE WEIGHT LIMIT XX TONS or AXLE WEIGHT LIMIT XXXX LBS (R12-2). To restrict trucks of certin sizes by reference to empty weight in residentil res, the legend my be NO TRUCKS OVER XX TONS EMPTY WT or NO TRUCKS OVER XX LBS EMPTY WT (R12-3). In res where multiple regultions of the type described in the three previous prgrphs re pplicble, sign combining the necessry messges on single sign my be used, such s WEIGHT LIMIT XX TONS PER AXLE, XX TONS GROSS (R12-4). Posting of specific lod limits my be ccomplished by use of the Weight Limit symbol sign (R12-5). A sign contining the legend WEIGHT LIMIT on the top two lines, nd showing three different truck symbols nd their respective weight limits for which restrictions pply my be used, with the weight limits displyed to the right of ech symbol s XX T. A bottom line of legend stting GROSS WT my be included if needed for enforcement purposes. STANDARD: If used, the Weight Limit sign shll be locted in dvnce of the pplicble section of highwy or structure. If used, the Bridge Weight Limit sign (R12-5) shll be instlled on or immeditely in dvnce of bridges or bridge structures where it is necessry to limit the lod permitted on tht structure. The proper weights to disply on the sign shll be bsed on n engineering study. GUIDANCE: If used, the Weight Limit sign with n dvisory distnce hed legend should be plced t pproch rod intersections or other points where prohibited vehicles cn detour or turn round. R12-3 R12-5 2B-55 Jnury, 2014

20 MN Rev. 2 2B.59.1 Bridge nd Structure Weight, Width nd Height Restriction Signs (R12-1, R12-5 Supplement, R12.X2, R12-X4, nd R12-X4A) RESTRICTED BRIDGE 14 MILES WEIGHT LIMIT R12-X2 RESTRICTED BRIDGE 14 MILES AHEAD WEIGHT LIMIT 10 T O NS CLEARANCE 14FT 10IN STANDARD: BRIDGE WEIGHT LIMIT 9 T O NS R12-X4 R12-1 AHEAD 10 T O NS BRIDGE WEIGHT LIMIT 8 T 12T 16T 14 MILES R12-5 Supplements RESTRICTED BRIDGE 14 MILES AHEAD PERMIT WEIGHT LIMIT 45 TONS R12-X2 RESTRICTED BRIDGE 14 MILES AHEAD CLEARANCE R12-X4 14FT 10I N These signs shll be instlled in dvnce of bridges or structures where it is necessry to limit the weight permitted on the bridge or structure nd/or to show the clernce vilble on or below the bridge or structure: 1. BRIDGE WEIGHT LIMIT (x) TONS (R12-1) 2. BRIDGE - WEIGHT LIMIT (w/symbols) - xx MILES (R12-5 Supplement) 3. RESTRICTED BRIDGE (xx) MILES AHEAD WEIGHT LIMIT (X) TONS (R12-X2) 4. RESTRICTED BRIDGE (xx) MILES AHEAD PERMIT WEIGHT LIMIT (X) TONS (R12-X2 5. RESTRICTED BRIDGE (xx) MILES AHEAD WEIGHT LIMIT (X) TONS - CLEARANCE (xx) FT. (XX) IN. (R12-X4) 6. RESTRICTED BRIDGE (xx) MILES AHEAD CLEARANCE (xx) FT. (xx) IN. (R12-X4) The weights to disply on the sign shll be the sme weights displyed on the Bridge Weight Limit sign (see Section 2B.59). GUIDANCE: These signs should lso be plced t the nerest intersecting rodwy where motorist cn detour round the restriction or t wide point in the rodwy so tht the motorist cn turn round to void the restriction. STANDARD: When bridge is restricted for specific lod limits, the Weight Limit symbol sign (R12-5) shll be instlled immeditely in dvnce of the bridge. The R12-5 Supplement combintion sign consists of BRIDGE plque instlled bove nd (xx) MILES plque instlled below the Weight Limit symbol sign to present messge to the motorist tht is consistent with the dvnce wrning sign ssembly. Both plques shll hve blck legend on yellow reflectorized bckground. The length of the plques shll mtch tht of the Weight Limit symbol sign. When restriction on bridge pplies to the gross lod of vehicle, the BRIDGE WEIGHT LIMIT sign (R12-1) shll be instlled immeditely in dvnce of the bridge. If n dvnce wrning sign is to be used, the (xx) MILES plque of the R12-5 Supplement sign combintion shll be instlled below the R12-1 sign. The plque shll hve blck legend on yellow reflectorized bckground nd shll mtch the length of the R12-1 sign. T RUCKS MUST N O T MEET O N BRIDGE GUIDANCE: R12-X3 VEHICLES MUST N O T MEET O N BRIDGE R12-X3 The TRUCKS MUST NOT MEET ON BRIDGE sign (R12-X3) should be instlled on two-wy rodwys in dvnce of bridges or structures: 1. Where the cler opening width is greter thn 18 feet nd less thn 20 feet, the pproch lignment is poor nd the structure type is such tht commercil vehicles cnnot pss sfely on the structure, or 2. Where restriction on the meeting or pssing of commercil vehicles would provide incresed lod cpcity upon the structure. The VEHICLES MUST NOT MEET ON BRIDGE sign (R12-X3) should be instlled on two-wy rodwys in dvnce of one-lne bridges or structures where the cler opening width is less thn 16 feet. The WEIGHT RESTRICTION AHEAD sign (W14-X3) should be instlled in dvnce of the bridge weight limit signs. MN Rev. 1 MN Rev. 2 July, B-56

21 PART 2. SIGNS Chpter 2C. Wrning Signs nd Object Mrkers TABLE OF CONTENTS Chpter 2C. WARNING SIGNS Pge Section 2C.1 Function of Wrning Signs C-1 2C.2 Appliction of Wrning Signs C-1 2C.3 Design of Wrning Signs C-1 2C.4 Size of Wrning Signs C-6 2C.5 Plcement of Wrning Signs C-6 2C.6 Horizontl Alignment Wrning Signs C-8 2C.7 Horizontl Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11, W1-15) C-8 2C.8 Advisory Speed Plque (W13-1P) C-10 2C.9 Chevron Alignment Sign (W1-8) C-11 2C.10 Combintion Horizontl Alignment/Advisory Speed Signs (W1-1, W1-2) C-11 2C.11 Combintion Horizontl Alignment/Intersection Signs (W1-10 Series) C-12 2C.12 One-Direction Lrge Arrow Sign (W1-6) C-12 2C.13 Truck Rollover Wrning Sign (W1-13) C-13 2C.14 Advisory Exit nd Rmp Speed Signs (W13-2, W13-3) C-13 2C.15 Combintion Horizontl Alignment/Advisory Exit nd Rmp Speed Signs (W13-6, W13-7) C-14 2C.16 Hill Signs (W7-1, W7-1) C-14 2C.17 Truck Escpe Rmp Signs (W7-4 Series) C-16 2C.18 HILL BLOCKS VIEW Sign (W7-6) C-16 2C.19 ROAD NARROWS Sign (W5-1) C-16 2C.20 NARROW BRIDGE Sign (W5-2) C-17 2C.21 ONE LANE BRIDGE Sign (W5-3) C-17 2C.22 Divided Highwy Sign (W6-1) C-17 2C.23 Divided Highwy Ends Sign (W6-2) C-17 2C.24 Freewy or Expresswy Ends Signs (W19 Series) C-18 2C.25 Double Arrow Sign (W12-1) C-18 2C.26 DEAD END/NO OUTLET Signs (W14-1, W14-1, W14-2, W14-2) C-18 2C.27 Low Clernce Signs (W12-2, W12-2, W2-X2) C-19 2C.28 BUMP nd DIP Signs (W8-1, W8-1, W8-1b, W8-2) C-19 2C.29 SPEED HUMP Sign (W17-1) C-20 2C.30 PAVEMENT ENDS Sign (W8-3) C-20 2C.31 Shoulder Signs (W8-4, W8-9, W8-17, W8-23, W8-25, W5-X1) C-20 2C.32 Surfce Condition Signs (W8-5, W8-7, W8-8, W8-11, W8-13, W8-14) C-21 2C.33 Wrning Signs nd Plques for Motorcyclists (W8-15, W8-15P, W8-16) C-21 2C.34 NO CENTER LINE Sign (W8-12) C-22 2C.35 Wether Condition Signs (W8-18, W8-19, W8-21, W8-22) C-22 2C.36 Advnce Trffic Control Signs (W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, W3-4, W3-X2, W3-X4) C-23 2C.37 Advnce Rmp Control Signl Signs (W3-7, W3-8) C-23 2C.38 Reduced Speed Limit Ahed Signs (W3-5, W3-5) C-24 2C.39 DRAW BRIDGE Sign (W3-6) C-24 2C.40 Merge Signs (W4-1, W4-5) C-24 2C.41 Added Lne Signs (W4-3, W4-6) C-25 2C-i July, 2013

22 Pge Section 2C.42 Lne Ends Signs (W4-2, W9-1, W9-2) C-25 2C.43 RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY AHEAD Sign (W9-7) C-25 2C.44 Two-Wy Trffic Sign (W6-3) C-26 2C.45 NO PASSING ZONE Sign (W14-3) C-26 2C.46 Intersection Wrning Signs (W2-1 through W2-8) C-26 2C.47 Two-Direction Lrge Arrow Sign (W1-7) C-27 2C.48 Trffic Signl Signs (W25-1, W25-2) C-28 2C.49 Vehiculr Trffic Wrning Signs (W8-6, W11-1, W11-5, W11-5, W11-6, W11-8, W11-10, W11-11, W11-12P, W11-14, W11-15, W11-15, W11-15P).... 2C-28 2C.50 Non-Vehiculr Wrning Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, W11-7, W11-9, W11-16 through W11-22) C-29 2C.51 Plyground Sign (W15-1) C-31 2C.52 NEW TRAFFIC PATTERN AHEAD Sign (W23-2) C-31 2C.53 Use of Supplementl Wrning Plques C-31 2C.54 Design of Supplementl Wrning Plques C-31 2C.55 Distnce Plques (W16-2 series, W16-3 series, W16-4P, W7-3P) C-32 2C.56 Supplementl Arrow Plques (W16-5P, W16-6P) C-32 2C.57 Hill-Relted Plques (W7-2 series, W7-3 series) C-32 2C.58 Advnce Street Nme Plque (W16-8P, W16-8P) C-32 2C.59 CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP Plque (W4-4P Series) C-33 2C.60 SHARE THE ROAD Plque (W16-1P) C-33 2C.61 PHOTO ENFORCED Plque (W16-10P) C-34 2C.62 NEW Plque (W16-15P) C-34 2C.63 Object Mrker Design nd Plcement Height C-34 2C.64 Object Mrkers for Obstructions Within the Rodwy C-35 2C.65 Object Mrkers for Obstructions Adjcent to the Rodwy C-36 2C.66 Object Mrkers for Ends of Rodwys C-36 Jnury, C-ii

23 2C.36 Advnce Trffic Control Signs (W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, W3-4, W3-X2, W3-X4) A wrning becon my be used with n Advnce Trffic Control sign. A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign my be used to wrn of stopped trffic cused by trffic control signl or in dvnce of section of rodwy tht regulrly experiences trffic congestion. STANDARD: W3-1 W3-2 W3-3 When BE PREPARED TO STOP sign is used in dvnce of trffic control signl, it shll be used in ddition to Signl Ahed sign nd shll be plced downstrem from the Signl Ahed (W3-3) sign. MN Rev. 3 BE PREPARED TO STOP W3-4 STANDARD: The Advnce Trffic Control signs include the Stop Ahed (W3-1), Yield Ahed (W3-2), nd Signl Ahed (W3-3) signs. These signs shll be instlled on n pproch to primry trffic control device tht is not visible for sufficient distnce to permit the rod user to respond to the device (see Tble 2C-4). The visibility criteri for trffic control signl shll be bsed on hving continuous view of t lest two signl fces for the distnce specified in Tble 4D-2. SUPPORT: Figure 2A-4 shows the typicl plcement of n Advnce Trffic Control sign. Permnent obstructions cusing the limited visibility might include rodwy lignment or structures. Intermittent obstructions might include folige or prked vehicles. GUIDANCE: Where intermittent obstructions occur, engineering judgment should determine the tretment to be implemented. OPTION: WHEN F LASH I NG W16-13P P REP ARE T O STO P WHEN FLAS HIN G W3-X4 An Advnce Trffic Control sign my be used for dditionl emphsis of the primry trffic control device, even when the visibility distnce to the device is stisfctory. An dvnce street nme plque (see Section 2C.58) my be instlled bove or below n Advnce Trffic Control sign. OPTION: The BE PREPARED TO STOP sign my be supplemented with wrning becon (see Section 4L.3). STANDARD: When the wrning becon is interconnected with trffic control signl or queue detection system, the BE PREPARED TO STOP sign shll be supplemented with WHEN FLASHING plque (W3-X2) or use the PREPARE TO STOP WHEN FLASHING sign (W3-X4). See Section 4M. SUPPORT: Section 2C.40 contins informtion regrding the use of NO MERGE AREA (W4-5P) supplementl plque in conjunction with Yield Ahed sign. 2C.37 Advnce Rmp Control Signl Signs (W3-7, W3-8) OPTION: RAMP MET ER AHEAD W3-7 RAMP MET ERED WHEN FLAS HIN G W3-8 A RAMP METER AHEAD (W3-7) sign my be used to wrn rod users tht freewy entrnce rmp is metered nd tht they will encounter rmp control signl (see Chpter 4I). GUIDANCE: When the rmp control signls re operted only during certin periods of the dy, RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING (W3-8) sign should be instlled in dvnce of the rmp control signl ner the entrnce to the rmp, or on the rteril on the pproch to the rmp, to lert rod users to the presence nd opertion of rmp meters. 2C-23 Jnury, 2014

24 STANDARD: 2C.40 Merge Signs (W4-1) The RAMP METERED WHEN FLASHING sign shll be supplemented with wrning becon (see Section 4L.3) tht flshes when the rmp control signl is in opertion. 2C.38 Reduced Speed Limit Ahed Signs (W3-5, W3-5) W4-1 SPEED LIMIT 4 5 W MPH SPEED ZONE AHEAD W3-5 OPTION: A Merge (W4-1) sign my be used to wrn rod users on the mjor rodwy tht merging movements might be encountered in dvnce of point where lnes from two seprte rodwys converge s single trffic lne nd no turning conflict occurs. MN Rev. 1 GUIDANCE: A Reduced Speed Limit Ahed (W3-5 or W3-5) sign should be used to inform rod users of reduced speed zone where the speed limit is being reduced by more thn 10 mph, or where engineering judgment indictes the need for dvnce notice to comply with the posted speed limit hed. STANDARD: If used, Reduced Speed Limit Ahed signs shll be followed by Speed Limit (R2-1) sign instlled t the beginning of the zone where the speed limit pplies. The speed limit displyed on the Reduced Speed Limit Ahed sign shll be identicl to the speed limit displyed on the subsequent Speed Limit sign. 2C.39 DRAW BRIDGE Sign (W3-6) D RAW BRID GE W3-6 STANDARD: A DRAW BRIDGE (W3-6) sign shll be used in dvnce of movble bridge signls nd gtes (see Section 4J.2) to give wrning to rod users, except in urbn conditions where such signing would not be prcticl. A Merge sign my lso be instlled on the side of the entering rodwy to wrn rod users on the entering rodwy of the merge condition. GUIDANCE: The Merge sign should be instlled on the side of the mjor rodwy where merging trffic will be encountered nd in such position s to not obstruct the rod user's view of entering trffic. Where two rodwys of pproximtely equl importnce converge, Merge sign should be plced on ech rodwy. When Merge sign is to be instlled on n entering rodwy tht curves before merging with the mjor rodwy, such s rmp with curving horizontl lignment s it pproches the mjor rodwy, the Entering Rodwy Merge (W4-5) sign should be used to better portry the ctul geometric conditions to rod users on the entering rodwy. The Merge sign should not be used where two rodwys converge nd merging movements re not required. The Merge sign should not be used in plce of Lne Ends sign (see Section 2C.42) where lnes of trffic moving on single rodwy must merge becuse of reduction in the ctul or usble pvement width. OPTION: For yield-controlled chnnelized right-turn movement onto rodwy without n ccelertion lne, NO MERGE AREA (W4-5P) supplementl plque my be mounted below Yield Ahed (W3-2) sign nd/or below YIELD (R1-2) sign when engineering judgment indictes tht rod users would expect n ccelertion lne to be present. (see Section 2B.9 for YIELD sign pplictions) July, C-24

25 2C.41 Added Lne Sign (W4-3, W4-6) GUIDANCE: If used, the RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) sign should be instlled djcent to the Lne-Reduction Arrow pvement mrkings. W4-3 W4-6 OPTION: On one-wy streets or on divided highwys where the width of the medin will permit, two Lne Ends signs my be plced fcing pproching trffic, one on the right-hnd side nd the other on the left-hnd side or medin. MN Rev. 1 MN Rev. 1 GUIDANCE: The Added Lne (W4-3) sign should be instlled in dvnce of point where two rodwys converge nd merging movements re not required. When possible, the Added Lne sign should be plced such tht it is visible from both rodwys; if this is not possible, n Added Lne sign should be plced on the side of ech rodwy. When n Added Lne sign is to be instlled on rodwy tht curves before converging with nother rodwy tht hs tngent lignment t the point of convergence, the Entering Rodwy Added Lne (W4-6) sign should be used to better portry the ctul geometric conditions to rod users on the curving rodwy. 2C.42 Lne Ends Signs (W4-2, W9-1, W9-2) W4-2 GUIDANCE: The LANE ENDS MERGE RIGHT (LEFT) (W9-2) sign or the Lne Ends (W4-2) sign should be used to wrn of the reduction in the number of trffic lnes in the direction of trvel on multi-lne highwy. OPTION: RIGHT LAN E E NDS W9-1 LAN E ENDS MERGE RIGHT W9-2 The RIGHT (LEFT) LANE ENDS (W9-1) sign my be used in dvnce of the Lne Ends (W4-2) sign or the LANE ENDS MERGE LEFT (RIGHT) (W9-2) sign s dditionl wrning or to emphsize tht the trffic lne is ending nd tht merging mneuver will be required. SUPPORT: Section 3B.9 contins informtion regrding the use of pvement mrkings in conjunction with lne reduction. GUIDANCE: Where n extr lne hs been provided for slower moving trffic (see Section 2B.31), Lne Ends word sign or Lne Ends (W4-2) symbol sign should be instlled in dvnce of the downstrem end of the extr lne. Lne Ends signs should not be instlled in dvnce of the downstrem end of n ccelertion lne. STANDARD: In dropped lne situtions, regultory signs (see Section 2B.20) shll be used to inform rod users tht through lne is becoming mndtory turn lne. The W4-2, W9-1, nd W9-2 signs shll not be used in dropped lne situtions. 2C.43 RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY AHEAD Sign (W9-7) OPTION: The RIGHT (LEFT) LANE EXIT ONLY AHEAD (W9-7) sign my be used to provide dvnce wrning to rod users tht trffic in the right-hnd (left-hnd) lne of rodwy tht is pproching grde-seprted interchnge will be required to deprt the rodwy on n exit rmp t the next interchnge. STANDARD: RIGHT LANE EXIT ONLY AHEAD W9-7 The W9-7 sign shll be horizontl rectngle with blck legend nd border on yellow bckground. 2C-25 July, 2013

26 GUIDANCE: If used, the W9-7 sign should be instlled upstrem from the first overhed guide sign tht contins n EXIT ONLY sign pnel or upstrem from the first RIGHT (LEFT) LANE MUST EXIT (R3-33) regultory sign, whichever is frther upstrem from the exit. GUIDANCE: 2C.45 NO PASSING ZONE Sign (W14-3) N O PA SSI N G ZONE MN Rev. 1 MN Rev. 2 MN Rev. 3 SUPPORT: Section 2B.23 contins informtion regrding regultory sign tht cn lso be used for lne drops t grdeseprted interchnges. 2C.44 Two-Wy Trffic Sign (W6-3) GUIDANCE: A Two-Wy Trffic (W6-3) sign should be used to wrn rod users of trnsition from multi-lne divided section of rodwy to two-lne, two-wy section of rodwy. A Two-Wy Trffic (W6-3) sign with n AHEAD (W16-9P) plque should be used to wrn rod users of trnsition from one-wy street to two-lne, two-wy section of rodwy (see Figure 2B-14). OPTION: AHEAD W6-3 W16-9P The Two-Wy Trffic sign my be used t intervls long two-lne, two-wy rodwy. STANDARD: The NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) sign shll be pennnt-shped isosceles tringle with its longer xis horizontl nd pointing to the right. When used, the NO PASSING ZONE sign shll be instlled on the left side of the rodwy t the beginning of no-pssing zones identified by pvement mrkings or DO NOT PASS signs or both (see Sections 2B.29 nd 3B.2). 2C.46 Intersection Wrning Signs (W2-1 through W2-8) W2-1 W14-3 W2-2 W2-3 W2-4 W2-5 W2-7L W2-7R W2-8 Jnury, C-26

27 OPTION: A Cross Rod (W2-1) symbol, Side Rod (W2-2 or W2-3) symbol, T-Intersection symbol (W2-4), or Y- Intersection symbol (W2-5) sign my be used in dvnce of n intersection to indicte the presence of n intersection nd the possibility of turning or entering trffic. The Circulr Intersection (W2-6) symbol sign my be instlled in dvnce of circulr intersection (see Figures 2B-21 through 2B-23). GUIDANCE: If n pproch to roundbout hs sttutory or posted speed limit of 40 mph or higher, the Circulr Intersection (W2-6) symbol sign should be instlled in dvnce of the circulr intersection. If n Intersection Wrning sign is used where the side rods re not opposite of ech other, Offset Side Rods (W2-7) symbol sign should be used insted of the Cross Rod symbol sign. If n Intersection Wrning sign is used where two closelyspced side rods re on the sme side of the highwy, the Double Side Rods (W2-8) symbol sign should be used insted of the Side Rod symbol sign. No more thn two side rod symbols should be displyed on the sme side of the highwy on W2-7 or W2-8 symbol sign, nd no more thn three side rod symbols should be displyed on W2-7 or W2-8 symbol sign. 2C.47 Two-Direction Lrge Arrow Sign (W1-7) T RAFFIC CIRCLE ROUNDABOUT W1-7 MN Rev. 1 W2-6 OPTION: W16-12P W16-17P A ROUNDABOUT (W16-17P) eductionl plque my be mounted bove or below circulr intersection symbol sign on the pproch to roundbout but my not be used on n pproch to trffic circle. A TRAFFIC CIRCLE (W16-12P) eductionl plque my be mounted bove or below circulr intersection symbol sign on the pproch to trffic circle but my not be used on n pproch to roundbout. The reltive importnce of the intersecting rodwys my be shown by different widths of lines in the symbol. An dvnce street nme plque (see Section 2C.49) my be instlled bove or below n Intersection Wrning sign. GUIDANCE: The Intersection Wrning sign should illustrte nd depict the generl configurtion of the intersecting rodwy, such s cross rod, side rod, T-intersection, or Y-intersection. Intersection Wrning signs, other thn the Circulr Intersection (W2-6) symbol sign nd the T-Intersection (W2-4) symbol sign should not be used on pproches controlled by STOP signs, YIELD signs, or signls. STANDARD: The Two-Direction Lrge Arrow (W1-7) sign shll be horizontl rectngle. If used, it shll be instlled on the fr side of T-intersection in line with, nd t pproximtely right ngle to, trffic pproching from the stem of the T-intersection. The Two-Direction Lrge Arrow sign shll not be used where there is no chnge in the direction of trvel such s t the beginnings nd ends of medins or t center piers. The Two-Direction Lrge Arrow sign directing trffic to the left nd right shll not be used in the centrl islnd of roundbout. GUIDANCE: The Two-Direction Lrge Arrow sign should be visible for sufficient distnce to provide the rod user with dequte time to rect to the intersection configurtion. 2C-27 Jnury, 2014

28 2C.48 Trffic Signl Signs (W25-1, W25-2) ONCOMING TRAFFIC HAS EXTEND E D GREEN ONCOMING TRAFFIC MAY HAVE EXTENDED GREEN W11-8 W11-15 W11-15 W25-1 W25-2 STANDARD: At loctions where either W25-1 or W25-2 sign is required bsed on the provisions in Section 4D.05, the W25-1 or W25-2 sign shll be instlled ner the left-most signl hed. The W25-1 nd W25-2 signs shll be verticl rectngles. TRAIL CROSSING W11-15 T R A IL CROSSING W11-15 T RUCK S ENTER ING W11-X3 2C.49 Vehiculr Trffic Signs (W8-6, W11-1, W11-5, W11-5, W11-6, W11-8, W11-10, W11-11, W11-12p, W11-14, W11-15, W11-15, W11-15P, W11-X3,) T RUCK CROSSI N G W8-6 W11-1 W11-1 W11-15P OPTION: Vehiculr Trffic Wrning (W8-6, W11-1, W11-5, W11-5, W11-6, W11-8, W11-11, W11-12P, W11-14, W11-15, nd W11-15, W11-X3) signs my be used to lert rod users to loctions where unexpected entries into the rodwy by trucks, bicyclists, frm vehicles, snowmobiles, emergency vehicles, golf crts, horse-drwn vehicles, or other vehicles might occur. SUPPORT: W11-15P E M E R G ENCY S I G N A L A HEA D W11-12P WHEN F LASH I NG W16-13P These loctions might be reltively confined or might occur rndomly over segment of rodwy. W11-5 W11-5 W11-6 GUIDANCE: Vehiculr Trffic Wrning signs should be used only t loctions where the rod user s sight distnce is restricted, or the condition, ctivity, or entering trffic would be unexpected. If the condition or ctivity is sesonl or temporry, the Vehiculr Trffic Wrning signs should be removed or covered when the condition or ctivity does not exist. OPTION: MN Rev. 1 W11-10 W11-11 W11-14 The combined Bicycle/Pedestrin (W11-15) sign my be used where both bicyclists nd pedestrins might be crossing the rodwy, such s t n intersection with shred-use pth. A TRAIL X-ING (W11-15P) supplementl plque my be mounted below the W11-15 sign. The TRAIL CROSSING (W11-15) sign my be used to wrn of shreduse pth crossings where pedestrins, bicyclists, nd other user groups might be crossing the rodwy. Jnury, C-28

29 The W11-1, W11-15, nd W11-15 signs nd their relted supplementl plques my hve fluorescent yellow-green bckground with blck legend nd border. Supplementl plques (see Section 2C.53) with legends such s AHEAD, XX FEET, NEXT XX MILES, or SHARE THE ROAD my be mounted below Vehiculr Trffic Wrning signs to provide dvnce notice to rod users of unexpected entries. 2C.50 Non-Vehiculr Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, W11-7, W11-9, W11-16 through W11-22) GUIDANCE: If used in dvnce of pedestrin nd bicycle crossing, W11-15 or W11-15 sign should be supplemented with n AHEAD or XX FEET plque to inform rod users tht they re pproching point where crossing ctivity might occur. W11-2 W11-2 W11-3 STANDARD: If post-mounted W11-1, W11-6, W11-11, W11-15, or W11-15 sign is plced t the loction of the crossing point where golf crts, pedestrins, bicyclists, or other shred-use pth users might be crossing the rodwy, digonl downwrd pointing rrow (W16-7P) plque shll be mounted below the sign. If the W11-1, W11-6, W11-11, W11-15, or W11-15 sign is mounted overhed, the W16-7P supplementl plque shll not be used. OPTION: The crossing loction identified by W11-1, W11-6, W11-11, W11-15, or W11-15 sign my be defined with crosswlk mrkings (see Section 3B.18). W11-4 W11-7 STANDARD: W11-9 W11-9 W11-16 The Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) sign with the EMERGENCY SIGNAL AHEAD (W11-12P) supplementl plque shll be plced in dvnce of ll emergency-vehicle trffic control signls (see Chpter 4F). OPTION: The Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) sign, or word messge sign indicting the type of emergency vehicle (such s rescue squd), my be used in dvnce of the emergency vehicle sttion when no emergency-vehicle trffic control signl is present. A Wrning Becon (see Section 4L.3) my be used with ny Vehiculr Trffic Wrning sign to indicte specific periods when the condition or ctivity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhnced sign conspicuity. A supplementl WHEN FLASHING (W16-13P) plque my be used with ny Vehiculr Trffic Wrning sign tht is supplemented with Wrning Becon to indicte specific periods when the condition or ctivity is present or is likely to be present. W11-17 W11-18 W11-19 W11-20 W11-21 W C-29 Jnury, 2014

30 MN Rev. 1 OPTION: Non-Vehiculr Wrning (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, W11-7, W11-9, nd W11-16 through W11-22) signs my be used to lert rod users in dvnce of loctions where unexpected entries into the rodwy might occur or where shred use of the rodwy by pedestrins, nimls, or equestrins might occur. SUPPORT: These conflicts might be reltively confined, or might occur rndomly over segment of rodwy. GUIDANCE: If used in dvnce of pedestrin, snowmobile, or equestrin crossing, the W11-2, W11-7, nd W11-9 signs should be supplemented with plques (see Section 2C.55) with the legend AHEAD or XX FEET to inform rod users tht they re pproching point where crossing ctivity might occur. STANDARD: If post-mounted W11-2, W11-6, W11-7, or W11-9 sign is plced t the loction of the crossing point where pedestrins, snowmobilers, or equestrins might be crossing the rodwy, digonl downwrd pointing rrow (W16-7P) plque shll be mounted below the sign. If the W11-2, W11-7, or W11-9 sign is mounted overhed, the W16-7P plque shll not be used. OPTION: A Pedestrin Crossing (W11-2) sign my be plced overhed or my be post-mounted with digonl downwrd pointing rrow (W16-7P) plque t the crosswlk loction where Yield Here To (Stop Here For) Pedestrins signs (see Section 2B.11) hve been instlled in dvnce of the crosswlk. STANDARD: If W11-2 sign hs been post-mounted t the crosswlk loction where Yield Here To (Stop Here For) Pedestrins sign is used on the pproch, the Yield Here To (Stop Here For) Pedestrins sign shll not be plced on the sme post s or block the rod user's view of the W11-2 sign. OPTION: An dvnce Pedestrin Crossing (W11-2) sign with n AHEAD or distnce supplementl plque my be used in conjunction with Yield Here To (Stop Here For) Pedestrins sign on the pproch to the sme crosswlk. The crossing loction identified by W11-2, W11-7, or W11-9 sign my be defined with crosswlk mrkings (see Section 3B.18). The W11-2 nd W11-9 signs nd their relted supplementl plques my hve fluorescent yellow-green bckground with blck legend nd border. Pedestrin nd School Crossing signs nd their relted supplementl plques my hve fluorescent yellow-green bckground with blck legend nd border. GUIDANCE: When fluorescent yellow-green bckground is used, systemtic pproch feturing one bckground color within zone or re should be used. The mixing of stndrd yellow nd fluorescent yellow-green bckgrounds within selected site re should be voided. Non-vehiculr signs should be used only t loctions where the crossing ctivity is unexpected or t loctions not redily pprent. Additionl informtion on crossings cn be found in the following sections: Section 7B School Crossing sign Section 9B Appendix B OPTION: Bicycle Crossing sign Wrrnts, Stndrds, nd Guidelines for Trffic Control Devices used t Senior Citizen nd Disbled Persons Crossings A Wrning Becon (see Section 4L.3) my be used with ny Non-Vehiculr Wrning sign to indicte specific periods when the condition or ctivity is present or is likely to be present, or to provide enhnced sign conspicuity. A supplementl WHEN FLASHING (W16-13P) plque my be used with ny Non-Vehiculr Wrning sign tht is supplemented with Wrning Becon to indicte specific periods when the condition or ctivity is present or is likely to be present. Jnury, C-30

31 2C.51 Plyground Sign (W15-1) 2C.53 Use of Supplementl Wrning Plques W15-1 W15-1 OPTION: A supplementl wrning plque my be displyed with wrning or regultory sign when engineering judgment indictes tht rod users require dditionl wrning informtion beyond tht contined in the min messge of the wrning or regultory sign. OPTION: The Plyground (W15-1) sign my be used to give dvnce wrning of designted children's plyground tht is locted djcent to the rod. The Plyground sign my hve fluorescent yellowgreen bckground with blck legend nd border. GUIDANCE: If the ccess to the plyground re requires rodwy crossing, the ppliction of crosswlk pvement mrkings (see Section 3B.18) nd Non-Vehiculr Wrning signs (see Section 2C.50) should be considered. 2C.52 NEW TRAFFIC PATTERN AHEAD Sign (W23-2) N EW T RAFFIC P ATTERN AHEAD STANDARD: Supplementl wrning plques shll be used only in combintion with wrning or regultory signs. They shll not be mounted lone or displyed lone. If used, supplementl wrning plque shll be instlled on the sme post(s) s the wrning or regultory sign tht it supplements. Unless otherwise provided in this Mnul for prticulr plque, supplementl wrning plques shll be mounted below the sign they supplement. 2C.54 Design of Supplementl Wrning Plques STANDARD: A supplementl wrning plque used with wrning sign shll hve the sme legend, border, nd bckground color s the wrning sign with which it is displyed. A supplementl wrning plque used with regultory sign shll hve blck legend nd border on yellow bckground. Supplementl wrning plques shll be squre or rectngulr. OPTION: W23-2 A NEW TRAFFIC PATTERN AHEAD (W23-2) sign my be used on the pproch to n intersection or long section of rodwy to provide dvnce wrning of chnge in trffic ptterns, such s revised lne usge, rodwy geometry, or signl phsing. GUIDANCE: The NEW TRAFFIC PATTERN AHEAD sign should be removed when the trffic pttern returns to norml, when the chnged pttern is no longer considered to be new, or within six months. 2C-31 Jnury, 2014

32 2C.55 Distnce Plques (W16-2 series, W16-3 series, W16-4P, W7-3P) 5 00 FEET 5 00 FT NEXT 500 FT 2C.57 Hill-Relted Plques (W7-2 Series nd W7-3 Series) USE LOW GEAR W7-2P T RUCKS U S E LOWER GEAR W7-2bP W16-2P W16-2P W16-4P 2 MILES 2 MILES 4 NEXT MILES 9 GRADE W7-3P NEXT 4 MILES W7-3P 9 GRADE 7 MILES W7-3bP OPTION: W16-3P The Distnce Ahed (W16-2 series nd W16-3 series) plques my be used to inform the rod user of the distnce to the condition indicted by the wrning sign. The Next Distnce (W7-3P nd W16-4P) plques my be used to inform rod users of the length of rodwy over which the condition indicted by the wrning sign exists. 2C.56 Supplementl Arrow Plques (W16-5P, W16-6P) GUIDANCE: If the condition indicted by wrning sign is locted on n intersecting rod nd the distnce between the intersection nd condition is not sufficient to provide dequte dvnce plcement of the wrning sign, Supplementl Arrow (W16-5P or W16-6P) plque should be used below the wrning sign. STANDARD: W16-5P W16-3P W16-6P W7-3P Supplementl Arrow plques shll hve the sme legend design s the Advnce Turn Arrow nd Directionl Arrow uxiliry signs (see Sections 2D.26 nd 2D.28) except tht they shll hve blck legend nd border on yellow or fluorescent yellow-green bckground, s pproprite. GUIDANCE: Hill-Relted (W7-2 series, W7-3 series) plques or other pproprite legends nd lrger signs should be used for emphsis or where specil hill chrcteristics exist. On longer grdes, the use of the distnce plque (W7-3P or W7-3bP) t periodic intervls of pproximtely 1-mile spcing should be considered. 2C.58 Advnce Street Nme Plque (W16-8P, W16-8P) OPTION: An Advnce Street Nme (W16-8P or W16-8P) plque my be used with ny Intersection sign (W2 series, W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4) or Advnce Trffic Control (W3 series) sign to identify the nme of the intersecting street. Advnce Street Nme plques my be mounted bove or below the sign. STANDARD: First St W16-8P Elm Street Lumsden R d W16-8P The lettering on Advnce Street Nme plques shll be composed of combintion of lower-cse letters with initil upper-cse letters. MN Rev. 2 MN Rev. 2 Jnury, C-32

33 If two street nmes re used on the Advnce Street Nme plque, directionl rrow pointing in the direction of the street shll be plced next to ech street nme. Arrows pointing to the left shll be plced to the left of the street nme, nd rrows pointing to the right shll be plced to the right of the street nme. GUIDANCE: If two street nmes re used on the Advnce Street Nme plque, the street nmes nd ssocited rrows should be displyed in the following order: A. For single intersection, the nme of the street to the left should be displyed bove the nme of the street to the right; or B. For two sequentil intersections, such s where the plque is used with n Offset Side Rods (W2-7) or Double Side Rod (W2-8) symbol sign, the nme of the first street encountered should be displyed bove the nme of the second street encountered, nd the rrow ssocited with the second street encountered should be n dvnce rrow, such s the rrow shown on the W16-6P rrow plque. 2C.59 CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP Plque (W4-4P Series) CROSS TRAFFIC D OES NOT STOP W4-4P OPTION: TRAFFIC F ROM LEFT D OES NOT STOP W4-4P ONCOMING D OES NOT STOP W4-4bP TRAFFIC The CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P) plque my be used in combintion with STOP sign when engineering judgment indictes tht conditions re present tht re cusing or could cuse drivers to misinterpret the intersection s n ll-wy stop. STANDARD: If W4-4P plque or plque with n lterntive messge is used, it shll be mounted below the STOP sign. OPTION: A double-heded rrow my be included within the plque (W4-4P) except t one-wy crossings. STANDARD: A single heded rrow shll not be used. 2C.60 SHARE THE ROAD Plque (W16-1P) OPTION: In situtions where there is need to wrn drivers to wtch for other slower forms of trnsporttion trveling long the highwy, such s bicycles, golf crts, horse-drwn vehicles, or frm mchinery, SHARE THE ROAD (W16-1P) plque my be used. STANDARD: S HARE T HE ROAD W16-1P A W16-1P plque shll not be used lone. If W16-1P plque is used, it shll be mounted below either Vehiculr Trffic Wrning sign (see Section 2C.49) or Non-Vehiculr Wrning sign (see Section 2C.50). The bckground color of the W16-1P plque shll mtch the bckground color of the wrning sign with which it is displyed. Alternte messges such s TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP (W4-4P) or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP (W4-4bP) my be used when such messges more ccurtely describe the trffic controls estblished t the intersection. GUIDANCE: Plques with the pproprite lterntive messges of TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP should be used t intersections where STOP signs control ll but one pproch to the intersection, unless the only non-stopped pproch is from one-wy street. 2C-33 Jnury, 2014

34 MN Rev. 1 2C.61 PHOTO ENFORCED Plque (W16-10P, W16-10P) OPTION: A Photo Enforced (W16-10P) plque or PHOTO ENFORCED (W16-10P) word messge plque my be mounted below wrning sign to dvise rod users tht the regultions ssocited with the condition being wrned bout (such s trffic control signl or toll plz) re being enforced by photogrphic equipment. STANDARD: If used below wrning sign, the Photo Enforced (W16-10P or W16-10P) plque shll be rectngle with blck legend nd border on yellow bckground. 2C.62 NEW Plque (W16-15P) OPTION: A NEW (W16-15P) plque my be mounted bove regultory sign when new regultion tkes effect in order to lert rod users to the new trffic regultion. A NEW plque my lso be mounted bove n dvnce wrning sign (such s Signl Ahed sign for newly-instlled trffic control signl) for new trffic regultion. STANDARD: W16-10P N EW W16-15P PHOTO ENFORCED W16-10P The NEW plque shll not be used lone. The NEW plque shll be removed no lter thn 6 months fter the regultion hs been in effect. 2C.63 Object Mrker Design nd Plcement Height SUPPORT: Type 1, 2, nd 3 object mrkers re used to mrk obstructions within or djcent to the rodwy. Type 4 object mrkers re used to mrk the end of rodwy. STANDARD: When used, object mrkers shll not hve border nd shll consist of n rrngement of one or more of the following types: Type 1- dimond-shped sign, t lest 18 inches on side, consisting of either yellow (OM1-1) or blck (OM1-2) sign with nine yellow retroreflective devices, ech with minimum dimeter of 3 inches, mounted symmetriclly on the sign, or n ll-yellow retroreflective sign (OM1-3). Type 2-either mrker (OM2-1V or OM2-1H) consisting of three yellow retroreflective devices, ech with minimum dimeter of 3 inches, rrnged either horizontlly or verticlly on white sign mesuring t lest 6 x 12 inches; or n ll-yellow horizontl or verticl retroreflective sign (OM2-2V or OM2-2H), mesuring t lest 6 x 12 inches. Type 3- striped mrker, 12 x 36 inches, consisting of verticl rectngle with lternting blck nd retroreflective yellow stripes sloping downwrd t n ngle of 45 degrees towrd the side of the obstruction on which trffic is to pss. The minimum width of the yellow nd blck stripes shll be 3 inches. Type 4- dimond-shped sign, t lest 18 inches on side, consisting of either red (OM4-1) or blck (OM4-2) sign with nine red retroreflective devices, ech with minimum dimeter of 3 inches, mounted symmetriclly on the sign, or n ll-red retroreflective sign (OM4-3). SUPPORT: A better ppernce cn be chieved if the blck stripes re wider thn the yellow stripes. Type 3 object mrkers with stripes tht begin t the upper right side nd slope downwrd to the lower left side re designted s right object mrkers (OM3-R). Object mrkers with stripes tht begin t the upper left side nd slope downwrd to the lower right side re designted s left object mrkers (OM3-L). MN Rev. 1 Jnury, C-34

35 Type 1 Object Mrkers (obstructions within the rodwy) OM1-1 OM1-2 OM1-3 Type 2 Object Mrkers (obstructions djcent to the rodwy) OM2-1V OM2-2V OM2-1H OM2-2H Type 3 Object Mrkers (obstructions djcent to or within the rodwy) Object mrkers should not present verticl or horizontl clernce obstcle for pedestrins. OPTION: When object mrkers or mrkings re pplied to n obstruction tht by its nture requires lower or higher mounting, the verticl mounting height my vry ccording to need. SUPPORT: Section 9B.26 contins informtion regrding the use of object mrkers on shred-use pths. 2C.64 Object Mrkers for Obstructions Within the Rodwy STANDARD: Obstructions within the rodwy shll be mrked with Type 1 or Type 3 object mrker. In ddition to mrkers on the fce of the obstruction, wrning of pproch to the obstruction shll be given by pproprite pvement mrkings (see Section 3B.10). OPTION: Object mrkers my be instlled lone or in combintion with signs (such s KEEP RIGHT, KEEP LEFT, double rrows, or guide signs) locted within the the islnd. OM-3L OM-3C OM-3R Type 4 Object Mrkers (end of rodwy) OM4-1 OM4-2 OM4-3 Figure 2C-13 Object Mrkers GUIDANCE: When used for mrking obstructions within the rodwy or obstructions tht re 8 feet or less from the shoulder or curb, the minimum mounting height, mesured from the bottom of the object mrker to the elevtion of the ner edge of the trveled wy, should be 4 feet When used to mrk obstructions more thn 8 feet from the shoulder or curb, the clernce from the ground to the bottom of the object mrker should be t lest 4 feet. To provide dditionl emphsis, Type 1 or Type 3 object mrker my be instlled t or ner the pproch end of medin islnd. To provide dditionl emphsis, lrge surfces such s bridge piers my be pinted with digonl stripes, 12 inches or greter in width, similr in design to the Type 3 object mrker. STANDARD: The lternting blck nd retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-L, OM3-R) shll be sloped down t n ngle of 45 degrees towrd the side on which trffic is to pss the obstruction. If trffic cn pss to either side of the obstruction, the lternting blck nd retroreflective yellow stripes (OM3-C) shll form chevrons tht point upwrds. OPTION: Approprite signs (see Sections 2B.32 nd 2C.25) directing trffic to one or both sides of the obstruction my be used insted of the object mrker. 2C-35 Jnury, 2014

36 2C.65 Object Mrkers for Obstructions Adjcent to the Rodwy SUPPORT: Obstructions not ctully within the rodwy re sometimes so close to the edge of the rod tht they need mrker. These include underpss piers, bridge butments, hndrils, ends of trffic brriers, utility poles, nd culvert hedwlls. In other cses there might not be physicl object involved, but other rodside conditions exist, such s nrrow shoulders, drop-offs, gores, smll islnds, nd brupt chnges in the rodwy lignment, tht might mke it undesirble for rod user to leve the rodwy, nd therefore would crete need for mrker. STANDARD: If Type 2 or Type 3 object mrker is used to mrk n obstruction djcent to the rodwy, the edge of the object mrker tht is closest to the rod user shll be instlled in line with the closest edge of the obstruction. Where Type 3 object mrkers re pplied to the pproch ends of gurdril nd other rodside ppurtennces, sheeting without substrte shll be directly ffixed to the pproch end of the gurdril in rectngulr shpe conforming to the size of the pproch end of the gurdril with lternting blck nd retroreflective yellow stripes sloping downwrd t ngle of 45 degrees towrd the side of the obstruction on which trffic is to pss. 2C.66 Object Mrkers for Ends of Rodwys SUPPORT: The Type 4 object mrker is used to wrn nd lert rod users of the end of rodwy in other thn construction or mintennce res. STANDARD: If n object mrker is used to mrk the end of rodwy, Type 4 object mrker shll be used. OPTION: The Type 4 object mrker my be used in instnces where there re no lternte vehiculr pths. Where conditions wrrnt, more thn one mrker, or lrger mrker with or without Type 3 Brricde (see Section 2B.67), my be used t the end of the rodwy. STANDARD: The minimum mounting height, mesured verticlly from the bottom of Type 4 object mrker to the elevtion of the ner edge of the trveled wy, shll be 4 feet. GUIDANCE: Approprite dvnce wrning signs in this Chpter should be used. Type 1 nd Type 4 object mrkers shll not be used to mrk obstructions djcent to the rodwy. GUIDANCE: Stndrd wrning signs in this Chpter should lso be used where pplicble. Jnury, C-36

37 Type of Mounting Overhed Post-Mounted Post Mounted Post-Mounted * Type of Street or Highwy All types Multi-lne Multi-lne 2-lne Speed Limit All speed limits More thn 40 mph 40 mph orless All speed limits Recommended Minimum Letter Height Initil Upper-Cse Lower-Cse 12 inches 8 inches 6 inches 6 inches On locl two-lne streets with speed limits of 25 mph or less, 4-inch initil upper-cse letters with 3-inch lower-cse letters my be used. Tble 2D-2. Recommended Minimum Letter Heights on Street Nme Signs 9 inches 6 inches 4.5 inches 4.5 inches * * MN Rev. 1 MN Rev. 2 2D.43 Street Nme Sign (D3-1or D3-1) GUIDANCE: Street Nme (D3-1 or D3-1) signs should be instlled in urbn res t ll street intersections regrdless of other route signs tht might be present nd should be instlled in rurl res to identify importnt rods tht re not otherwise signed. OPTION: For streets tht re prt of U.S., Stte, or county numbered route, D3-1 Street Nme sign tht incorportes route shield my be used to ssist rod users who might not otherwise be ble to ssocite the nme of the street with the route number. STANDARD: The lettering for nmes of streets nd highwys on Street Nme signs shll be composed of combintion of lowercse letters with initil upper-cse letters (see Section 2A.13). GUIDANCE: Lettering on post-mounted Street Nme signs should be composed of initil upper-cse letters t lest 6 inches in height nd lower-cse letters t lest 4.5 inches in height. On multi-lne streets with speed limits greter thn 40 mph, the lettering on post-mounted Street Nme signs should be composed of initil upper-cse letters t lest 8 inches in height nd lower-cse letters t lest 6 inches in height. MN Rev. 1 E Min St D3-1 OPTION: For locl rods with speed limits of 25 mph or less, the lettering on post-mounted Street Nme signs my be composed of initil upper-cse letters t lest 4 inches in height nd lower-cse letters t lest 3 inches in height. GUIDANCE: If overhed Street Nme signs re used, the lettering should be composed of initil upper-cse letters t lest 12 inches in height nd lower-cse letters t lest 9 inches in height. SUPPORT: The recommended minimum letter heights for Street Nme signs re summrized in Tble 2D-2. OPTION: Supplementry lettering to indicte the type of street (such s Street, Avenue, or Rod) or the section of the city (such s NW) on the D3-1 nd D3-1 signs my be in smller lettering, composed of initil upper-cse letters t lest 3 inches in height nd lower-cse letters t lest 2.25 inches in height. Conventionl bbrevitions (see Section 1A.15) my be used except for the street nme itself. A pictogrph (see definition in Section 1A.13) my be used on D3-1 sign. STANDARD: 5 6 E Win chester D3-1 Pictogrphs shll not be displyed on D3-1 or Advnce Street Nme (D3-2) signs (see Section 2D.44). If pictogrph is used on D3-1 sign, the height nd width of the pictogrph shll not exceed the upper-cse letter height of the principl legend of the sign. St 2D-27 July, 2013

38 GUIDANCE: The pictogrph should be positioned to the left of the street nme. STANDARD: The Street Nme sign shll be retroreflective or illuminted to show the sme shpe nd similr color both dy nd night. The color of the legend (nd border, if used) shll contrst with the bckground color of the sign. OPTION: The border my be omitted from Street Nme sign. An lterntive bckground color other thn the norml guide sign color of green my be used for Street Nme (D3-1 or D3-1) signs where the highwy gency determines this is necessry to ssist rod users in determining jurisdictionl uthority for rods. STANDARD: Alterntive bckground colors shll not be used for Advnce Street Nme (D3-2) signs (see Section 2D.44). The only cceptble lterntive bckground colors for Street Nme (D3-1 or D3-1) signs shll be blue, brown, or white. Regrdless of whether green, blue, or brown is used s the bckground color for Street Nme (D3-1 or D3-1) signs, the legend (nd border, if used) shll be white. For Street Nme signs tht use white bckground, the legend (nd border, if used) shll be blck. GUIDANCE: An lterntive bckground color for Street Nme signs, if used, should be pplied to the Street Nme (D3-1 or D3-1) signs on ll rodwys under the jurisdiction of prticulr highwy gency. In business or commercil res nd on principl rterils, Street Nme signs should be plced t lest on digonlly opposite corners. In residentil res, t lest one Street Nme sign should be mounted t ech intersection. Signs nming both streets should be instlled t ech intersection. They should be mounted with their fces prllel to the streets they nme. OPTION: To optimize visibility, Street Nme signs my be mounted overhed. Street Nme signs my lso be plced bove regultory or STOP or YIELD sign with no required verticl seprtion. GUIDANCE: In urbn or suburbn res, especilly where Advnce Street Nme signs for signlized nd other mjor intersections re not used, the use of overhed Street Nme signs should be strongly considered. OPTION: At intersection crossrods where the sme rod hs two different street nmes for ech direction of trvel, both street nmes my be displyed on the sme sign long with directionl rrows. On lower speed rodwys, historic street nme signs within loclly identified historic districts tht re consistent with the criteri contined in 36 CFR 60.4 for such structures nd districts my be used without complying with the provisions of the 1st Stndrd; 2nd Guidnce, 1st prgrph; 2nd Option; 3rd Option, 1st prgrph; 2nd Stndrd, 2nd prgrph; 4th Guidnce; 3rd Stndrd; 4th Stndrd, 2nd prgrph; nd 5th Guidnce of this section. SUPPORT: Informtion regrding the use of street nmes on supplementl plques for use with intersection-relted wrning signs is contined in Section 2C.58. 2D.44 Advnce Street Nme Sign (D3-2) SUPPORT: Advnce Street Nme (D3-2) signs identify n upcoming intersection. Although this is often the next intersection, it could lso be severl intersections wy in cses where the next signlized intersection is referenced. STANDARD: Advnce Street Nme (D3-2) signs, if used, shll supplement rther thn be used insted of the Street Nme (D3-1) signs t the intersection. D3-2 C entury D r 14t h St N EXT ROUNDABOUT D3-2 OR OR OR Shdy Grove Rd NEXT INTERSECTIO N Ple s nt St 2 ND INTERSEC TIO N D3-2 Scott Blvd Lin coln Ave N EXT SIGN AL D3-2 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 1 Jnury, D-28

39 Type of Sign A. Pull-Through Signs Destintions -- Upper-Cse Letters Destintions -- Lower-Cse Letters Route Signs 1- or 2- Digit Shields 3-Digit Shields Crdinl Directions -- First Letters Crdinl Directions -- Rest of Word B. Supplementl Guide Signs Exit Number -- Words Exit Number -- Numerls & Letters Plce Nmes -- Upper-Cse Letters Plce Nmes -- Lower-Cse Letters Action Messge Route Signs Numerls 1- or 2-Digit Shield 3-Digit Shield C. Interchnge Sequence or Community Interchnges Identifiction Signs Words -- Upper-Cse Letters Words -- Lower-Cse Letters Numerls Frction Numerls Route Signs Numerls 1- or 2-Digit Shield 3-Digit Shield D. Next XX Exits Sign Plce Nmes -- Upper-Cse Letters Plce Nmes -- Lower-Cse Letters NEXT XX EXITS -- Words NEXT XX EXITS -- Number E. Distnce Signs Words -- Upper-Cse Letters Words -- Lower-Cse Letters Numerls Route Signs Numerls 1- or 2-Digit Shield 3-Digit Shield F. Next XX Exits Sign Exit Numerl Words Exit Number Numerls nd Letters Services Minimum Size x x24 30x x24 30x x x Type of Sign Minimum Size G. Rest Are, Scenic Are, nd Rodside Are Signs (see Chpter 2I) Words Distnce Numerls Distnce Frction Numerls Distnce Words Action Messge Words H. Reference Loction Signs (see Chpter 2H) Words Numerls I. Boundry nd Orienttion Signs (see Chpter 2H) Word -- Upper-Cse Letters Word -- Lower-Cse Letters J. Next Exit nd Next Services Signs Words nd Numerls K. Exit Only Signs Words L. Overhed Arrow-Per-Lne Signs Arrowhed (Type D Directionl Arrow) Arrow Shft Width Arrow Height Through Left Only Right Only Optionl-Diverge (Through with Left or Right) Optionl-Split (Left nd Right) Verticl Seprtor Width Verticl Spce between Verticl Seprtor nd Top of Nerest Arrow Horizontl Spce between Verticl Seprtor nd Top of Nerest Through Arrow Horizontl Spce between Arrow Shft nd EXIT nd ONLY Pnels EXIT nd ONLY Pnels M. Digrmmtic Signs Arrowhed (Type D Directionl Arrow) Lne Widths Lne Line Segments Spcing between Lne Line Segments Stem Height to Upper Point of Deprture Horizontl Spce between Arrowhed nd Route Shield or Destintion x * 5 1x * The size shown is the rrowhed width per lne depicted on the corresponding rrow shft. Note: Sizes re shown in inches nd where pplicble re shown s width x height MN Rev. 3 Tble 2E-5 Minimum Letter nd Numerl Sizes for Freewy Guide Signs According to Sign Type 2E-11 Jnury, 2014

40 SUPPORT: 2E.17 Abbrevitions A sign mounted over prticulr rodwy lne to which it pplies might hve to be limited in horizontl dimension to the width of the lne, so tht nother sign cn be plced over n djcent lne. The necessity to mintin proper verticl clernce might lso plce further limittion on the size of the overhed sign nd the legend tht cn be ccommodted. 2E.15 lnterline nd Edge Spcing GUIDANCE: Interline spcing of upper-cse letters should be pproximtely three-fourths the verge of upper-cse letter heights in djcent lines of letters. The spcings to the top nd bottom borders should be equl to the verge of the letter height of the djcent line of letters. The lterl spcing to the verticl borders should be essentilly the sme s the height of the lrgest letter. 2E.16 Sign Borders STANDARD: Signs shll hve border of the sme color s the legend in order to outline their distinctive shpe nd thereby give them esy recognition nd finished ppernce. GUIDANCE: For guide signs lrger thn 120 x 72 inches, the border should hve width of 2 inches. For smller guide signs, border width of 1.25 inches should be used, but the width should not exceed the stroke width of the lettering of the principl legend on the sign. Corner rdii of sign borders should be 1/8 of the minimum sign dimension on guide signs, except tht the rdii should not exceed 12 inches on ny sign. OPTION: The sign mteril in the re outside of the corner rdius my be trimmed. GUIDANCE: Abbrevitions should be kept to minimum; however, they re useful when complete destintion messges produce excessively long signs. If used, bbrevitions should be unmistkbly recognized by rod users (see Section 1A.15). Longer commonly used words tht re not prt of proper nme nd re redily recognizble, such s Street, Boulevrd, nd Avenue, should be bbrevited to expedite recognition of the sign legend by reducing the mount nd complexity of the legend. Periods, postrophes, question mrks, mpersnds, or other punctution or chrcters tht re not letters, numerls, or hyphens should not be used in bbrevitions, unless necessry to void confusion. The solidus (slnted line or forwrd slsh) is intended to be used for frctions only nd should not be used to seprte words on the sme line of legend. Insted, hyphen should be used for this purpose, such s "CARS - TRUCKS." STANDARD: The words NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, nd WEST shll not be bbrevited when used with route signs to indicte crdinl directions on guide signs. 2E.18 Symbols STANDARD: Symbol designs shll be unmistkbly like those shown in Appendix C of this Mnul nd the MnDOT Stndrd Signs Mnul, nd the Federl "Stndrd Highwy Signs nd Mrkings" book. GUIDANCE: A specil effort should be mde to blnce legend components for mximum legibility of the symbol with the rest of the sign. OPTION: Eductionl plques my be used below symbol signs where needed. December, E-12

41 Legend Direction of trvel B = Distnce from physicl gore to downstrem end of full width ccelertion lne Optionl norml width dotted extension of right-hnd edge line Full lne width Theoreticl gore Neutrl re B White chnnelizing lines 0.5 B MIN. Physicl gore Edge of through lne C-Tpered ccelertion lne Figure 3B-9 Exmples of Dotted Line nd Chnnelizing Lne Applictions for Entrnce Rmp Mrkings (Sheet 2 of 2) 3B-13 December, 2011

42 For entrnce rmps with tpered ccelertion lne, norml width dotted white line extension my be instlled from the downstrem end of the chnnelizing line djcent to the through lne to the downstrem end of the ccelertion tper, s shown in Drwings B nd C of Figure 3B-9. STANDARD: A wide dotted white lne line shll be used: A. As lne drop mrking in dvnce of lne drops t exit rmps to distinguish lne drop from norml exit rmp (see Drwings A, B, nd C of Figure 3B- 10), B. In dvnce of freewy route splits with dedicted lnes (see Drwing D of Figure 3B-10), C. To seprte through lne tht continues beyond n interchnge from n djcent uxiliry lne between n entrnce rmp nd n exit rmp (see Drwing E of Figure 3B-10), D. As lne drop mrking in dvnce of lne drops t intersections to distinguish lne drop from n intersection through lne (see Drwing A of Figure 3B-11), nd E. To seprte through lne tht continues beyond n intersection from n djcent uxiliry lne between two intersections (see Drwing B of Figure 3B-11). GUIDANCE: Lne drop mrkings used in dvnce of lne drops t freewy nd expresswy exit rmps should begin t lest 1/2 mile in dvnce of the theoreticl gore. On the pproch to multi-lne exit rmp hving n optionl exit lne tht lso crries through trffic, lne line mrkings should be used s illustrted in Drwing B of Figure 3B-10. In this cse, if the right-most exit lne is n dded lne such s prllel decelertion lne, the lne drop mrking should begin t the upstrem end of the full-width decelertion lne, s shown in Drwing C of Figure 3B-8. Lne drop mrkings used in dvnce of lne drops t intersections should begin distnce in dvnce of the intersection tht is determined by engineering judgment s suitble to enble drivers who do not desire to mke the mndtory turn to move out of the lne being dropped prior to reching the queue of vehicles tht re witing to mke the turn. The lne drop mrking should begin no closer to the intersection thn the most upstrem regultory or wrning sign ssocited with the lne drop. The dotted white lne lines tht re used for lne drop mrkings nd tht re used s lne line seprting through lnes from uxiliry lnes should consist of line segments tht re 3 feet in length seprted by 9-foot gps. SUPPORT: Section 3B.20 contins informtion regrding other mrkings tht re ssocited with lne drops, such s lneuse rrow mrkings nd ONLY word mrkings. Section 3B.9 contins informtion bout the lne line mrkings tht re to be used for trnsition res where the number of through lnes is reduced. STANDARD: Where crossing the lne line mrkings is discourged, the lne line mrkings shll consist of norml or wide solid white line. OPTION: Where it is intended to discourge lne chnging on the pproch to n exit rmp, wide solid white lne line my extend upstrem from the theoreticl gore or, for multi-lne exits, s shown in Drwing B of Figure 3B-10, for distnce tht is determined by engineering judgment. Where lne chnges might cuse conflicts, wide or norml solid white lne line my extend upstrem from n intersection. In the cse of lne drop t n exit rmp or intersection, such solid white line my replce portion, but not ll of the length of the wide dotted white lne line. GUIDANCE: On pproches to intersections, solid white lne line mrking should be used to seprte through lne from n dded mndtory turn lne. OPTION: On pproches to intersections, solid white lne line mrkings my be used to seprte djcent through lnes or djcent mndtory turn lnes from ech other. Where the medin width llows the left-turn lnes to be seprted from the through lnes to give drivers on opposing pproches less obstructed view of opposing through trffic, white pvement mrkings my be used to form chnnelizing islnds s shown in Figure 2B-17. Solid white lne line mrkings my be used to seprte through trffic lnes from uxiliry lnes, such s n dded uphill truck lne or preferentil lne (see Section 3D.2). Wide solid lne line mrkings my be used for greter emphsis. MN Rev. 3 Jnury, B-14

43 PART 3. MARKINGS Chpter 3C. Roundbout Mrkings 3C.1 Generl SUPPORT: A roundbout (see definition in Section 1A.13) is specific type of circulr intersection designed to control speeds nd hving specific trffic control fetures. GUIDANCE: Pvement mrkings nd signing for roundbout should be integrlly designed to correspond to the geometric design nd intended lne use of roundbout. Mrkings on the pproches to roundbout nd on the circulr rodwy should be comptible with ech other to provide consistent messge to rod users nd should fcilitte movement through the roundbout such tht vehicles do not hve to chnge lnes within the circultory rodwy in order to exit the roundbout in given direction. SUPPORT: Figure 3C-1 provides n exmple of the pvement mrkings for pproch nd circultory rodwys t roundbout. Figure 3C-2 shows the options tht re vilble for lne-use pvement mrking rrows on pproches to roundbouts. Figures 3C-3 through 3C-14 illustrte exmples of mrkings for roundbouts of vrious geometric nd lne-use configurtions. Trffic control signls or pedestrin hybrid becons (see Prt 4) re sometimes used t roundbouts to fcilitte the crossing of pedestrins or to meter trffic. Section 8C.12 contins informtion bout roundbouts tht contin or re in close proximity to grde crossings. 3C.2 White Lne Line Pvement Mrkings for Roundbouts STANDARD: Multi-lne pproches to roundbouts shll hve lne lines. A through lne on rodwy tht becomes dropped lne (mndtory turn lne) t roundbout shll be mrked with dotted white lne line in ccordnce with Section 3B.04. GUIDANCE: Multi-lne roundbouts should hve lne line mrkings within the circultory rodwy to chnnelize trffic to the pproprite exit lne. Optionl Optionl Lndscpe buffer Wide dotted white extension of circultory rodwy edge line 20 feet MIN. 20 feet MIN. MN Rev. 3 Figure 3C-1 Exmple of Mrkings for Approch nd Circultory Rodwys t Roundbout 3C-1 Jnury, 2014

44 3C-2 December, 2011 Figure 3C-2 Lne-Use Arrow Pvement Mrking Optionl for Roundbout Approches Optionl for left-most lne Optionl for left-most lne Mtch rrow(s) with desired lne use configurtion Mtch rrow(s) with desired lne use configurtion A - Norml rrows B - Fish-hook rrows Figure 3C-3 Exmple of Mrkings for One-Lne Roundbout Centrl islnd might lso be mountble or pinted yellow Legend Optionl * * * * * * * * * * Splitter islnd formed by two sets of double yellow lines Splitter islnd mountble or pinted yellow

45 Emergency-vehicle hybrid becons shll be plced in drk mode (no indictions displyed) during periods between ctutions. Upon ctution by uthorized emergency personnel, the emergency-vehicle hybrid becon fces shll ech disply flshing yellow signl indiction, followed by stedy yellow chnge intervl, prior to displying two CIRCULAR RED signl indictions in n lternting flshing rry for durtion of time dequte for egress of the emergency vehicles. The lternting flshing red signl indictions shll only be displyed when it is required tht drivers on the mjor street stop nd then proceed subject to the rules pplicble fter mking stop t STOP sign. Upon termintion of the flshing red signl indictions, the emergency-vehicle hybrid becons shll revert to drk mode (no indictions displyed) condition. GUIDANCE: The durtion of the flshing yellow intervl should be determined by engineering judgment. STANDARD: The durtion of the stedy yellow chnge intervl shll be determined using engineering prctices. GUIDANCE: The stedy yellow chnge intervl should hve minimum durtion of 3 seconds nd mximum durtion of 6 seconds (see Section 4D.26). The longer intervls should be reserved for use on pproches with higher speeds. GUIDANCE: On pproches hving posted or sttutory speed limits or 85th-percentile speeds in excess of 40 mph, nd on pproches hving trffic or operting conditions tht would tend to obscure visibility of rodside becon fces, both of the minimum of two emergency-vehicle hybrid becon fces should be instlled over the rodwy. On multi-lne pproches hving posted or sttutory speed limits or 85th-percentile speeds of 40 mph or less, either n emergency-vehicle hybrid becon fce should be instlled on ech side of the pproch (if medin of sufficient width exists) or t lest one of the emergencyvehicle hybrid becon fces should be instlled over the rodwy. An emergency-vehicle hybrid becon should comply with the signl fce loction provisions described in Sections 4D.11 through 4D.16. STANDARD: Stop lines nd EMERGENCY SIGNAL-STOP ON FLASHING RED (R10-14 or R10-14) signs (see Section 2B-53) shll be used with emergency-vehicle hybrid becons. OPTION: If needed for extr emphsis, STOP HERE ON FLASHING RED (R10-14b) sign (see Section 2B.53) my be instlled with n emergency-vehicle hybrid becon. MN Rev. 3 OPTION: A stedy red clernce intervl my be used fter the stedy yellow chnge intervl. Emergency-vehicle hybrid becons my be equipped with light or other disply visible to the opertor of the egressing emergency vehicle to provide confirmtion tht the becons re operting. Emergency-vehicle hybrid becons my be supplemented with n dvnce wrning sign, which my lso be supplemented with Wrning Becon (see Section 4L.3). GUIDANCE: If Wrning Becon is used to supplement the dvnce wrning sign, it should be progrmmed to flsh only when the emergency-vehicle hybrid becon is not in the drk mode. STANDARD: At lest two emergency-vehicle hybrid becon fces shll be instlled for ech pproch of the mjor street nd stop line shll be instlled for ech pproch of the mjor street. 4G-3 Jnury, 2014

46

47 PART 4. HIGHWAY TRAFFIC SIGNALS Chpter 4L. Flshing Becons MN Rev. 3 4L.1 Generl Design nd Opertion of Flshing Becons SUPPORT: A Flshing Becon is highwy trffic signl with one or more signl sections tht opertes in flshing mode. It cn provide trffic control when used s n intersection control becon (see Section 4L.2) or it cn provide wrning when used in other pplictions (see Sections 4L.3, 4L.4, nd 4L.5). STANDARD: Flshing Becon units nd their mountings shll comply with the provisions of Chpter 4D, except s provided in this Chpter. Becons shll be flshed t rte of not less thn 50 or more thn 60 times per minute. The illuminted period of ech flsh shll be minimum of ½ nd mximum of 2/3 of the totl cycle. A becon shll not be included within the border of sign except for SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT sign becons (see Sections 4L.4 nd 7B.15). GUIDANCE: If used to supplement wrning or regultory sign, the edge of the becon signl housing should normlly be locted no closer thn 12 inches outside of the nerest edge of the sign. OPTION: An utomtic dimming device my be used to reduce the brillince of flshing yellow signl indictions during night opertion. 4L.2 Intersection Control Becon STANDARD: An Intersection Control Becon shll consist of two or more signl fces mounted overhed directed towrd ech pproch to n intersection to supplement n ll-wy Stop sign configurtion. Ech signl fce shll consist of one or more signl sections of stndrd trffic signl fce, with flshing CIRCULAR RED signl indictions in ech signl fce. Appliction of Intersection Control Becon signl indictions shll be limited to Red for ll pproches. A STOP sign shll be used on pproches to which flshing red signl indiction is displyed on n Intersection Control Becon (see Section 2B.4). Red signl indictions used on n pproch for n Intersection Control Becon, shll be flshed simultneously to void being confused with grde crossing flshing-light signls. GUIDANCE: An Intersection Control Becon should not be mounted on pedestl in the rodwy unless the pedestl is within the confines of trffic or pedestrin islnd. OPTION: Supplementl signl indictions my be used on one or more pproches in order to provide dequte visibility to pproching rod users. Intersection Control Becons my be used t intersections where trffic or physicl conditions do not justify conventionl trffic control signls but crsh rtes indicte the possibility of specil need. An Intersection Control Becon is generlly locted over the center of n intersection; however, it my be used t other suitble loctions. SUPPORT: Studies hve shown tht t Intersection Control Becons hving flshing CIRCULAR YELLOW signl indictions for the mjor pproch nd flshing CIRCULAR RED signl indictions for the minor pproch, drivers fcing the flshing red on the minor pproch my ssume tht the mjor pproch is lso displying flshing red, nd could pull out in front of conflicting vehicle. OPTION: If there is need for wrning t two-wy stop intersection, wrning becon in n Intersection Ahed (W2 series) sign for the mjor pproch nd/or stop becon with the STOP sign for the minor pproch my be pproprite. 4L-1 Jnury, 2014

48 4L.3 Wrning Becon SUPPORT: Typicl pplictions of Wrning Becons include the following: A. At obstructions in or immeditely djcent to the rodwy; B. As supplementl emphsis to wrning signs; C. As emphsis for mid-block crosswlks; D. As supplementl emphsis to regultory signs, except STOP, DO NOT ENTER, WRONG WAY, nd SPEED LIMIT signs.; nd E. In conjunction with regultory or wrning sign tht includes the phrse WHEN FLASHING in its legend to indicte tht the regultion is in effect or tht the condition is present only t certin times. STANDARD: A Wrning Becon shll consist of one or more signl sections of stndrd trffic signl fce with flshing CIRCULAR YELLOW signl indiction in ech signl section. A Wrning Becon shll be used only to supplement n pproprite wrning or regultory sign or mrker. Wrning Becons, if used t intersections, shll not fce conflicting vehiculr pproches. If Wrning Becon is suspended over the rodwy, the clernce bove the pvement shll be minimum of 17 feet nd mximum of 19 feet. GUIDANCE: The condition or regultion justifying Wrning Becons should lrgely govern their loction with respect to the rodwy. If n obstruction is in or djcent to the rodwy, illumintion of the lower portion or the beginning of the obstruction or sign on or in front of the obstruction, in ddition to the becon, should be considered. Wrning Becons should be operted only during those periods or times when the condition or regultion exists. OPTION: Wrning Becons tht re ctuted by pedestrins, bicyclists, or other rod users my be used s pproprite to provide dditionl wrning to vehicles pproching crossing or other loction. 4L.4 Speed Limit Sign Becon STANDARD: A Speed Limit Sign Becon shll be used only to supplement Speed Limit sign. A Speed Limit Sign Becon shll consist of one or more signl sections of stndrd trffic control signl fce, with flshing CIRCULAR YELLOW signl indiction in ech signl section. The signl indictions shll hve nominl dimeter of not less thn 8 inches. If two signl indictions re used, they shll be verticlly ligned, except tht they shll be permitted to be horizontlly ligned if the Speed Limit (R2-1) sign is longer horizontlly thn verticlly. If two signl indictions re used, they shll be lterntely flshed. OPTION: A Speed Limit Sign Becon my be used with fixed or vrible Speed Limit sign. If pplicble, flshing Speed Limit Sign Becon (with n pproprite ccompnying sign) my be used to indicte tht the speed limit is in effect. A Speed Limit Sign Becon my be included within the border of School Speed Limit (S5-1) sign (see Section 7B.15). 4L.5 Stop Becon STANDARD: A Stop Becon shll be used only to supplement STOP sign, DO NOT ENTER sign, or WRONG WAY sign. A Stop Becon shll consist of one or more signl sections of stndrd trffic signl fce with flshing CIRCULAR RED signl indiction in ech signl section. If two horizontlly ligned signl indictions re used for Stop Becon, they shll be flshed simultneously to void being confused with grde crossing flshing- light signls. If two verticlly ligned signl indictions re used for Stop Becon, they shll be flshed lterntely. Verticlly ligned signl indictions used for Stop Becon shll not be used to supplement STOP sign. The bottom of the signl housing of Stop Becon shll be not less thn 12 inches or more thn 24 inches bove the top of STOP sign, DO NOT ENTER sign, or WRONG WAY sign. If Wrning Becons hve more thn one signl section, they my be flshed either lterntely or simultneously. A flshing yellow becon interconnected with trffic signl controller ssembly my be used with trffic signl wrning sign (see Section 2C.36). December, L-2

49 Pge Section 6F.41 BLASTING ZONE AHEAD Sign (W22-1) F-18 6F.42 TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELLULAR PHONE Sign (W22-2b) F-18 6F.43 END BLASTING ZONE Sign (W22-3) F-18 6F.44 Shouldert Signs F.18 6F.44.1 SHOULDER DROP-OFF Sign (W8-9) F-19 6F.44.2 LOW SHOULDER Sign (W8-9), HIGH SHOULDER Sign (W21-X9) F-19 6F.44.3 NO SHOULDER SIGN (W8-23) F-19 6F.44.4 SOFT SHOULDER SIGN (W8-4) F-19 6F.45 UNEVEN LANES Sign (W8-11) F-19 6F.46 STEEL PLATE AHEAD Sign (W8-24) F-19 6F.47 NO CENTER STRIPE Sign (W8-12) F-20 6F.48 Reverse Curve Signs (W1-4 Series) F-20 6F.49 Double Reverse Curve Signs (W1-X1, W1-X1b) F-20 6F.50 Other Wrning Signs F-20 6F.50.1 BUMP nd DIP Signs (W8-1, W8-2) F-22 6F.50.2 BE PREPARED TO STOP Sign (W3-4) F-22 6F.51 Specil Wrning Signs F-22 6F.52 Advisory Speed Plque (W13-1P) F-23 6F.53 Supplementry Distnce Plque (W7-3P) F-23 6F-54 Motorcycle Plque (W8-15P) F-23 6F.55 Guide Signs F-23 6F.56 ROAD WORK NEXT XX MILES Sign (G20-1) F-24 6F.56.1 Closure Notice Sign (G20-X1) F-24 6F.57 END ROAD WORK Sign (G20-2) F-24 6F.58 PILOT CAR FOLLOW ME Sign (G20-4) F-24 6F.59 Detour Signs nd Mrkers (M4-8, M4-8, M4-8b, M4-9, M4-9b, M4-9c, nd M4-10). 6F-25 6F.60 Portble Chngeble Messge Signs F-25 6F.61 Arrow Bords F-28 6F.62 High-Level Wrning Devices (Flg Trees) F-30 6F.63 Chnnelizing Devices F-31 6F.64 Cones F-34 6F.65 Tubulr Mrkers F-35 6F.65.1 Surfce Mounted Delinetors F-35 6F.65.2 Weighted Chnnelizers F-36 6F.66 Verticl Pnels F-36 6F.67 Drums F-36 6F.68 Type I, II, or III Brricdes F-37 6F.69 Direction Indictor Brricdes F-38 6F.70 Temporry Trffic Brriers s Chnnelizing Devices F-38 6F.71 Longitudinl Chnnelizing Brricdes F-39 6F.72 Temporry Lne Seprtors F-39 6F.73 Other Chnnelizing Device F-39 6F.74 Detectble Edging for Pedestrins F-39 6F.74.1 Temporry Wlkwy Surfce F-40 6F.75 Temporry Rised Islnds F-40 6F.76 Opposing Trffic Lne Divider Sign (W6-4) F-40 6F.77 Pvement Mrkings F-41 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 6A-iii Jnury, 2014

50 Pge Section 6F.78 Interim Pvement Mrkings F-41 6F.79 Temporry Rised Pvement Mrkers F-44 6F.80 Post Mounted Delinetors F-44 6F.81 Lighting Devices F-45 6F.82 Floodlights F-45 6F.83 Wrning Lights F-45 6F.83.1 Wrning Lights on STOP Signs F-46 6F.83.2 Stedy-Burn Electric Lmps F-46 6F.83.3 Rodwy Lighting F-46 6F.84 Temporry Trffic Control Signls F-46 6F.85 Temporry Trffic Brriers F-47 6F.86 Crsh Cushions F-52 6F.87 Rumble Strips F-52 6F.88 Screens F-53 MN Rev. 3 Chpter 6G. TYPE OF TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE ACTIVITIES Section 6G. Introduction G-1 6G.1 Typicl Applictions G-1 6G.2 Work Durtion G-2 6G.2.1 Long-Term Temporry Trffic Control Zones G-2 6G.2.2 Intermedite-Term/Night Temporry Trffic Control Zones G-3 6G.2.3 Short-Term Temporry Trffic Control Zones G-3 6G.2.4 Short Durtion Temporry Trffic Control Zones G-3 6G.2.5 Mobile Temporry Trffic Control Zones G-4 6G.3 Loction of Work G-5 6G.4 Modifictions to Fulfill Specil Needs G-5 6G.5 Work Affecting Pedestrin nd Bicycle Fcilities G-6 6G.6 Work Outside of the Shoulder G-6 6G.7 Work on the Shoulder with No Encrochment G-7 6G.8 Work on the Shoulder with Minor Encrochment G-7 6G.9 Work Within the Medin G-8 6G.9.1 Detours nd Diversions G-8 6G.10 Work Within the Trveled Wy of Two-Lne Highwy G-8 6G.10.1 Work Within the Trveled Wy of Rurl Highwy G-9 6G.11 Work Within the Trveled Wy of n Urbn Street G-9 6G.12 Work Within the Trveled Wy of Multi-Lne, Non-Access Controlled Highwy.... 6G-10 6G.13 Work Within the Trveled Wy t n Intersection G-11 6G.14 Work Within the Trveled Wy of Freewy or Expresswy G-12 6G.15 Two-Lne, Two-Wy Trffic on One Rodwy of Normlly Divided Highwy G-13 6G.16 Crossovers G-14 6G.17 Interchnges G-14 6G.18 Work in Vicinity of Grde Crossing G-14 6G.19 Temporry Trffic Control During Nighttime Hours G-14 6G.20 Instlltion, Mintennce, nd Inspection of Temporry Trffic Control G-15 Jnury, A-iv

51 Pge Chpter 6H. SPEED LIMITS IN TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONES Section 6H.1 Generl H-1 6H.2 Advisory Speeds H-1 6H.3 Temporry Speed Limits in Construction Zone H-1 6H.4 Work Zone Speed Limits H-2 6H.5 Guidelines for Work Zone Speed Limits H-3 Chpter 6I. CONTROL OF TRAFFIC THROUGH TRAFFIC INCIDENT MANAGEMENT AREAS Section 6I.1 Generl I-1 6I.2 Mjor Trffic Incidents I-2 6I.3 Intermedite Trffic Incidents I-3 6I.4 Minor Trffic Incidents I-3 6I.5 Use of Emergency-Vehicle Lighting I-3 Chpter 6J. LONG TERM TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE LAYOUTS Section 6J.1 Generl J-1 Chpter 6K. SHORT TERM TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE LAYOUTS The Field Mnul FIGURES Pge Figure 6C-1 Component Prts of Temporry Trffic Control Zone C-3 Figure 6C-2 Types of Tpers nd Buffer Spces C-5 Figure 6C-3 Exmple of One-Lne, Two-Wy Trffic Tper C-9 Figure 6D-1 Pedestrin Accessibility Checklist D-5 Figure 6E-1 Exmple of the Use of STOP/SLOW Automted Flgger Assistnce Device (AFAD) E-4 Figure 6E-3 Use of Hnd-Signling Devices by Flggers E-8 Figure 6F-1 Height nd Lterl Loction of Signs - Typicl Instlltions F-6 Figure 6F-2 Methods of Mounting Signs Other Thn on Posts F-8 Figure 6F-3 This figure hs been eliminted Figure 6F-4 Other Wrning Signs Tht My be Found in Temporry Trffic Control Zones F-21 Figure 6F-5 This figure hs been eliminted Figure 6F-6 Advnce Wrning Arrow Disply Specifictions F-29 Figure 6F-7 Chnnelizing Devices (sheet 1 of 2) F-32 Figure 6F-7 Chnnelizing Devices (sheet 2 of 2) F-33 Figure 6F-8 Interim Pvement Mrkings - 3 Dys or Less F-43 Figure 6F-8b Interim Pvement Mrkings - 14 Dys or Less F-44 Figure 6F-9 Portble Concrete Brrier Plcement nd End Tretments (sheet 1 of 2) F-51 Figure 6F-9 Portble Concrete Brrier Plcement nd End Tretments (sheet 2 of 2) F-52 Figure 6J-1 Symbols used in Typicl Lyouts J-ii Figure 6J-2 Temporry Trffic Control Devices nd Distnce Chrts J-iii MN Rev. 3 6A-v Jnury, 2014

52 MN Rev. 3 Pge TABLES Tble 6C-1 Advnce Wrning Sign Spcing C-2 Tble 6C-2 Guidelines for the Length of Longitudinl Buffer C-6 Tble 6C-3 Tper Length Criteri for Temporry Trffic Control Zones C-7 Tble 6E-1 Decision Sight Distnce E-9 Tble 6F-1 Temporry Trffic Control Zone Sign nd Plque Sizes (sheet 1 of 3) F-3 Tble 6F-1 Temporry Trffic Control Zone Sign nd Plque Sizes (sheet 2 of 3) F-4 Tble 6F-1 Temporry Trffic Control Zone Sign nd Plque Sizes (sheet 3 of 3) F-5 Tble 6F-2 Specifictions for Portble Chngeble Messge Use F-27 Tble 6F-3 Recommended Spcing of Type A, B, nd C Chnnelizing Devices F-34 Tble 6F-4 This tble hs been eliminted F-31 Tble 6F-5 Drop-offs to Commonly Justify PCB Non-Construction Speed Limits of 45-55mph... 6F-49 Tble 6F-5b Drop-offs to Commonly Justify PCB Non-Construction Speed Limits of 60-70mph... 6F-49 LAYOUTS Lyout 6J-1 Typicl Striping nd Stripe Removl for Lne Closure on Multi-lne Divided Rod J-1 Lyout 6J-2 Plcement nd Spcing of Temporry Rised Pvement Mrkers (TRPMs) J-2 Lyout 6J-3 Typicl Section for Two-Lne, Two-Wy Opertions on Multi-lne Divided Rod... 6J-3 Lyout 6J-4 Typicl Crossover to Two-Lne, Two-Wy Opertions on Multi-lne Divided Rod J-4 Lyout 6J-5 Typicl Crossover from Two-Lne, Two-Wy Opertions on Multi-lne Divided Rod J-5 Lyout 6J-6 Two-Lne, Two-Wy Opertions t Rmps on n Open Rodwy J-6 Lyout 6J-7 Two-Lne, Two-Wy Opertion t n Exit Rmp cross Closed Rodwy J-7 Lyout 6J-8 Two-Lne, Two-Wy Opertion t n Entrnce Rmp cross Blosed Rodwy J-8 Lyout 6J-9 Minline Right Lne Closed with n Exit Rmp Open J-9 Lyout 6J-10 Minline Right Lne Closed with n Entrnce Rmp Open J-10 Lyout 6J-11 Two-Lne, Two-Wy Opertions through Typicl Intersection J-11 Lyout 6J-12 Lne Closure with Stop Signs on Two-Lne, Two-Wy Rod J-12 Lyout 6J-13 Lne Closure with Signls on TwoTwo-Lne, Two-Wy Rod J-13 Lyout 6J-14 Multiple Lne Shift on Multi-Lne Divided Rod J-14 Lyout 6J-15 Rod Closure t n Interchnge J-15 Lyout 6J-16 Rod Closure with Diversion (Bypss) on Two-Lne, Two-Wy Rod J-16 Lyout 6J-17 Rod Closure with Detour J-17 Lyout 6J-18 Detour for Closed Street J-18 Lyout 6J-19 Detour for One Trvel Direction J-19 Lyout 6J-20 Typicl Signing for Rod Closure J-20 Lyout 6J-21 Entrnce Rmp Closures J-21 Lyout 6J-22 Typicl Termini Signing J-22 Lyout 6J-23 Typicl Advnce Signing J-23 Lyout 6J-24 Crosswlk Closures nd Pedestrin Detours J-24 Lyout 6J-24b Crosswlk Closures nd Pedestrin Detours J-24b Lyout 6J-25 Sidewlk Bypss J-25 Lyout 6J-25b Sidewlk Bypss J-25. Jnury, A-vi

53 Sign or Plque Sign Designtion Section Conventionl Rod Freewy or Expresswy Minimum MN Rev. 1 MN Rev. 1 Stop Stop (on Stop/Slow Pddle) Yield To Oncoming Trffic Speed Limit Fines Higher (plque) Fines Double (plque) $XX Fine (plque) Begin Higher Fines Zone End Higher Fines Zone End Work Zone Speed Limit Movement Prohibition Mndtory Movement (1 lne) Optionl Movement (1 lne) Right (Left) Lne Must Turn Right (Left) Advnce Intersection Lne Control Do Not Pss Pss With Cre Keep Right Nrrow Keep Right Sty in Lne Do Not Enter Wrong Wy One Wy One Wy No Prking (symbol) Pedestrin Crosswlk Sidewlk Closed Sidewlk Closed, Use Other Side Sidewlk Closed Ahed, Cross Here Sidewlk Closed, Cross Here Wit on Stop/Go on Slow Rod Closed Rod Closed, Locl Trffic Only Weight Limit Weight Limit (with symbols) Turn nd Curve Signs Reverse Curve (2 or more lnes) One-Direction Lrge Arrow Chevron Alignment StopAhed Yield Ahed Signl Ahed Be Prepred to Stop Reduced Speed Ahed XX MPH SpeedZone Ahed Trffic Control Chnge Ahed R1-1 R1-1 R1-2 R1-2P R2-1 R2-6P R2-6P R2-6bP R2-10 R2-11 R2-12 R3-1,2,3,4,18,27 R3-5 R3-6 R3-7 R3-30 R4-1 R4-2 R4-7 R4-7c R4-9 R5-1 R5-1 R6-1 R6-2 R8-3 R9-8 R9-9 R9-10 R9-11 R9-11 R10-X1 R11-2 R11-3,3b,4 R12-1,2 R12-5 W1-1,2,3,4 W1-4b,4c W1-6 W1-8 W3-1 W3-2 W3-3 W3-4 W3-5 W3-5b W3-X5 6F.6 6E.3 6F.6 6F.6 6F.12 6F.12 6F.12 6F.12 6F.12 6F.12 6F.12 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.11 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.6 6F.13 6F.14 6F.14 6F.14 6F.14 6E.5 6F.8 6F.9 6F.10 6F.10 6F.16 6F.48 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.30 30x30* 18x18 x36 36x30 24x30* 24x18 24x18 24x18 24x30 24x30 24x36 24x24* 30x36 30x36 30x30* Vries x 30 24x30 24x30 24x30 18x30 24x30 30x30* 36x24* 36x12* 24x30* 24x24 36x18 24x12 24x12 24x18 24x12 24x30 48x30 60x30 24x30 24x36 48x24 18x24 x48 48x36 36x48 36x24 36x24 36x24 36x48 36x48 36x54 36x48 36x48 36x48 36x48 42x30 54x18 36x48 24x30 36x48 36x48 60x30 30x36 30x30x30 24x18 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 * See Tble 2B-1 for minimum size required for signs fcing trffic on multi-lne conventionl rods Notes: 1. Lrger signs my be used wherever necessry for greter legibility or emphsis. 2. Dimensions re shown in inches nd re shown s width x height. Tble 6F-1 Temporry Trffic Control Zone Sign nd Plque Sizes (Sheet 1 of 3) 6F-3 Jnury, 2014

54 Sign or Plque Sign Designtion Section Conventionl Rod Freewy or Expresswy Minimum MN Rev. 1 Merging trffic Lne Ends Added Lne No Merge Are (plque) Rod Nrrows Nrrow Bridge One Lne Bridge Rmp Nrrows Divided Highwy Divided highwy Ends Two-Wy Trffic Two-Wy Trffic Hill (symbol) Next XX Miles (plque) Bump Dip Pvement Ends Soft Shoulder Slippery When Wet Truck Crossing Loose Grvel Rough Rod Low Shoulder Shoulder Drop-Off Uneven Lnes No Center Stripe Fllen Rocks Grooved Pvement Motorcycle (plque) Rod My Flood No Shoulder Steel Plte Ahed Shoulder Ends Lne Ends Grde Crossing Advnce Wrning Truck Double Arrow Low Clernce Advisory Speed (plque) On Rmp (plque) No Pssing Zone (pennnt) Emergency Scene Ahed XX Feet (plque) Rod Work Ahed Detour Ahed Rod (Street) Closed Ahed Tril Closed Ahed W4-1,1,5 W4-2 W4-3,6 W4-5P W5-1 W5-2 W5-3 W5-4 W6-1 W6-2 W6-3 W6-4 W7-1 W7-3P W8-1,1 W8-2 W8-3 W8-4 W8-5 W8-6 W8-7 W8-8 W8-9 W8-9 W8-11 W8-12 W8-14 W8-15 W8-15P W8-18 W8-23 W8-24 W8-25 W9-1,2 W10-1 W11-10 W12-1 W12-2 W13-1P W13-4P W14-3 W14-X15 W16-2P W20-1 W20-2 W20-3 W20-3 6F.16 6F.24 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.26 6F.16 6F.16 6F.32 6F.76 6F.16 6F.53 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.44 6F.16 6F.36 6F.16 6F.16 6F.44 6F F.45 6F.47 6F.16 6F.16 6F.54 6F.16 6F F.46 6F.16 6F.16 6F.16 6F.36 6F.16 6F.16 6F.52 6F.25 6F.16 6I.1 6F.16 6F.18 6F.19 6F.20 6F x24 12x18 24x18 24x18 36 Dimeter 30x30 24x24 x36 24x18 18x18 24x30 12x18 36x30 30x24 30x30 64x64x48 30x24 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 24x24 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 18x18 40x40x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 * See Tble 2B-1 for minimum size required for signs fcing trffic on multi-lne conventionl rods Notes: 1. Lrger signs my be used wherever necessry for greter legibility or emphsis. 2. Dimensions re shown in inches nd re shown s width x height. Tble 6F-1 Temporry Trffic Control Zone Sign nd Plque Sizes (Sheet 2 of 3) Jnury, F-4

55 Sign or Plque Sign Designtion Section Conventionl Rod Freewy or Expresswy Minimum MN Rev. 2 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 1 One Lne Rod Ahed Flgger (symbol) Slow (on Stop/Slow Pddle) Merge Bypss Ahed Nrrow Lne (width shown) Right Two Lnes Closed Lnes Nrrow Workers Fresh Oil (Tr) Rod Mchinery Ahed Slow Moving Vehicle Shoulder Work Shoulder Closed Survey Crew Survey Crew Ahed Utility Work Ahed Mowing Ahed Right (Left) Lne Closed Center Lne Closed Crew Working Ahed High Shoulder Blsting Zone Ahed Turn Off 2-Wy Rdio nd Cell Phone End Blsting Zone Slow Trffic Ahed New Trffic Pttern Ahed Double Reverse Curve (1 lne) Double Reverse Curve (2 lnes) Double Reverse Curve (3 lnes) All Lnes (plque) Rod Work Next XX Miles End Rod Work Pilot Cr Follow Me Work Zone (plque) Rod Closed Beginning XXXX XX Exit Open Exit Closed Exit Only Detour End Detour End Detour Bike/Pedestrin Pedestrin Detour Bike Detour Detour W20-4 W20-7 W20-8 W20-X3 W20-X6 W20-X11 W20-X13 W20-X17 W21-1 W21-2 W21-3 W21-4 W21-5 W21-5 W21-6 W21-6 W21-7 W21-8 W21-X5 W21-X5c W21-X6 W21-X9 W22-1 W22-2 W22-3 W23-1 W23-2 W24-1 W24-1 W24-1b W24-1cP G20-1 G20-2 G20-4 G20-5P G20-X1 E5-2 E5-2 E5-3 M4-8 M4-8 M4-8b M4-9 M4-9 M4-9b M4-9c M4-10 6F.21 6F.31 6E.3 6F F.50 6F.50 6F.22 6F.50 6F.33 6F.34 6F.35 6G.6 6F.37 6F.37 6F.38 6F.38 6F.39 6G.6 6F.22 6F.23 6F F F.41 6F.42 6F.43 6F.27 6F.30 6F.49 6F.49 6F.49 6F.49 6F.56 6F.57 6F.58 6F.12 6F F.28 6F.28 6F.29 6F.59 6F.59 6F.59 6F.59 6F.59 6F.59 6F.59 6F.59 18x18 36x18 42x36 42x36 48x24 24x18 36x18 36x18 36x18 24x18 72x60 48x36 48x36 48x36 24x12 24x18 24x12 30x24 30x24 30x24 30x24 48x18 42x36 42x36 48x24 30x24 48x24 48x24 36x24 90x78 48x36 48x36 48x36 30x15 24x18 24x12 48x36 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 36x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 30x30 MN Rev. 3 * See Tble 2B-1 for minimum size required for signs fcing trffic on multi-lne conventionl rods Notes: 1. Lrger signs my be used wherever necessry for greter legibility or emphsis. 2. Dimensions re shown in inches nd re shown s width x height. Tble 6F-1 Temporry Trffic Control Zone Sign nd Plque Sizes (Sheet 3 of 3) 6F-5 Jnury, 2014

56 6to12 feet 5 feet Minimum 6to12 feet 6 feet Minimum XX 4 feet Minimum Pved Shoulder A. RURAL AREA B. RURAL AREA WITH ADVISORY SPEED PLATE FIRST S T OPTIONAL FIRST S T OPTIONAL Advnce street nme plques or route mrkers ny be instlled bove or below wrning signs 2 feet Minimum 2 feet Minimum 7 feet Minimum 7 feet Minimum Wlkwy C. BUSINESS, COMMERCIAL, OR RESIDENTIAL AREA D. BUSINESS, COMMERCIAL, OR RESIDENTIAL AREA (WITHOUT CURB) All i h ll b t d 3 d f t li ht Figure 6F-1 Height nd Lterl Loction of Signs - Typicl Instlltions December, F-6

57 6F.18 ROAD (STREET) WORK AHEAD Sign (W20-1) GUIDANCE: The ROAD (STREET) WORK AHEAD (W20-1) sign, which serves s generl wrning of obstructions or restrictions, should be locted in dvnce of the work spce or ny detour, on the rod where the work is tking plce, nd on ll intersecting rodwys. Where trffic cn enter TTC zone from crossrod or mjor (high-volume) drivewy, n dvnce wrning sign should be used on the crossrod or mjor drivewy. STANDARD: ROA D W ORK A HEA D W20-1 The ROAD (STREET) WORK (W20-1) sign shll hve the legend ROAD (STREET) WORK, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD. 6F.19 DETOUR AHEAD Sign (W20-2) D ET OUR AHEAD W20-2 6F.20 ROAD (STREET) CLOSED AHEAD Sign (W20-3) GUIDANCE: The ROAD (STREET) CLOSED AHEAD (W20-3) sign should be used in dvnce of the point where highwy is closed to ll rod users, or to ll but locl rod users. STANDARD: The ROAD (STREET) CLOSED sign shll hve the legend ROAD (STREET) CLOSED, XX FEET, XX MILES, or AHEAD. ROAD CLOS E D AHEAD W20-3 6F.20.1 TRAIL CLOSED AHEAD Sign (W20-3) GUIDANCE: The TRAIL CLOSED AHEAD (W20-3) sign should be used in dvnce of the point where recretionl tril is closed to ll users. 6F.21 ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD Sign (W20-4) ONE LANE ROA D A HEA D T RAIL CLOS E D AHEAD W20-3 GUIDANCE: The DETOUR AHEAD (W20-2) sign should be used in dvnce of rod user detour over different rodwy or route. STANDARD: The DETOUR sign shll hve the legend DETOUR, XX FEET, XX MILES, or AHEAD. W20-4 STANDARD: The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD (W20-4) sign shll be used only in dvnce of tht point where motor vehicle trffic in both directions must use common single lne (see Section 6C.10). It shll hve the legend ONE LANE ROAD, XX FEET, XX MILES, or AHEAD. GUIDANCE: If the ffected one lne rodwy is not visible from one end to the other, or if the trffic is such tht simultneous rrivls t both ends occur frequently, flgging procedures, stop sign or signl control should be used to control lternte trffic flows. 6F-13 December, 2011

58 6F.22 Lne(s) Closed Signs (W21-X5, W20-X13) 6F.24 Lne Ends Sign (W4-2) RIGHT LAN E CLOS E D RIGHT TWO LAN E S CLOSED MN Rev. 3 STANDARD: Lne closed signs shll be used in dvnce of tht point where one or more through lnes of multiple-lne rodwy re closed. For single lne closure, the RIGHT (LEFT) LANE CLOSED (W21-X5) sign shll be used. Where two djcent lnes re closed, the RIGHT (LEFT) TWO LANES CLOSED (W20-X13) shll be used. 6F.23 CENTER LANE CLOSED Sign (W21-X5c) GUIDANCE: The CENTER LANE CLOSED (W21-X5c) sign should be used in dvnce of tht point where work occupies the center lne(s) nd pproching motor vehicle trffic is directed to the right or left of the work zone in the center lne. 6F.23.1 THRU TRAFFIC MERGE RIGHT (LEFT) Sign (W4-1) GUIDANCE: W21-X5 CENTER LANE CLOSED W21-X5c W20-X13 THRU TRAFFIC MERGE RIGHT W4-1 The THRU TRAFFIC MERGE RIGHT (LEFT) (W4-1) sign should be used in dvnce of n intersection where one or more lne closures on the fr side of multi-lne intersection require through motor vehicle trffic on the pproch to the intersection to use the right (left) lne to proceed through the intersection. OPTION: The Lne Reduction (W4-2) symbol sign my be used to wrn drivers of the reduction in the number of motor vehicle trffic lnes in the direction of trvel on multi-lne rodwy. 6F.24.1 MERGE Sign (W20-X3) GUIDANCE: The MERGE sign (W20-X3) with demountble rrow should be used when closing one or more lnes of multilne rodwy. OPTION: W4-2R MERGE W20-X3 The MERGE sign (W20-X3) my be used in conjunction with the LANE REDUCTION Sign (W4-2). 6F.25 ON RAMP Plque (W13-4P) O N RAMP W13-4P W4-2L OPTION: When work is being done on rmp, but the rmp remins open, the ON RAMP (W13-4) plque my be used to supplement the dvnce ROAD WORK sign. Jnury, F-14

59 6F.36 Motorized Trffic Signs (W8-6, W11-10) OPTION: Motorized Trffic (W8-6, W11-10) signs my be used to lert rod users to loctions where unexpected trvel on the rodwy or entries into or deprtures from the rodwy by construction vehicles might occur. The TRUCK CROSSING (W8-6) word messge sign my be used s n lternte to the Truck Crossing symbol (W11-10) sign where there is n estblished construction vehicle crossing of the rodwy. SUPPORT: These loctions might be reltively confined or might occur rndomly over segment of rodwy. 6F.37 SHOULDER WORK Signs (W21-5, W21-5) SUPPORT: Shoulder Work signs wrn of mintennce, reconstruction, or utility opertions on the highwy shoulder where the rodwy is unobstructed. STANDARD: The Shoulder Work sign shll hve the legend SHOULDER WORK (W21-5), RIGHT (LEFT) SHOULDER CLOSED (W21-5), or RIGHT (LEFT) SHOULDER CLOSED XXX FT or AHEAD (W21-5b). OPTION: T RUCK CROSSI N G W8-6 SHOULD ER WORK W21-5 W11-10 RIGHT SHOULD ER CLOSED W21-5 The Shoulder Work sign my be used in dvnce of the point on nonlimited ccess highwy where there is shoulder work. The Shoulder Work sign my be used singly or in combintion with ROAD WORK NEXT X MILES or ROAD WORK AHEAD sign. GUIDANCE: On freewys nd expresswys, the RIGHT (LEFT) SHOULDER CLOSED XXX FT or AHEAD (W21-5b) sign followed by RIGHT (LEFT) SHOULDER CLOSED (W21-5) sign should be used in dvnce of the point where the shoulder work occurs nd should be preceded by ROAD WORK AHEAD sign. 6F.38 SURVEY CREW Sign (W21-6, W21-6) GUIDANCE: The SURVEY CREW (W21-6) or the SURVEY CREW AHEAD (W21-6) sign should be used to wrn of surveying crews working in or djcent to the rodwy. 6F.38.1 CREW WORKING AHEAD Sign (W21-X6) GUIDANCE: The CREW WORKING AHEAD (W21-X6) sign should be used for short durtion ctivities being done on or off the rodwy for such things s filming, surveying, tree trimming, rod inspection, lighting, signl work, utility work, nd other ctivities where crew is visible to trffic. OPTION: W21-6 CREW WORKIN G AHEAD W21-X6 S URVEY CREW AHEAD W21-6 The CREW WORKING AHEAD (W21-X6) sign my be used in plce of the SURVEY CREW (W21-6) sign or the SURVEY CREW AHEAD (W21-6) sign. MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 6F-17 Jnury, 2014

60 6F.39 UTILITY WORD AHEAD Sign (W21-7) 6F.41 BLASTING ZONE AHEAD Sign (W22-1) U T ILITY WORK AHEAD BLASTING ZONE AHEAD OPTION: The UTILITY WORK (W21-7) sign my be used s n lternte to the ROAD (STREET) WORK (W20-1) sign for utility opertions on or djcent to highwy. SUPPORT: Typicl exmples of where the UTILITY WORK sign is used pper in Chpter 6K (the Field Mnul), Lyouts 6K- 3, 6K-9, 6K-13, 6K-22, 6K-28, 6K-40, nd 6K-51. STANDARD: W21-7 The UTILITY WORK sign shll crry the legend UTILITY WORK, XX FT, XX MILES, or AHEAD. 6F.40 Signs for Blsting Ares W22-1 STANDARD: The BLASTING ZONE AHEAD (W22-1) sign shll be used in dvnce of ny TTC zone where explosives re being used. The TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELL PHONE nd END BLASTING ZONE signs shll be used in sequence with this sign. 6F.42 TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELLULAR PHONE Sign (W22-2) The TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELLULAR PHONE (W22-2) sign shll follow the BLASTING ZONE AHEAD sign nd shll be plced t lest 1,000 feet before the beginning of the blsting zone. SUPPORT: Rdio-Frequency (RF) energy cn cuse the premture firing of electric detontors (blsting cps) used in TTC zones. TURN OFF 2-WAY RAD IO AND CELL PHONE END BLASTING ZONE STANDARD: Rod users shll be wrned to turn off mobile rdio trnsmitters nd cellulr telephones where blsting opertions occur. A sequence of signs shll be prominently displyed to direct opertors of mobile rdio equipment, including cellulr telephones, to turn off trnsmitters in blsting re. These signs shll be covered or removed when there re no explosives in the re or the re is otherwise secured. W22-2 W22-3 6F.43 END BLASTING ZONE Sign (W22-3) STANDARD: The END BLASTING ZONE (W22-3) sign shll be plced minimum of 1,000 feet pst the blsting zone. OPTION: The END BLASTING ZONE sign my be plced either with or preceding the END ROAD WORK sign. 6F.44 Shoulder Signs SUPPORT: The signs in the following sections re to be used s described. July, F-18

61 6F.44.1 SHOULDER DROP OFF Sign (W8-9) STANDARD: The SHOULDER DROP-OFF (W8-9) sign shll be used when shoulder drop-off, djcent to the trvel lne, exceeds 2 inches in depth nd is not protected by portble brriers nd the LOW SHOULDER sign (W8-9) is not used. 6F.44.2 LOW SHOULDER Sign (W8-9) HIGH SHOULDER (W21-X9) LOW SHOULD ER W8-9 SHOULD ER D ROP O FF W8-9 HIGH S HOULD ER W21-X9 STANDARD: The LOW SHOULDER sign (W8-9) nd the HIGH SHOULDER sign (W21-X9) shll be used for shoulder drop-off or rise in ccordnce with the guidelines shown in Figure 6K-3 on pge 6K-xxi. 6F.44.3 NO SHOULDER Sign (W8-23) 6F.44.4 SOFT SHOULDER Sign (W8-4) OPTION: The SOFT SHOULDER sign (W8-4) my be used for shoulder drop-off between 2 nd 4 inches in height nd the edge hs been tpered nd compcted t rte of 6:1 so tht vehicle my sfely drive on it. S OFT S HOULD ER W8-4 6F.45 UNEVEN LANES Sign (W8-11) STANDARD: The UNEVEN LANES (W8-11) sign shll be used in ccordnce with the guidelines shown in Figure 6-3 on pge xxi. GUIDANCE: The UNEVEN LANES (W8-11) sign should be used during opertions tht crete difference in elevtion between djcent lnes tht re open to trvel. 6F.46 STEEL PLATE AHEAD Sign (W8-24) STEEL PLATE AHEA D U NEVEN LA NES W8-11 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 W8-23 W8-24 OPTION: A STEEL PLATE AHEAD (W8-24) sign my be used to wrn rod users tht the presence of temporry steel plte(s) might mke the rod surfce uneven nd might crete slippery conditions during wet wether. STANDARD: The NO SHOULDER sign (W8-23) shll be used for shoulder drop-off in ccordnce with the guidelines shown in Figure 6K-4 nd 6K-5 on pges 6K-xxii nd 6K-xxiii. 6F-19 Jnury, 2014

62 6F.47 NO CENTER STRIPE Sign (W8-12) 6F.49 Double Reverse Curve Signs (W24-1 series) N O C ENTER S T R I P E MN Rev. 1 STANDARD: The NO CENTER STRIPE (W8-12) sign shll be used s detiled in Section 6F.78. GUIDANCE: This sign should lso be used t mjor connection, trffic genertors, nd/or t pproprite intervls to dvise motorists entering the zone. 6F.48 Reverse Curve Signs (W1-4 Series) W1-4 GUIDANCE: In order to give rod users dvnce notice of lne shift, Reverse Curve (W1-4, W1-4b, or W1-4c) sign (see Figure 6F-4) should be used when lne (or lnes) is being shifted to the left or right. If the design speed of the curves is 30 mph or less, Reverse Turn (W1-3) sign should be used. STANDARD: If Reverse Curve (or Turn) sign is used, the direction of the reverse curve (or turn) symbol shll be consistent with the desired vehicle pth. Except s provided in the following Option, the number of lnes illustrted on the sign shll be the sme s the number of through lnes vilble to rod users. OPTION: W8-12 W1-4b W1-4c Where two or more lnes re being shifted, W1-4 (or W1-3) sign with n ALL LANES (W24-1cP) plque (see Figure 6F-4) my be used insted of sign tht illustrtes the number of lnes. Where more thn three lnes re being shifted, the Reverse Curve (or Turn) sign my be rectngulr. W24-1 OPTION: The Double Reverse Curve (W24-1, W24-1, W24-1b) sign my be used where the tngent distnce between two reverse curves is less thn 600 feet, thus mking it difficult for second Reverse Curve (W1-4 series) sign to be plced between the curves. If the design speed of the curves is 30 mph or less, Double Reverse Turn signs should be used. STANDARD: If Double Reverse Curve (or Turn) sign is used, the direction of the double reverse curve (or turn) symbol shll be consistent with the desired vehicle pth. Except s provided in the first prgrph of the following Option, the number of lnes illustrted on the sign shll be the sme s the number of through lnes vilble to rod users. OPTION: Where two or more lnes re being shifted, W24-1 (or Double Reverse Turn sign showing one lne) sign with n ALL LANES (W24-1cP) plque my be used insted of sign tht illustrtes the number of lnes. Where more thn three lnes re being shifted, the Double Reverse Curve (or Turn) sign my be rectngulr. 6F.50 Other Wrning Signs OPTION: Advnce wrning signs my be used by themselves or with other dvnce wrning signs. Besides the wrning signs specificlly relted to TTC zones, severl other wrning signs in Prt 2 my pply in TTC zones. STANDARD: W24-1 W24-1b Except s provided in Section 6F.02, other wrning signs tht re used in TTC zones shll hve blck legends nd borders on n ornge bckground. MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 Jnury, F-20

63 6F.71 Longitudinl Chnnelizing Brricdes SUPPORT: Longitudinl chnnelizing devices re lightweight, deformble devices tht re highly visible, hve good trget vlue, nd cn be connected together. STANDARD: If used singly s Type 1, 2, or 3 brricdes, longitudinl chnnelizing devices shll comply with the generl size, color, stripe pttern, retroreflectivity, nd plcement chrcteristics estblished for the devices described in this Chpter. GUIDANCE: If used to chnnelize vehiculr trffic t night, longitudinl chnnelizing devices should be supplemented with retroreflective mteril or delinetion for improved nighttime visibility. OPTION: Longitudinl chnnelizing brricdes my be used insted of line of cones, drums, or brricdes. Longitudinl chnnelizing brricdes my be hollow nd filled with wter s bllst. Longitudinl chnnelizing devices my be used for pedestrin trffic control. STANDARD: If used for pedestrin trffic control, longitudinl chnnelizing devices shll be interlocked to delinete or chnnelize flow. The interlocking devices shll not hve gps tht llow pedestrins to stry from the chnnelizing pth. GUIDANCE: Longitudinl chnnelizing devices hve not met the crshworthy requirements for temporry trffic brriers nd should not be used to shield obstcles or provide positive protection for pedestrins or workers. 6F.72 Temporry Lne Seprtors OPTION: Temporry lne seprtors my be used to chnnelize rod users, to divide opposing vehiculr trffic lnes, to divide lnes when two or more lnes re open in the sme direction, nd to provide continuous pedestrin chnneliztion. STANDARD: Temporry lne seprtors shll be crshworthy. Temporry lne seprtors shll hve mximum height of 4 inches nd mximum width of 1 foot, nd shll hve sloping sides in order to fcilitte crossover by emergency vehicles. OPTION: Temporry lne seprtors my be supplemented with ny of the pproved chnnelizing devices contined in this Chpter, such s tubulr mrkers, verticl pnels, nd opposing trffic lne dividers. STANDARD: If pproprite chnnelizing devices re used to supplement temporry lne seprtor, the chnnelizing devices shll be retroreflectorized to provide nighttime visibility. If chnnelizing devices re not used, the temporry lne seprtor shll contin retroreflectoriztion to enhnce its visibility. GUIDANCE: A temporry lne seprtor should be stbilized by ffixing it to the pvement in mnner suitble to its design, while llowing the unit to be shifted from plce to plce within the TTC zone in order to ccommodte chnging conditions. STANDARD: At pedestrin crossing loctions, temporry lne seprtors shll hve n opening or be shortened to provide pthwy tht is t lest 60 inches wide for crossing pedestrins. 6F.73 Other Chnnelizing Devices OPTION: Chnnelizing devices other thn those described in this Chpter my be used in specil situtions bsed on n engineering study. GUIDANCE: Other chnnelizing devices should conform to the generl size, color, stripe pttern, retroreflection, nd plcement chrcteristics estblished for the devices described in this Chpter. 6F.74 Detectble Edging for Pedestrins SUPPORT: Individul chnnelizing devices, tpe or rope used to connect individul devices, other discontinuous brriers nd devices, nd pvement mrkings re not detectble by persons with visul disbilities nd re incpble of providing detectble pth guidnce on temporry or religned sidewlks or other pedestrin fcilities. GUIDANCE: When it is determined tht fcility should be ccessible to nd detectble by pedestrins with visul disbilities, continuously detectble edging should be provided throughout the length of the fcility such tht it cn be followed by pedestrins using long cnes for guidnce. This edging should protrude t lest 6 inches bove the surfce of 6F-39 December, 2011

64 MN Rev. 3 the sidewlk or pthwy, with the bottom of the edging mximum of 2 inches bove the surfce. This edging should be continuous throughout the length of the fcility except for gps t loctions where pedestrins or vehicles will be turning or crossing. This edging should consist of prefbricted or formed-in-plce curbing or other continuous device tht is plced long the edge of the sidewlk or wlkwy. This edging should be firmly ttched to the ground or to other devices. Adjcent sections of this edging should be interconnected such tht the edging is not displced by pedestrin or vehiculr trffic or work opertions, nd such tht it does not constitute hzrd to pedestrins, workers, or other rod users. SUPPORT: Exmples of detectble edging for pedestrins include: A.Prefbricted lightweight sections of plstic, metl, or other suitble mterils tht re interconnected nd fixed in plce to form continuous edge. B. Prefbricted lightweight sections of plstic, metl, or other suitble mterils tht re interconnected, fixed in plce, nd plced t ground level to provide continuous connection between chnnelizing devices locted t intervls long the edge of the sidewlk or wlkwy. C. Sections of lumber interconnected nd fixed in plce to form continuous edge. D. Formed-in-plce sphlt or concrete curb. E. Prefbricted concrete curb sections tht re interconnected nd fixed in plce to form continuous edge. F. Continuous temporry trffic brrier or longitudinl chnnelizing brricdes plced long the edge of the sidewlk or wlkwy tht provides pedestrin edging t ground level. G. Chin link or other fencing equipped with continuous bottom ril. GUIDANCE: Detectble pedestrin edging should be ornge, white, or yellow nd should mtch the color of the djcent chnnelizing devices or trffic control devices, if ny re present. 6F.74.1 Temporry Wlkwy Surfce SUPPORT: There re res of work zone where n ccessible pedestrin pthwy will cross short segments of rough, soft or uneven ground or hzrds. In ddition, work vehicles might need to cross n ccessible pedestrin pthwy. GUIDANCE: As stted in 6D.1, smooth, continuous hrd surfce should be provided throughout the entire length of temporry pedestrin pthwy. A temporry wlkwy surfce should be used to fcilitte pedestrin movement through: A. Short segments of rough, soft or uneven ground surfces; nd B. segments where vehicles my cross the temporry pedestrin pthwy nd detectble edge is not fesible, such s work vehicle ccess points. OPTION: If cler direction is not given for temporry crosswlk by the grde brek of the curb rmp (temporry or permnent), temporry wlkwy surfce my be provided to guide pedestrins long the temporry crosswlk to the receiving curb rmp or intended destintion. STANDARD: The temporry wlkwy surfce shll be firm, stble nd slip resistnt. The width of the temporry wlkwy surfce shll be minimum of 4 feet. Lterl joints between segments of the wlkwy surfce shll be less thn 0.5 inches. If detectble edges (6F.74) re not used on temporry wlkwy surfce, the edges shll be mrked with contrsting 2- to 4-inch wide mrking. GUIDANCE: Chnges between the segments of the wlkwy surfce should not exceed 0.5 inches. The side edges of the wlkwy surfce should be between 0.25 inches nd 1.0 inches thick. The leding nd deprting edges of the temporry wlkwy surfce should follow the dimensions shown in Figure 6F-10 Temporry Wlkwy Surfce Dimension. 0.5 inch mximum Leding edge Leding nd deprting edges re the sme inch mximum Figure 6F-10 Temporry Wlkwy Surfce Dimensions inch mximum MN Rev. 3 Jnury, F-40

65 6F.75 Temporry Rised Islnds STANDARD: Temporry rised islnds shll be used only in combintion with pvement striping nd other suitble chnnelizing devices. OPTION: A temporry rised islnd my be used to seprte vehiculr trffic flows in two-lne, two-wy opertions on rodwys hving vehiculr trffic volume rnge of 4,000 to 15,000 verge dily trffic (ADT) nd on freewys hving vehiculr trffic volume rnge of 22,000 ADT to 60,000 ADT. Temporry rised islnds lso my be used in other thn two-lne, two-wy opertions where physicl seprtion of vehiculr trffic from the TTC zone is not required. GUIDANCE: Temporry rised islnds should hve the bsic dimensions of 4 inches high by 12 inches wide nd hve rounded or chmfered corners. The temporry rised islnds should not be designed in such mnner tht they would cuse driver to lose control of the vehicle if the vehicle indvertently strikes the temporry rised islnd. If struck, pieces of the islnd should not be dislodged to the extent tht they could penetrte the occupnt comprtment or involve other vehicles. STANDARD: At pedestrin crossing loctions, temporry rised islnds shll hve n opening or be shortened to provide t lest 60 inch wide pthwy for the crossing pedestrin. 6F.76 Opposing Trffic Lne Divider nd sign (W6-4) SUPPORT: W6-4 Opposing trffic lne dividers re delinetion devices used s center lne dividers to seprte opposing vehiculr trffic on two-lne, two-wy opertion. STANDARD: Opposing trffic lne dividers shll not be plced cross pedestrin crossings. The Opposing Trffic Lne Divider (W6-4) sign (see Figure 6F-4) shll be n upright, retroreflective orngecolored sign plced on flexible support nd sized t lest 12 inches wide by 18 inches high. 6F.77 Pvement Mrkings SUPPORT: Pvement mrkings re instlled or existing mrkings re mintined or enhnced in TTC zones to provide rod users with clerly defined pth for trvel through the TTC zone in dy, night, nd twilight periods under both wet nd dry pvement conditions. GUIDANCE: The work should be plnned nd stged to provide for the plcement nd removl of the pvement mrkings in wy tht minimizes the disruption to trffic flow pproching nd through the TTC zone during the plcement nd removl process. STANDARD: Existing pvement mrkings shll be mintined in ll long-term sttionry (see Section 6G.2) TTC zones in ccordnce with Chpters 3A nd 3B, except s otherwise provided for temporry pvement mrkings in Section 6F.78. Pvement mrkings shll mtch the lignment of the mrkings in plce t both ends of the TTC zone. Pvement mrkings shll be plced long the entire length of ny pved detour or temporry rodwy prior to the detour or rodwy being opened to rod users. For long-term sttionry opertions, pvement mrkings in the temporry trveled wy tht re no longer pplicble shll be removed or obliterted s soon s prcticl. Pvement mrking oblitertion shll remove the nonpplicble pvement mrking mteril, nd the oblitertion method shll minimize pvement scrring. Pinting over existing pvement mrkings with blck pint or sprying with sphlt shll not be ccepted s substitute for removl or oblitertion. OPTION: Removble, non-reflective, preformed tpe tht is pproximtely the sme color s the pvement surfce my be used where mrkings need to be covered temporrily. 6F-41 Jnury, 2014

66 6F.78 Interim Pvement Mrkings SUPPORT: Interim pvement mrkings re those tht re llowed to remin in plce until the erliest dte when it is prcticl nd possible to instll pvement mrkings tht meet the Prt 3 stndrds for pvement mrkings. GUIDANCE: Interim pvement mrkings should not be in plce for more thn 14 clendr dys unless justified by n engineering study. White lne lines nd yellow centerlines, including no pssing zones should be instlled before opening the rodwy to trffic. If it is not possible or prcticl to instll these mrkings before opening the rodwy to trffic the interim mrkings should be instlled t the end of ech working dy or provided by signing in ccordnce with the provisions of this section. GUIDANCE: The temporry use of edge lines, chnnelizing lines, lne reduction trnsitions, gore mrkings, nd other longitudinl mrkings, nd the vrious non-longitudinl mrkings (such s stop lines, rilrod crossings, crosswlks, words or symbols) should be in ccordnce with the Stte's or highwy gency's policy. STANDARD: Wrning signs, chnnelizing devices, nd delinetion shll be used to indicte required rod user pths in TTC zones where it is not possible to provide cler pth by pvement mrkings. Except s otherwise provided in this Section, ll interim pvement mrkings for no-pssing zones shll comply with the requirements of Chpters 3A nd 3B. All interim brokenline pvement mrkings shll use the sme cycle length s permnent mrkings nd shll hve line segments tht re t lest 2 feet long. GUIDANCE: All pvement mrkings nd devices used to delinete rod user pths should be reviewed during dytime nd nighttime periods. OPTION: Hlf-cycle lengths with minimum of 2-foot stripes my be used on rodwys with severe curvture (see Section 3A.6) for broken line center lines in pssing zones nd for lne lines. For temporry situtions of 14 clendr dys or less, for two- or three-lne rod, no-pssing zones my be identified by using DO NOT PASS (R4-1), PASS WITH CARE (R4-2), nd NO PASSING ZONE (W14-3) signs (see Sections 2B.28, 2B.29, nd 2C.45) rther thn pvement mrkings. Also, DO NOT PASS, PASS WITH CARE, nd NO PASSING ZONE signs my be used insted of pvement mrkings on rods with low volumes for longer periods in ccordnce with the Stte's or highwy gency's policy. GUIDANCE: If used, the DO NOT PASS, PASS WITH CARE, nd NO PASSING ZONE signs should be plced in ccordnce with Sections 2B.28, 2B.29, nd 2C.45. If used, the NO CENTER STRIPE sign should be plced in ccordnce with Section 6F.47. OPTION: On low volume rods with n ADT (Averge Dily Trffic) of less thn 400 vehicles, the signs my be used in lieu of pvement mrkings for up to 14 clendr dys (see Section 5A.1). STANDARD: If no pssing zone signing is used in lieu of pvement mrkings the following shll be instlled before opening the rodwy to trffic: If no interim mrkings re used A NO CENTER STRIPE sign (W8-12) shll be used for ech direction of trvel in ccordnce with Section 6F.47. This sign shll be repeted t mjor intersections or on one-mile intervls, whichever is greter. If interim no pssing zone mrkings re not instlled but interim broken mrkings re instlled NO CENTER STRIPE sign (W8-12) shll be instlled in dvnce of ech no pssing zone. If not lredy in plce, DO NOT PASS sign (R4-1) shll be instlled on the right side of the rod t the beginning of the zone opposite of the NO PASSING ZONE sign (W14-3). A PASS WITH CARE sign (R4-2) shll be instlled on the right side of the rod t the end of the no pssing zone. 6F.79 Temporry Rised Pvement Mrkers OPTION: Retroreflective or internlly illuminted rised pvement mrkers, or non-retroreflective rised pvement mrkers supplemented by retroreflective or internlly illuminted mrkers, my be substituted for mrkings of other types in TTC zones. MN Rev. 1 Jnury, F-42

67 2 feet minimum N O C ENTER S T R I P E F F N O C ENTER S T R I P E N O C ENTER S T R I P E F Broken Line Cycle Length (N) Vrible bsed on Advnce Wrning Sign Plcement see Tble 6C-1 D O N O T P A SS N O C ENTER S T R I P E 1 mile mximum F 1 mile mximum see Note 2 F N O PA SSING ZONE OR N O PA SSING ZONE P A SS W ITH CARE N O C ENTER S T R I P E Vrible bsed on Advnce Wrning Sign Plcement see Tble 6C-1 D O N O T P A SS see Note 2 N O PA SSING ZONE OR N O PA SSING ZONE P A SS W ITH CARE P A SS W ITH CARE P A SS W ITH CARE 1 mile mximum 1 mile mximum N O PA SSING ZONE OR N O PA SSING ZONE see Note 2 N O C ENTER S T R I P E F D O N O T P A SS Vrible bsed on Advnce Wrning Sign Plcement see Tble 6C-1 F N O C ENTER S T R I P E N O PA SSING ZONE OR N O PA SSING ZONE see Note 2 D O N O T P A SS Vrible bsed on Advnce Wrning Sign Plcement see Tble 6C-1 F N O C ENTER S T R I P E TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY NOTE: 1. Either lyout my be used for up to 14 dys when the Averge dily Trffic is less thn Any NO PASSING ZONE sign (W14-3) used in temporry trffic control zone tht is pplicble in its current loction or will remin inplce fter completion of the construction project my hve blck legend nd border on yellow retroreflectorive bckground. Figure 6F-8 Interim Pvement Mrkings - 3 Dys or Less 6F-43 Jnury, 2014

68 2 feet minimum Broken Line Cycle Length (N) * Optionl D O N O T P A SS see Note OR N O PA SSING ZONE N O PA SSING ZONE P A SS W ITH CARE * Optionl * Optionl P A SS W ITH CARE 2 feet minimum Broken Line Cycle Length (N) N O PA SSING ZONE OR N O PA SSING ZONE see Note D O N O T P A SS * Optionl TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY MULTI-LANE, DIVIDED NOTE: Any NO PASSING ZONE sign (W14-3), used in temporry trffic control zone tht is pplicble in its current loction or will remin inplce fter completion of the construction project my hve blck legend nd border on yellow retroreflectorive bckground. Figure 6F-8b Interim Pvement Mrkings - 14 Dys or Less Jnury, F-44

69 STANDARD: If used, the color nd pttern of the rised pvement mrkers shll simulte the color nd pttern of the mrkings for which they substitute. If temporry rised pvement mrkers re used to substitute for broken line segments, group of t lest three retroreflective mrkers shll be eqully spced t no greter thn N/10 (see Section 3B.14). The vlue of N for broken or dotted line shll equl the length of one line segment plus one gp. If temporry rised pvement mrkers re used to substitute for solid lines, the mrkers shll be eqully spced t no greter thn N/5, with retroreflective or internlly illuminted units t spcing no greter thn N/2. The vlue of N referenced for solid lines shll equl the N for the broken or dotted lines tht might be djcent to or might extend the solid lines (see Section 3B.11). OPTION: Temporry rised pvement mrkers my be used to substitute for broken line segments by using t lest two retroreflective mrkers plced t ech end of segment of 2 to 5 feet in length, using the sme cycle length s permnent mrkings. GUIDANCE: Temporry rised pvement mrkers used on 2- to 5-foot segments to substitute for broken line segments should not be in plce for more thn 14 dys unless justified by engineering judgment. Rised pvement mrkers should be considered for use long surfced diversions (bypsses) or temporry rodwys, nd other chnged or new trvel-lne lignments, becuse of the need to ccentute chnged trvel pths nd their wet wether cpbilities. OPTION: Retroreflective or internlly illuminted rised pvement mrkers, or non-retroreflective rised pvement mrkers supplemented by retroreflective or internlly illuminted mrkers, my lso be used in TTC zones to supplement mrkings s prescribed in Chpters 3A nd 3B. 6F.80 Post-Mounted Delinetors STANDARD: When used, post-mounted delinetors shll combine with or supplement other TTC devices. They shll be mounted on crshworthy supports so tht the reflecting unit is pproximtely 4 feet bove the ner rodwy edge. The stndrd color for post-mounted delinetors used long both sides of two-wy streets nd highwys nd the right side of one-wy rodwys shll be white. Post-mounted delinetors used long the left side of one-wy rodwys shll be yellow. GUIDANCE: Spcing long rodwy curves should be s set forth in Section 3F.4 nd should be such tht severl delinetors re lwys visible to the driver. OPTION: Post-mounted delinetors my be used in TTC zones to indicte the lignment of the rodwy nd to outline the required vehicle pth through the TTC zone. 6F.81 Lighting Devices GUIDANCE: Lighting devices should be provided in TTC zones bsed on engineering judgment. When used to supplement chnneliztion, the mximum spcing for wrning lights should be identicl to the chnnelizing device spcing requirements. OPTION: Lighting devices my be used to supplement retroreflectorized signs, brriers, nd chnnelizing devices. During norml dytime mintennce opertions, the functions of flshing wrning becons my be provided by high-intensity rotting, flshing, oscillting, or strobe lights on mintennce vehicle. STANDARD: Although vehicle hzrd wrning lights re permitted to be used to supplement high-intensity rotting, flshing, oscillting, or strobe lights, they shll not be used insted of high-intensity rotting, flshing, oscillting, or strobe lights. 6F.82 Floodlights SUPPORT: Utility, mintennce, or construction ctivities on highwys re frequently conducted during nighttime periods when motor vehicle trffic volumes re lower. Lrge construction projects re sometimes operted on double-shift bsis requiring night work. GUIDANCE: When nighttime work is being performed, floodlights should be used to illuminte the work re, flgger sttions, equipment crossings, nd other res. 6F-45 Jnury, 2014

70 STANDARD: Except in emergency situtions, flgger sttions shll be illuminted t night. Floodlighting shll not produce disbling glre condition for pproching rod users, flggers, or workers. GUIDANCE: The dequcy of the floodlight plcement nd elimintion of potentil glre should be determined by driving through nd observing the floodlighted re from ech direction on ll pproching rodwys fter the initil floodlight setup, t night, nd periodiclly. SUPPORT: Desired illumintion levels vry depending upon the nture of the tsk involved. An verge horizontl luminnce of 5 foot cndles cn be dequte for generl ctivities. Tsks requiring high levels of precision nd extreme cre cn require n verge horizontl luminnce of 20 foot cndles. 6F.83 Wrning Lights SUPPORT: Type A, Type B, Type C, nd Type D 360-degree wrning lights re portble, powered, yellow, lens-directed, enclosed lights. STANDARD: Wrning lights shll be in ccordnce with the current ITE "Purchse Specifiction for Flshing nd Stedy-Burn Wrning Lights" (see Section 1A.11). When wrning lights re used, they shll be mounted on signs or chnnelizing devices in mnner tht, if hit by n errnt vehicle, they will not be likely to penetrte the windshield. GUIDANCE: The mximum spcing for wrning lights should be identicl to the chnnelizing device spcing requirements. SUPPORT: The light weight nd portbility of wrning lights re dvntges tht mke these devices useful s supplements to the retroreflectoriztion on signs nd chnnelizing devices. The flshing lights re effective in ttrcting rod users' ttention. OPTION: Wrning lights my be used in either stedy-burn or flshing mode. STANDARD: Except for the sequentil flshing wrning lights tht re described in Prgrphs 8 nd 9, flshing wrning lights shll not be used for delinetion, s series of flshers fils to identify the desired vehicle pth. OPTION: A series of sequentil flshing wrning lights my be plced on chnnelizing devices tht form merging tper in order to increse driver detection nd recognition of the merging tper. STANDARD: If series of sequentil flshing wrning lights is used, the successive flshing of the lights shll occur from the upstrem end of the merging tper to the downstrem end of the merging tper in order to identify the desired vehicle pth. Ech flshing wrning light in the sequence shll be flshed t rte of not less thn 55 or more thn 75 times per minute. Type A Low-Intensity Flshing wrning lights, Type C Stedy-Burn wrning lights, nd Type D 360-degree Stedy- Burn wrning lights shll be mintined so s to be cpble of being visible on cler night from distnce of 3,000 feet. Type B High-Intensity Flshing wrning lights shll be mintined so s to be cpble of being visible on sunny dy when viewed without the sun directly on or behind the device from distnce of 1,000 feet. Wrning lights shll hve minimum mounting height of 30 inches to the bottom of the lens. SUPPORT: Type A Low-Intensity Flshing wrning lights re used to wrn rod users during nighttime hours tht they re pproching or proceeding in potentilly hzrdous re. OPTION: Type A wrning lights my be mounted on chnnelizing devices. SUPPORT: Type B High-Intensity Flshing wrning lights re used to wrn rod users during both dylight nd nighttime hours tht they re pproching potentilly hzrdous re. OPTION: Type B wrning lights re designed to operte 24 hours per dy nd my be mounted on dvnce wrning signs or on independent supports. Type C Stedy-Burn wrning lights nd Type D 360- degree Stedy-Burn wrning lights my be used during nighttime hours to delinete the edge of the trveled wy. Jnury, F-46

71 GUIDANCE: When used to delinete curve, Type C nd Type D 360- degree wrning lights should only be used on devices on the outside of the curve, nd not on the inside of the curve. GUIDANCE: 6F.84 Temporry Trffic Control Signls 6F.83.1 Wrning Lights on STOP Signs SUPPORT: Type A wrning lights re portble, powered, red, lensdirected, enclosed lights. STANDARD: Wrning lights shll be in ccordnce with the current ITE Purchse Specifiction for Flshing nd Stedy-Burn Wrning Lights except except tht they shll be red in color. Wrning lights shll flsh when plced on STOP signs. The wrning lights shll be mintined ccording to the Type A Low-Intensity Flshing wrning lights stndrd (see Section 6F.83). 6F.83.2 Stedy-Burn Electric Lmps SUPPORT: Stedy-Burn electric lmps re series of low-wttge, yellow, electric lmps, generlly hrd-wired to 110-volt externl power source. OPTION: Stedy-Burn electric lmps my be used in plce of Type C Stedy-Burn wrning lights (see Section 6F.78). 6F.83.3 Rodwy Lighting SUPPORT: On long term projects, the use of rodwy lighting my be beneficil. Ares tht my benefit from the instlltion of rodwy lighting include high hzrd res, high volume res, crossovers, diversions (bypsses), res with sudden lignment chnges, curves, intersections nd trnsitions from multi-lne divided rodwys to two-lne, two-wy rodwys. STANDARD: When possible, ll rodwy lighting shll be protected or hve brekwy bses. STANDARD: Temporry trffic control signls (see Section 4D.32) used to control rod user movements through TTC zones nd in other TTC situtions shll meet the pplicble provisions of Prt 4. SUPPORT: Temporry trffic control signls re typiclly used in work zones such s temporry hul rod crossings; temporry one-wy opertions long one-lne, two-wy highwy; temporry one-wy opertions on bridges, reversible lnes, nd intersections. STANDARD: A temporry trffic control signl tht is used to control trffic through one-lne, two-wy section of rodwy shll comply with the provisions of Section 4H.2. GUIDANCE: Where pedestrin trffic is detoured to temporry trffic control signl, engineering judgment should be used to determine if pedestrin signls or ccessible pedestrin signls (see Section 4E.9) re needed for crossing long n lternte route. When temporry trffic control signls re used, conflict monitors typicl of trditionl trffic control signl opertions should be used. OPTION: Temporry trffic control signls my be portble or temporrily mounted on fixed supports. GUIDANCE: Temporry trffic control signls should only be used in situtions where temporry trffic control signls re preferble to other mens of trffic control, such s chnging the work stging or work zone size to eliminte one-wy motor vehicle trffic movements, using flggers to control one-wy or crossing movements, using STOP or YIELD signs, nd using wrning devices lone. 6F-47 Jnury, 2014

72 SUPPORT: 6F.85 Temporry Trffic Brriers Fctors relted to the design nd ppliction of temporry trffic control signls include the following: A.Sfety nd rod user needs; B. Work stging nd opertions; C. The fesibility of using other TTC strtegies (for exmple, flggers, providing spce for two lnes, or detouring rod users, including bicyclists nd pedestrins); D. Sight distnce restrictions; E. Humn fctors considertions (for exmple, lck of driver fmilirity with temporry trffic control signls); F. Rod user volumes including rodwy nd intersection cpcity; G. Affected side streets nd drivewys; H. Vehicle speeds; I. The plcement of other TTC devices; J. Prking; K. Turning restrictions; L. Pedestrins; M. The nture of djcent lnd uses (such s residentil or commercil); N. Legl uthority; O. Signl phsing nd timing requirements; P. Full-time or prt-time opertion; Q. Actuted, fixed-time, or mnul opertion; R. Power filures or other emergencies; S. Inspection nd mintennce needs; T. Need for detiled plcement, timing, nd opertion records; nd U. Opertion by contrctors or by others. Although temporry trffic control signls cn be mounted on trilers or lightweight portble supports, fixed supports offer superior resistnce to displcement or dmge by severe wether, vehicle impct, nd vndlism. GUIDANCE: Other TTC devices should be used to supplement temporry trffic control signls, including wrning nd regultory signs, pvement mrkings, nd chnnelizing devices. Temporry trffic control signls not in use should be covered or removed. If temporry trffic control signl is locted within 1/2 mile of n djcent trffic control signl, considertion should be given to interconnected opertion. STANDARD: Temporry trffic control signls shll not be locted within 200 feet of grde crossing unless the temporry trffic control signl is provided with preemption in ccordnce with Section 4D.27, or unless uniformed officer or flgger is provided t the crossing to prevent vehicles from stopping within the crossing. SUPPORT: Temporry trffic brriers re devices designed to help prevent penetrtion by vehicles while minimizing injuries to vehicle occupnts, nd designed to protect workers, bicyclists, nd pedestrins. There re five primry functions of temporry trffic brriers: A To keep motor vehicle trffic from entering work res, such s excvtions or mteril storge sites; B. To seprte workers, bicyclists, nd pedestrins from motor vehicle trffic; C. To seprte opposing directions of motor vehicle trffic; nd D.To seprte motor vehicle trffic, bicyclists, nd pedestrins from the work re such s flse work for bridges nd other exposed objects; nd E. To protect drop-offs of greter thn 12 inches on longer term projects when suitble buffer lne cnnot be provided. OPTION: Temporry trffic brriers my be used to seprte twowy motor vehicle trffic. GUIDANCE: Becuse of the risks to the driver nd the risks involved in plcement nd removl of temporry trffic brriers, the following lterntives to using them should be strongly considered: A. Buffer lne closures; B. Nightly bckfill of excvtions; C. Temporry tpers; D. Temporry detours or crossovers; E. For lower speed projects, dditionl or closer spcing of chnnelizing devices in conjunction with extr delinetion (TRPM's, pvement mrkings) nd extr wrning signs (in dvnce nd within work re). Becuse the protective requirements of TTC sitution hve priority in determining the need for temporry trffic brriers, their use should be bsed on n engineering study. The following fctors should be considered before using temporry trffic brriers: A. Speed/volume of trffic; B. Verticl/horizontl rodwy lignment; C. Severity of hzrd/excvtion/obstcle; D. Lterl clernce to hzrd; E. Durtion of exposure; F. Durtion of the TTC zone; G. Hzrd presented by brrier itself once inplce; H. Hzrd presented to workers nd trffic during brrier plcement. Jnury, F-48

73 Tbles 6F-5 nd 6F-5b should be used to determine when temporry trffic brrier in edge drop-off situtions. Lterl Offset * feet Lterl Offset * feet Depth of Drop-off inches >36 * Lterl offset is mesured from the edge of the trffic crrying lne to the edge of the verticl drop-off. Tble 6F-5 Drop-offs to Commonly Justify PCB Non-Construction Speed Limits of mph Depth of Drop-off inches >36 * Lterl offset is mesured from the edge of the trffic crrying lne to the edge of the verticl drop-off. Tble 6F-5b Drop-offs to Commonly Justify PCB Non-Construction Speed Limits of mph STANDARD: Temporry trffic brriers shll be supplemented with stndrd delinetion, pvement mrkings, or chnnelizing devices for improved dytime nd nighttime visibility if they re used to chnnelize vehiculr trffic. The delinetion color shll mtch the pplicble pvement mrking color. All temporry trffic brriers shll be crshworthy. Ech type of temporry trffic brrier (steel, wter-filled or concrete, etc.) requires specific bsic minimum length to chieve its crshworthy complince. Refer to the brrier's crsh testing results to determine the minimum length for predicted crsh deflections. Shorter intermittent segments of temporry trffic brrier shll not be used becuse they nullify the continment nd re-directive cpbilities of the temporry trffic brrier, increse the potentil for serious injury both to vehicle occupnts nd pedestrins, nd encourge the presence of blunt, leding ends. All upstrem leding ends tht re present shll be ppropritely flred or protected with properly instlled nd mintined crshworthy cushions. Adjcent temporry trffic brrier segments shll be properly connected in order to provide the overll strength required for the temporry trffic brrier to perform properly. In order to mitigte the effect of striking the end of temporry trffic brrier, the end shll be instlled in ccordnce with AASHTO's "Rodside Design Guide" (see Section 1A.11) by flring until the end is outside the cceptble cler zone or by providing crshworthy end tretments (see Section 6F.76). See Figure 6F-9 for temporry trffic brrier plcement nd end tretments. OPTION: End ttenution my be necessry t both ends of brrier used on two-lne two-wy rodwy. GUIDANCE: Since the brrier itself is hzrd, the use of it should be towrd the overll sfety benefit. Excessive/cute tpers nd pronounced turns/corners should be voided. Tpers should be mde s smooth s possible. Sufficient re should be mintined behind the brrier to llow for deflection. Brriers should not typiclly be butted up to, or mounted on top of curbs or medins. Plcing brriers cross curb section should be voided. Temporry trffic brriers should be nchored in ny loction tht does not llow dequte re for deflection. SUPPORT: Temporry trffic brriers re designed to deflect when struck by vehicle. Tpers, trnsition res nd brrier used outside of horizontl curves will see more deflection becuse of possibility higher ngle hits. Tngent res will generlly see less deflection. STANDARD: Different designs of brrier shll not be intermixed on the sme run of temporry trffic brrier. Brrier runs of different designs on the sme project re cceptble, but the brrier runs shll not be connected. GUIDANCE: Seprte shorter runs with different brrier design types should be discourged if longer run of one type is possible. 6F-49 Jnury, 2014

74 STANDARD: Norml verticl curbing shll not be used s substitute for temporry trffic brriers when temporry trffic brriers re clerly needed. OPTION: Wrning lights or stedy-burn electric lmps my be mounted on temporry trffic brrier instlltions. When in trnsition/tper res or close to trffic lnes, retroreflective brrier mrkers or tpe my be plced on brriers. Depending on rodwy geometrics, temporry speed reduction my be used in brrier res. GUIDANCE: When serving the dditionl function of chnnelizing motor vehicle trffic, temporry trffic brriers should be light color for incresed visibility. SUPPORT: Temporry trffic brrier is subjected to considerble buse. The plcement process itself cn cuses dmge to the bse nd ends. Connection loops cn be bent nd deformed when being plced. Temporry trffic brrier cn lso degrde over the long term. Brrier is often in plce for long periods nd is subject to winter rod slt spry nd snow plows. Over period, delmintion cn result, often to the point of section loss. Also, the repeted process of trnsport nd hndling cuses good del of longitudinl flexure, which cn cuse crcking. GUIDANCE: Brrier sections nd connections should be routinely inspected for dmge. SUPPORT: Movble brriers re cpble of being repositioned lterlly using trnsfer vehicle tht trvels long the brrier. Movble brriers enble short-term closures to be instlled nd removed on long-term projects. Providing brrier-protected work spce for short-term closures nd providing unblnced flow to ccommodte chnges in the direction of pek-period trffic flows re two of the dvntges of using movble brriers. Figure 6H-45 shows temporry reversible lne using movble brriers. The notble feture of the movble brrier is tht in both Phse A nd Phse B, the lnes used by opposing trffic re seprted by brrier. Figure 6H-34 shows n exterior lne closure using temporry trffic brrier. Notes 7 through 9 ddress the option of using movble brrier. By using movble brrier, the brrier cn be positioned to close the lne during the off-pek periods nd cn be relocted to open the lne during pek periods to ccommodte pek trffic flows. With one pss of the trnsfer vehicle, the brrier cn be moved out of the lne nd onto the shoulder. Furthermore, if so desired, with second pss of the trnsfer vehicle, the brrier could be moved to the rodside beyond the shoulder. More specific informtion on the use of temporry trffic brriers is contined in Chpters 8 nd 9 of AASHTO's "Rodside Design Guide" (see Section 1A.11). 6F.86 Crsh Cushions SUPPORT: Crsh cushions re systems tht mitigte the effects of errnt vehicles tht strike obstcles, either by smoothly decelerting the vehicle to stop when hit hed-on, or by redirecting the errnt vehicle. The two types of crsh cushions tht re used in TTC zones re sttionry crsh cushions nd truck-mounted ttenutors. Crsh cushions in TTC zones help protect the drivers from the exposed ends of brriers, fixed objects, shdow vehicles, nd other obstcles. Specific informtion on the use of crsh cushions cn be found in AASHTO's "Rodside Design Guide" (see Section 1A.11). STANDARD: Crsh cushions shll be crshworthy. They shll lso be designed for ech ppliction to stop or redirect errnt vehicles under prescribed conditions. Crsh cushions shll be periodiclly inspected to verify tht they hve not been hit or dmged. Dmged crsh cushions shll be promptly repired or replced to mintin their crshworthiness. SUPPORT: Sttionry crsh cushions re used in the sme mnner s permnent highwy instlltions to protect drivers from the exposed ends of brriers, fixed objects, nd other obstcles. More detiled informtion on the use of portble brriers nd crsh cushions cn be obtined from Figure 6F-9. STANDARD: Sttionry crsh cushions shll be designed for the specific ppliction intended. Truck-mounted ttenutors shll be energy-bsorbing devices ttched to the rer of shdow trilers or trucks. If used, the shdow vehicle with the ttenutor shll be locted in dvnce of the work re, workers, or equipment to reduce the severity of rer-end crshes from errnt vehicles. SUPPORT: Trucks or trilers re often used s shdow vehicles to protect workers or work equipment from errnt vehicles. These shdow vehicles re normlly equipped with flshing rrows, chngeble messge signs, nd/ or high-intensity MN Rev. 1 Jnury, F-50

75 See Note Shoulder 6 End of 5 Brrier End of Shoulder Brrier 2 Brrier 1 2 1:15 Brrier Tper 3 4 Shoulder Shoulder It is desirble to mintin full shoulder width whenever possible. If tht is not possible, the minimum desirble lterl offsets re bsed on the following posted speed limits: 70 mph feet 60 mph feet 50 mph feet 40 mph feet For restricted conditions, lesser offsets my be used. The offsets should be minimum of 2 feet unless the conditions re extreme. Lterl offsets re mesured to the bottom of the brrier. Brrier offset from the edge of the thru lne should not exceed 15 feet. 3 Desirble tretments for exposed brrier ends re: connection to existing brrier; impct ttenutor; tper wy to the edge of the cler zone; nd extending through plte bem gurdril by removing pnel. For posted speed limits of 30 mph or less, the tpering wy from the trffic is desirble nd the use of n impct ttenutor is optionl. A 1:8 tper my be used when the posted speed limit is 35 mph or less. A 1:12 tper my be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or less. 4 If the brrier is to be extended beyond the shoulder, dditionl fill will be needed in order to provide flt (1:10) pproch re to the brrier. (see Shoulder Fill detil in Figure 6F-6, Sheet 2 of 2) 6 The impct ttenutor should be offset minimum of 2 feet from the edge of the thru lne (see Snd Brrel Offset detil). The impct ttenutor should be oriented to ccommodte the probble impct ngle of n encroching vehicle. For most rodside conditions, n ngle of pproximtely 10 degrees, s mesured between the highwy nd the impct ttenutors longitudinl centerline, is considered pproprite (see Shoulder Fill detil). For Snd Brrel Arrngement, see detil of Figure 6F-6, sheet 2 of 2). For Two-Lne, Two-Wy trffic, both ends of the brrier should be treted in the sme mnner s described in 2. Figure 6F-9 Portble Concrete Brrier Plcement nd End tretments (Sheet 1 of 2) 6F-51 Jnury, 2014

76 Snd Brrel Offset feet Brrier 2.5 feet 2.0 feet Minimum Edge of Lne Distnce my be reduced to minimum of 1.25 feet. This is cceptble only where greter offset would cuse uncceptble interference with trffic. Shoulder Fill Portble Concrete Brrier B Attenutor A o 10 Mx Shoulder 1:10 Slope or Fltter Lne Section A Shoulder 1:10 Slope or Fltter Lne Section B Shoulder 1:10 Slope or Fltter Existing Slope Sme Slope s Existing Existing Slope Figure 6F-9 Portble Concrete Brrier Plcement nd End tretments (Sheet 2 of 2) Jnury, F-52

77 rotting, flshing, oscillting, or strobe lights locted properly in dvnce of the workers nd/or equipment tht they re protecting. However, these shdow vehicles might themselves cuse injuries to occupnts of the errnt vehicles if they re not equipped with truck-mounted ttenutors. GUIDANCE: The shdow truck should be positioned in dvnce of the workers or equipment being protected so tht there will be sufficient distnce, but not so much so tht errnt vehicles will trvel round the shdow truck nd strike the protected workers nd/or equipment.(see Chpter Prt 6K-Temporry Trffic Control Zone Lyouts for the recommended distnce chrts) SUPPORT: Chpter 9 of AASHTO's "Rodside Design Guide" (see Section 1A.11) contins dditionl informtion regrding the use of shdow vehicles. GUIDANCE: If used, the truck-mounted ttenutor should be used in ccordnce with the mnufcturer's specifictions. 6F.87 Rumble Strips SUPPORT: Trnsverse rumble strips consist of intermittent, nrrow, trnsverse res of rough-textured or slightly rised or depressed rod surfce tht extend cross the trvel lnes to lert drivers to unusul vehiculr trffic conditions. Through noise nd vibrtion they ttrct the driver's ttention to such fetures s unexpected chnges in lignment nd to conditions requiring stop. Longitudinl rumble strips consist of series of roughtextured or slightly rised or depressed rod surfces locted long the shoulder to lert rod users tht they re leving the trvel lnes. STANDARD: If it is desirble to use color other thn the color of the pvement for longitudinl rumble strip, the color of the rumble strip shll be the sme color s the longitudinl line the rumble strip supplements. If the color of trnsverse rumble strip used within trvel lne is not the color of the pvement, the color of the rumble strip shll be white, blck, or ornge. OPTION: Intervls between rumble strips my be reduced s the distnce to the pproched conditions is diminished in order to convey n impression tht closure speed is too fst nd/or tht n ction is imminent. A sign wrning drivers of the onset of rumble strips my be plced in dvnce of ny rumble strip instlltion. GUIDANCE: Trnsverse rumble strips should be plced trnsverse to motor vehicle trffic movement. They should not dversely ffect overll pvement skid resistnce under wet or dry conditions. In urbn res, even though closer spcing might be wrrnted, trnsverse rumble strips should be designed in mnner tht does not promote unnecessry brking or errtic steering mneuvers by rod users. Trnsverse rumble strips should not be plced on shrp horizontl or verticl curves. Rumble strips should not be plced through pedestrin crossings or within mrked bicycle lnes. Trnsverse rumble strips should not be plced on rodwys used by bicyclists unless minimum cler pth of 4 feet is provided t ech edge of the rodwy or on ech pved shoulder s described in AASHTO's "Guide to the Development of Bicycle Fcilities" (see Section 1A.11). Longitudinl rumble strips should not be plced on the shoulder of rodwy tht is used by bicyclists unless minimum cler pth of 4 feet is lso provided on the shoulder. 6F.88 Screens SUPPORT: Screens re used to block the rod users' view of ctivities tht cn be distrcting. Screens might improve sfety nd motor vehicle trffic flow where volumes pproch the rodwy cpcity becuse they discourge gwking nd reduce hedlight glre from oncoming motor vehicle trffic. GUIDANCE: Screens should not be mounted where they could dversely restrict motorist visibility nd sight distnce nd dversely ffect the sfe opertion of vehicles. OPTION: Screens my be mounted on the top of temporry trffic brriers tht seprte two-wy motor vehicle trffic. GUIDANCE: Design of screens should be in ccordnce with Chpter 9 of AASHTO's "Rodside Design Guide" (see Section 1A.11). 6F-53 Jnury, 2014

78

79 If the equipment trvels on or crosses the rodwy, it should be equipped with pproprite flgs, flshing lights, nd/or SLOW MOVING VEHICLE symbol. If vehicles re using the shoulder, ROAD WORK AHEAD (W20-1) or SHOULDER WORK (W21-5) sign is pproprite. 6G.7 Work on the Shoulder with No Encrochment SUPPORT: The provisions of this Section pply to short-term through long-term sttionry opertions. GUIDANCE: Prking lnes should be treted the sme s shoulders. They should be posted for ny restrictions t lest 24 hours prior to commencing work. STANDARD: If the prking lne is normlly open to vehicle trvel during the time of dy the closure will be in effect, the prking lne shll be considered trveled lne. When highwy shoulder is occupied, wrning is needed to dvise the driver nd protect the workers. A single wrning sign SHOULDER WORK or ROAD WORK AHEAD shll be used. When pved shoulders hving width of 8 feet or more re closed, t lest one dvnce wrning sign shll be used. In ddition, chnnelizing devices shll be used to close the shoulder in dvnce to delinete the beginning of the work spce nd direct motor vehicle trffic to remin within the trveled wy. GUIDANCE: When pved shoulders hving width of 8 feet or more re closed on freewys nd expresswys, rod users should be wrned bout potentil disbled vehicles tht cnnot get off the trveled wy. An initil generl wrning sign, such s ROAD WORK AHEAD (W20-1), should be used, followed by RIGHT or LEFT SHOULDER CLOSED (W21-5) sign. Where the downstrem end of the shoulder closure extends beyond the distnce tht cn be perceived by rod users, supplementry plque bering the messge NEXT XX FEET (W16-4P) or MILES (W7-3P) should be plced below the SHOULDER CLOSED (W21-5) sign. On multilne, divided highwys, signs dvising of shoulder work or the condition of the shoulder should be plced only on the side of the ffected shoulder. When n improved shoulder is closed on high-speed rodwy, it should be treted s closure of portion of the rod system becuse rod users expect to be ble to use it in emergencies. Rod users should be given mple dvnce wrning tht shoulders re closed for use s refuge res throughout specified length of the pproching TTC zone. The sign(s) should red SHOULDER CLOSED (W21-5) with distnces indicted. The work spce on the shoulder should be closed off by tper or chnnelizing devices with length of 1/3 L using the formuls in Tbles 6C-3 nd 6C- 4. When the shoulder is not occupied but work hs dversely ffected its condition, other wrning signs nd devices re pproprite. The LOW SHOULDER (W8-9), NO SHOULDER (W8-23), HIGH SHOULDER (W21-X9) or SOFT SHOULDER (W8-4) sign should be used. See Figures 6K-3, 4, nd 5 in the Field Mnul for longitudinl drop offs nd Sections 6F-44.2 through 6F In res where the speed limit is greter thn 30 mph nd the condition extends over distnce in excess of one mile, the sign should be repeted t one mile intervls. In res where the speed limit is 30 mph or less, the sign should be repeted t 1/4 mile increments. OPTION: In ddition, supplementry plque bering the messge NEXT XX MILES (W7-3P) my be plced below the first such wrning sign. Temporry trffic brriers my be needed to inhibit encrochment of errnt vehicles into the work spce nd to protect workers. GUIDANCE: Signs dvising of shoulder work or the condition of the shoulder should be plced only on the side of the ffected shoulder. STANDARD: When used for shoulder work, rrow bords shll operte only in the cution mode. OPTION: If work is directly djcent to the trvel lne, workers need to be protected. In some instnces, this my require the use of portble brriers. 6G.8 Work on the Shoulder with Minor Encrochment SUPPORT: Chpter 6D nd Sections 6F.74 nd 6G.05 contin dditionl informtion regrding the steps to follow when pedestrin or bicycle fcilities re ffected by the worksite. MN Rev. 3 6G-7 Jnury, 2014

80 GUIDANCE: When work tkes up prt of lne, vehiculr trffic volumes, vehicle mix (buses, trucks, crs, nd bicycles), speed, nd cpcity should be nlyzed to determine whether the ffected lne should be closed. Unless the lne encrochment permits remining lne width of 10 feet, the lne should be closed. Truck off-trcking should be considered when determining whether the minimum lne width of 10 feet is dequte. Trffic should not be directed onto lne tht is only prtilly pved. OPTION: A lne width of 9 ft my be used for short-term sttionry work on intermedite volume, low-speed rodwys when motor vehicle trffic does not include longer nd wider hevy commercil vehicles. 6G.9 Work Within the Medin SUPPORT: Chpter 6D nd Sections 6F.68 nd 6G.5 contin dditionl informtion regrding the steps to follow when pedestrin or bicycle fcilities re ffected by the worksite. OPTION: If the work is in nrrow medin of divided highwy, trffic control for both directions of trvel my be necessry. GUIDANCE: If work in the medin of divided highwy is within 15 feet from the edge of the trveled wy for either direction of trvel, TTC should be used through the use of dvnce wrning signs nd chnnelizing devices. If the work is long term, the use of portble brriers should be considered. 6G.9.1 SUPPORT: Detours nd Diversions Detour signing is usully designed by the trffic engineer with uthority over the closed rodwy becuse it is considered trffic routing problem. Detour signs re used to direct trffic onto nother rodwy. At diversions, rod users re directed onto temporry rodwy or lignment plced within or djcent to the right-of-wy. Typicl pplictions for detouring or diverting rod users on two-lne highwys re shown in Lyouts 6J-16, 6J-17, nd 6J-18. Lyout 6J-15 illustrtes the controls round n re where section of rodwy hs been closed nd diversion hs been constructed. Chnnelizing devices nd pvement mrkings re used to indicte the trnsition to the temporry rodwy. GUIDANCE: A diversion (bypss) should be designed the sme s crossover (see Section 6G.16). OPTION: A diversion my crry either one direction or both directions of trffic. GUIDANCE: When the detour is long, Detour (M4-8, M4-9) signs should be instlled periodiclly nd t mjor intersections to remind nd ressure drivers tht they re still on detour. When rodwy is closed t some point beyond the detour, trffic should be dvised s to wht loction the rod is open. If locl rod users re llowed to use the rodwy up to the closure, the ROAD CLOSED AHEAD, LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY (R11-3) sign should be used. The portion of the rod open to locl rod users should hve dequte signing, mrking, nd delinetion. Detours should be signed so tht trffic will be ble to get through the entire detour re nd bck to the originl rodwy. When n entire rodwy is closed, s illustrted in Lyout 6J-19, detour should be provided nd rod users should be wrned in dvnce of the closure, which in this exmple is closure 16 km (10 mi) from the intersection. 6G.10 Work Within the Trveled Wy of Two-Lne Highwy SUPPORT: Chpter 6D nd Sections 6F.68 nd 6G.5 contin dditionl informtion regrding the steps to follow when pedestrin or bicycle fcilities re ffected by the worksite. Techniques for one lne, two-wy trffic control re described in Section 6C-10. STANDARD: When one lne of two lne rod is closed, the remining lne shll ccommodte both lnes of trvel. A minimum lne width of 10 feet shll be mintined t ll times (see Section 6H-3). OPTION: On intermedite volume residentil streets, trffic my be self regulting. Where conditions permit, prking my be prohibited nd trffic shifted into the prking lnes. December, G-8

81 Posted Speed Limit Prior to Work Strting (mph) G =25ft G =50ft Posted Speed Limit Prior to Work Strting (mph) Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts G =25ft G =50ft Advnce Wrning Sign Spcing (A) feet Buffer Spce (B) feet Decision Sight Distnce (D) feet Shdow Vehicle Following Distnce (F) feet Tper Length ( 12 ft lne) (L) feet Shifting Tper (L/2) feet Typicl Shoulder Tper (L/3) feet Protection Vehicle Roll-Ahed Buffer Distnce (with or without TMA) Moving (R) (15 mph mx) Stopped feet feet MN Rev. 3 Type A chnnelizing devices re typiclly used in ttended temporry trffic control zones.* TYPE A CHANNELIZERS: 4 inch Dimeter Minimum 36 inch Minimum dytime low speed only 18 inch Minimum dytime low speed only 18 inch Minimum inch Minimum 42 inch Minimum TUBULAR MARKERS CONES WEIGHTED CHANNELIZER Type B chnnelizing devices shll be used if the temporry trffic control zone will be instlled for more thn 12 hours or if it is left unttended. * TYPEBCHANNELIZERS: 270 squre inch minimum of retroreflective sheeting surfce 36 inches 24 inches 36 inches minimum 36 inches minimum MN Rev. 3 * VERTICAL PANEL TYPE I TYPE IIBARRICADE DIRECTION INDICATOR DRUM BARRICADE BARRICADE See the MN MUTCD, Prt 6F for more detils on ppliction restrictions. Figure 6J-2 Temporry Trffic Control Devices nd Distnce Chrts 6J-iii Jnury, 2014

82

83 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Trffic control devices re not shown. Use pproprite lne closure. 2. Instll wet reflective edgelines through the trnsition nd lignment chnge res including lne closure tpers, shrp curves, exits, shifts onto temporry rodwys, etc. Remove or Cover Conflicting Pvement Mrkings A/4 L B Optionl Temporry Wet Reflective Pvement Mrkings Temporry Wet Reflective Pvement Mrkings TYPICAL STRIPING AND STRIPE REMOVAL FOR LANE CLOSURE MULTILANE DIVIDED ROAD LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-1 6J-1 December, 2011

84 TRPM TRPM TRPM Pvement Mrking Line TRAFFIC LANE Pvement Mrking Line TRPM TRPM TRPM N/5 N/5 SUPPLEMENTING A SOLID LINE TRPM TRPM TRPM TRAFFIC LANE TRPM TRPM TRPM N/5 N/5 SIMULATING A SOLID LINE TRPM N TRAFFIC LANE Pvement Mrking Line TRPM TRPM Pvement Mrking Line TRPM 1 foot 10 feet 10 feet 1 foot TRAFFIC LANE SUPPLEMENTING A BROKEN LINE TRPM TRPM TRPM N TRAFFIC LANE TRPM TRPM TRPM 5 feet 10 feet 10 feet TRAFFIC LANE MN Rev. 3 SIMULATING A BROKEN LINE N = the length of one line segment plus one gp PLACEMENT AND SPACING OF TEMPORARY RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS (TRPMs) LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-2 Jnury, J-2

85 Surfce Mounted Delinetors 4 inch Double yellow line nd/or double line of yellow temporry rised pvement mrkers NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. XX SPEED LIMIT SPEED LIMIT 1 mile spcing D O N O T P A SS N O PA SSING ZONE 50 feet N O PA SSING ZONE D O N O T P A SS 4 NEXT MILES OPTIONAL 1/2 mile 1/2 mile 2G 1/2 mile D O N O T P A SS N O PA SSING ZONE 50 feet N O PA SSING ZONE D O N O T P A SS 4 inch White edge line NEXT 4 MILES OPTIONAL TYPICAL SECTION FOR TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY OPERATIONS MULTILANE DIVIDED ROAD LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-3 6J-3 December, 2011

86 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Trffic controls re shown for only one pproch. 3. Supplementl delinetion (such s chevrons, down rrows, etc.) my be required in the bypss. 4. Design of the bypss shll be s directed by the engineer or s shown in the plns. 5. Optionl distnce plques nd BYPASS AHEAD signs my be included in the dvnce signing sequence. 6. Instll wet reflective edge lines thru the trnsition nd 250 feet pst the tngent res. Remove or Cover Conflicting Mrkings Instll Temporry Mrkings (see Figure 6J-1) Remove or Cover Conflicting Mrkings Instll Temporry Mrkings (see Figure 6J-1) 250 feet 250 feet 2G Spcing A G/2 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 2 XX OPTIONAL use the pproprite devices nd spcing for lne closure TYPICAL CROSSOVER TO TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY OPERATIONS MULTILANE DIVIDED ROAD LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-4 Jnury, J-4

87 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Trffic controls re shown for only one pproch. 3. Supplementl delinetion (such s chevrons, down rrows, etc.) my be required in the bypss. 4. Instll wet reflective edge lines thru the trnsition nd 250 feet pst the tngent res. Use pproprite left lne closure End trnsition re wet reflective edge lines feet vrible Remove or Cover Conflicting Mrkings nd Instll Temporry Mrkings (see Lyout 6J-1) G/2 A XX MN Rev. 3 2G OPTIONAL with no speed reduction TYPICAL CROSSOVER FROM A TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY OPERATION MULTILANE DIVIDED ROAD LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-5 6J-5 Jnury, 2014

88 2G Spcing Inplce Cover or Remove EXIT NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Instll t lest 7 dys prior to the strt of work. RAMP C L O SED B EGINNING XXXX XX 2 G/2 Spcing Surfce Mounted Delinetors 2G Spcing Inplce E XIT Cover or Instll EXIT CLOSE D Inplce Lincoln Ave E XIT / MILE 1 2 Cover or Instll EXIT CLOSED G/2 Spcing 2G Spcing Surfce Mounted Delinetors 2G Spcing ENTRANCE RAMP EXIT RAMP TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY OPERATIONS AT RAMPS ON OPEN ROADWAY LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-6 December, J-6

89 EXIT EXIT E X IT XX M.P.H. G/2 Spcing Surfce Mounted Delinetors 2G Spcing 2G Spcing NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. The design of the decelertion lne nd exit rmp shll be s directed by the engineer or s shown in the plns. 3. Supplementl delinetion (such s chevrons, down rrows, etc.) my be required for the rmp. MN Rev. 3 TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY OPERATION AT EXIT RAMP ACROSS CLOSED ROADWAY LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-7 6J-7 Jnury, 2014

90 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. The design of the ccelertion lne nd entrnce rmp shll be s directed by the engineer or s shown in the plns. 3. Supplementl delinetion (such s chevrons, down rrows, etc.) my be required for the rmp. 4. The dvnce wrning sign spcing is dependent on the rmp length nd the loction of inplce signing. The spcing should be s long s is prcticl. 5. Remove conflicting pvement mrkings nd instll temporry mrkings (see Figure 6J-1). 6. When n dequte ccelertion lne is provided, this sign should be omitted. 2G spcing G/2 spcing YIELD 6 MN Rev. 3 G 6 MN Rev. 3 2G spcing ROA D W ORK A HEA D TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY OPERATION AT ENTRANCE RAMP ACROSS CLOSED ROADWAY LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-8 Jnury, J-8

91 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. The design of the decelertion lne nd the exit rmp shll be s directed by the engineer or s shown in the plns. 3. The dvnce wrning sign spcing is dependent on the rmp length nd the loction of inplce signing. The spcing should be s long s is prcticl. 2G Temporry yellow edgeline G Temporry white edgeline Remove or cover conflicting mrkings feet G EXIT A/4 2G Use pproprite devices nd spcing for lne closure. MAINLINE RIGHT LANE CLOSED EXIT RAMP OPEN LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-9 6J-9 December, 2011

92 2G NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. The design of the ccelertion lne nd the entrnce rmp shll be s directed by the engineer or s shown in the plns. 3. The dvnce wrning sign spcing is dependent on the rmp length nd the loction of inplce signing. The spcing should be s long s is prcticl. 4. When n dequte ccelertion lne is provided, this sign should be omitted. Remove or cover conflicting mrkings 200 feet Minimum 4 MN Rev. 3 Temporry white edgeline G 4 Temporry yellow edgeline 3 3 2G inplce Use the pproprite devices nd spcing for lne closure. MAINLINE RIGHT LANE CLOSED ENTRANCE RAMP OPEN LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-10 Jnury, J-10

93 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Leve room for proper rdius t intersections. 3. Remove conflicting signing such s ONE WAY, DO NOT ENTER, etc. 4. Remove or cover conflicting striping such s stop brs, crosswlks, etc. OR F F 250 feet Min. Remove or Relocte the existing STOP sign OPTIONAL Pvement Mrking Arrows 24 inch Stop Line Optionl double yellow mrking OR MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY OPERATION THROUGH TYPICAL INTERSECTION LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-11 6J-11 Jnury, 2014

94 48 x 48 inch F F Remove or Cover Conflicting Pvement Mrkings Instll Temporry Pvement Mrkings 500 feet Min. 48 x 48 inch 500 feet Min G 8 50 feet feet mx. 7 F 4 F NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Approch signs nd mrking is the sme in both directions. 3. If the distnce from n inplce NO PASSING ZONE is less thn the following, the zones shll be connected with solid yellow line: 35 mph or less feet mph feet 55 mph or greter feet 4. The left side 48 x 48 inch STOP signs my be replced with 30 x 30 inch STOP signs. 5. If dequte sight distnce is not vilble to recognize stopped vehicle or trffic volume restricts vehicles from tking turns through the open lne, use Lyout 6J The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 7. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using five eqully spced chnnelizing devices. 8. Instll wet reflective edgeline through tpers nd the work re. N O PA SSING ZONE 50 feet 3 24 inch Stop Line 6 LANE CLOSURE WITH STOP SIGNS TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY ROAD LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-12 December, J-12

95 500 feet Min. 3 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Approch signing nd mrking is the sme in both directions. 3. Signl timing shll be estblished by qulified personnel. 4. Two signl heds shll be instlled per pproch. The first shll be instlled on the right shoulder. The second signl hed my be instlled on either the left shoulder or mounted over hed on the sme structure s the first signl hed. 5. If the distnce from n inplce NO PASSING ZONE is less thn the following, the zones shll be connected with solid yellow line: 35 mph or less feet mph feet 55 mph or greter feet 6. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using five eqully spced chnnelizing devices. 7. Instll wet reflective edgeline through tpers nd the work re. N O PA SSING ZONE Remove or Cover Conflicting Pvement Mrkings Instll Temporry Pvement Mrkings 2G feet Min feet 5 50 feet feet 24 inch Stop Line LANE CLOSURE WITH SIGNALS TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY ROAD LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-13 6J-13 December, 2011

96 End temporry wet reflective 4-inch white solid line Temporry wet reflective white edge line NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. The minimum lne width shll be 10 feet. 3. The curve dvisory speed will be determined by the Rod Authority t the time of instlltion. 4. The bypss sign should be used when the tngent length is 600 feet or less. 5. Omit if the bypss sign is used. 6. Instll continuous solid wet reflective lne lines through the bypss if the tngent is 600 feet or less. MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 Temporry wet reflective yellow edge line A/ Tngent Remove or cover conflicting pvement mrkings nd instll temporry pvement mrkings 3 5 L/2 Begin temporry wet reflective 4-inch white solid line 4 4 OR OR 3 3 ROAD WORK AHEAD 3 3 ROAD WORK AHEAD MULTIPLE LANE SHIFT MULTILANE DIVIDED ROAD LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-14 Jnury, J-14

97 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. The closed rod volume should be below vehicles per hour. 3. Supplementl delinetion such s chevrons, down rrows, etc. my be required in the bypss. MN Rev. 3 Lw enforcement officer is to direct trffic s needed. MN Rev. 3 3 use the pproprite devices nd spcing for lne closure Vrible: prior to lne closure ROAD CLOSURE AT INTERCHANGE SHORT TERM LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-15 6J-15 Jnury, 2014

98 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Typicl trffic control is shown for one pproch only. 3. Supplementl delinetion (such s chevrons, down rrows, etc.) my be required on the bypss. 4. The exct loction of No Pssing Zones is to be determined by the Rod Authority. If the distnce from n inplce No Pssing Zone is less thn the following, the zones shll be connected with solid yellow line: 35 mph or less feet mph feet 55 mph or greter feet Point of Curvture (PC) 500 feet Min. 3 Point of Curvture (PC) MN Rev. 3 N O PA SSING ZONE 3 Remove or cover conflicting mrkings nd Instll temporry mrkings ROAD WORK AHEAD BYPASS AHEAD ROAD CLOSURE WITH DIVERSION (BYPASS) TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY ROAD LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-16 Jnury, J-16

99 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Detour signing is shown for one direction only. The other direction shll be similr. 3. See Long Term Lyout 6J-20 for devices nd spcing. 4. Use this sign when it is 2 miles or greter to the rod closure. N ORT H D ETOUR END DETOUR N ORT H END DETOUR D ETOUR N ORT H D ETOUR N ORTH D ETOUR N ORT H D ETOUR N ORT H N ORT H D ETOUR D ETOUR D ETOUR N ORT H D ETOUR N ORTH N ORT H D ETOUR N ORT H D ETOUR N ORT H 3 Optionl Loction A A DETOUR D ETOUR ROAD C L O SED T O T HRU T RAFFIC N ORT H D ETOUR N ORTH or ROAD C L O SED 10 MILES AHEAD L OCAL TRAFFIC ONLY D ETOUR N ORTH 4 MN Rev. 2 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 2 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 A MN Rev. 3 ROAD CLOSURE WITH DETOUR LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-17 6J-17 Jnury, 2014

100 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. A M4-9 Detour Sign with n dvnce turn rrow my be used in dvnce of turn. On multi-lne streets, such signs should be used. 3. See Long Term Lyout 6J-20 for devices nd spcing. ROAD C L O SED T O T HRU T RAFFIC 3 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 2 DETOUR FOR CLOSED STREET LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-18 Jnury, J-18

101 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Additionl DO NOT ENTER signs my be desirble t intersections with intervening streets. 3. For sidewlk nd crosswlk closures, see Lyouts 6K-24 nd 6K Additionl side street signs my be required. ROAD C L O SED T O T HRU T RAFFIC A A MN Rev. 3 N ORT H DETOUR FOR ONE TRAVEL DIRECTION LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-19 6J-19 Jnury, 2014

102 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. All devices re shown for one direction. Devices for the other direction should be similr. 3. The Rod Authority will determine if detour is required nd specify the detour route. 4. Advnce wrning signs should be used seven dys in dvnce of the closure. 5. Instll t the lst drivewy or intersection beyond which there is no public ccess. ROAD C L O SED B EGINNING XXXX XX 4 B ROAD C L O SED 5 Minor Rod or Drivewy A A XXX FEET MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 MN Rev. 3 TYPICAL SIGNING FOR ROAD CLOSURE LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-20 Jnury, J-20

103 NOTES: 1. See pge iii for Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts. 2. Advnce wrning signs should be used seven dys in dvnce of the closure. 3. Cover ll directionl signing for the closed rmp. RAMP C L O SED B EGINNING XXXX XX 2 Inplce Cover MN Rev Inplce Cover MN Rev. 3 G/2 MN Rev. 3 G/2 Turn Lnes ENTRANCE RAMP CLOSURES MN Rev. 3 LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-21 6J-21 Jnury, 2014

104 60 x 24 inches 84 x 36 inches 60 x 24 inches 84 x 36 inches TYPICAL TERMINI SIGNING LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-22 December, J-22

105 Instll within the project limits t lest 7 dys prior to the strt of work Remove on the dy tht work strts Instll t lest 7 dys prior to the strt of work Remove on the dy tht work strts Instll within the project limits t lest 7 dys prior to the strt of work Remove on the dy tht work strts Instll t lest 7 dys prior to the strt of work Remove on the dy tht work strts TYPICAL ADVANCE SIGNING LONG TERM LAYOUT 6J-23 6J-23 December, 2011

106 NOTES: 1. When crosswlks, sidewlks or other pedestrin fcilities re blocked, closed or relocted, temporry fcilities shll include ccessibility fetures consistent with the fetures present in the existing pedestrin fcility. MN Rev The exmples show only key typicl dimensions. Refer to the MnDOT "Temporry Pedestrin Access Route" (TPAR) website ( for stndrds, guidnce nd options when blocking, closing, or relocting pedestrin fcilities. 3. Only trffic control devices controlling pedestrin flows re shown. Other devices my be needed to control trffic on the streets. 4. An pproved udible messge device or tctile messge should be provided for sight-impired pedestrins. When used, messge device should provide complete physicl description of the temporry pedestrin detour including durtion, length of (nd/or distnce to) the bypss, ny restrictions or hzrds nd project informtion s listed in note 5 below. The number nd loction of devices should be determined for ech project prior to strting work. Devices my be plced prior to sidewlk work to wrn regulr users of the plnned work. 5. Typicl sign messge for temporry pedestrin detour should include informtion such s the durtion of the wlkwy restrictions (beginning nd/or end dtes) nd project contct number for 24/7 questions or reporting hzrds. 6. The Interntionl Symbol of Accessibility should be displyed when ny wlkwy through work zone hs been determined to be TPAR complint. The Symbol of Accessibility shll not be displyed if persons with disbilities should not use the primry temporry pedestrin detour. The reson for the non-complince should be posted nd n lternte route should be posted when the primry temporry pedestrin detour is non-complint to TPAR stndrds. 7. Conditions tht re beyond recommended stndrds should be documented. A wlkwy is non-complint if it is missing key ADA elements such s curb rmp(s), truncted domes, nd detectble edging. Other restrictions or hzrds my include insufficient width or pinch-point widths, trffic conflicts, steep grdes, non-continuous rilings, tripping hzrds, or uneven/rough/soft surfce conditions, etc. 8. Pedestrin trffic signl displys controlling closed crosswlks shll be covered. Temporry pedestrin signls should be considered when creting new crossing loction. 9. Curb mrking shll be prohibited for minimum of 30 feet in dvnce of the mid-block pedestrin crossing. Crosswlk mrking shll be instlled nd conflicting mrking removed or covered. Curb rmps with detectble wrnings shll be provided to trnsition from the sidewlk to the crosswlk. 10. Pedestrin detour trilblzing signs should be used if the pedestrin detour is locted someplce other thn cross the street from the sidewlk closure. MN Rev. 3 LONG TERM CROSSWALK CLOSURES AND PEDESTRIAN DETOURS LAYOUT 6J-24 Jnury, J-24

107 U S E O THER S IDE S IDEWALK C L O S ED SIDEWALK CLOSED EST. COMPLETION OCT 20XX PROJECT CONTACT 612-XXX-XXX EST. COMPLETION OCT 20XX PROJECT CONTACT 612-XXX-XXX U S E O THER S IDE 4CO NTACT 612-XXX-XXX S IDEWALK C L O S ED SIDEWALK CLOSED SIDEWALK CLOSED S IDEWALK C L O S ED A HEA D CROSS H E R E ENDS OCT 20XX Pedestrin Crossing Signl SIDEWALK CLOSED S IDEWALK C L O S ED A HEAD 8 Pedestrin Crossing Signl 9 4 CROSS HERE ENDS OCT 20XX CO NTACT 612-XXX-XXX 6 5 MN Rev. 3 LONG TERM CROSSWALK CLOSURES AND PEDESTRIAN DETOURS LAYOUT 6J-24b 6J-24b Jnury, 2014

108 NOTES: 1. When crosswlks, sidewlks or other pedestrin fcilities re blocked, closed or relocted, temporry fcilities shll include ccessibility fetures consistent with the fetures present in the existing pedestrin fcility. MN Rev The exmples show only key typicl dimensions. Refer to the MnDOT "Temporry Pedestrin Access Route" (TPAR) website ( for stndrds, guidnce nd options when blocking, closing, or relocting pedestrin fcilities. 3. Where high speeds nd/or high trffic volumes re nticipted, brrier should be used to seprte the temporry pedestrin wlkwy from vehiculr trffic. When used, brriers shll be instlled s detiled in the MN MUTCD, Prt 6F. 4. Only trffic control devices controlling pedestrin flows re shown. Other devices my be needed to control trffic on the streets. 5. When both sides of temporry pedestrin bypss require chnnelizing devices, then the devices should be similr type (riling system, brricde, or fencing system), excluding when TTC brrier (such s concrete brrier) is used to protect pedestrins from n open trffic lne. 6. An pproved udible messge device or tctile messge should be provided for sight-impired pedestrins. When used, messge device should provide complete physicl description of the temporry pedestrin by-pss including durtion, length of (nd/or distnce to) the bypss, ny restrictions or hzrds nd project informtion s listed in note 7 below. The messge device(s) my lso describe n lternte route. The number nd loction of devices should be determined for ech project prior to strting work. Devices my be plced prior to sidewlk work to wrn regulr users of the plnned work. 7. Typicl sign messge for temporry pedestrin bypss should include informtion such s the durtion of the wlkwy restrictions (beginning nd/or end dtes) nd project contct number for 24/7 questions or reporting hzrds. 8. The Interntionl Symbol of Accessibility should be displyed when ny wlkwy through work zone hs been determined to be TPAR complint. The Symbol of Accessibility shll not be displyed if persons with disbilities should not enter the temporry pedestrin bypss. An lternte route should be posted when the temporry pedestrin bypss is non-complint to TPAR stndrds. 9. Conditions tht re beyond recommended stndrds should be documented. A wlkwy is non-complint if it is missing key ADA elements such s curb rmp(s), truncted domes, nd detectble edging. Other restrictions or hzrds my include insufficient width or pinch-point widths, trffic conflicts, steep grdes, non-continuous rilings, tripping hzrds, or uneven/rough/soft surfce conditions, etc. 10. When sidewlk is closed but workers re present who will provide ssistnce or directions to pedestrins, then the devices s shown re not required. LONG TERM SIDEWALK BYPASS LAYOUT 6J-25 Jnury, J-25

109 LOW-SPEED ROADWAY 5 MINOR ROAD Temporry truncted domes, optionl bsed upon usge of cross-street TPAR width of 60 inches is preferred. If width is 48 inch, then t lest one 60 x 60-inch pssing spce is required for every 200 feet of length. Temporry curb rmp providing 12:1 (8%) slope or fltter nd non-slip tretment dded Rmp lnding re providing 48 x 48 inch minimum re nd 2% or fltter cross-slope 5 device tper 25 feet long (1 stll), recommended when the closed re ws used s b intermittent trffic lne or bypss lne. Additionl udible messge devices my be needed for route informtion 6 8 SIDEWALK WORK AHEAD ENDS OCT 20XX CO NTACT 612-XXX-XXX 7 HIGH-SPEED ROADWAY or LOW-SPEED MULTI-LANE 5 Curb & gutter or other trnsition between rodwy nd sidewlk TTC brrier with tper nd ttenution (length s required) TPAR width of 60 inches is preferred. If width is 48 inch, then t lest one 60 x 60-inch pssing spce is required for every 200 feet of length. Temporry curb rmp providing 12:1 (8%) slope or fltter nd non-slip tretment dded Rmp lnding re providing 48 x 48 inch minimum re nd 2% or fltter cross-slope Temporry wlkwy surfce covering rough, soft or uneven ground or hzrds 6 8 SIDEWALK WORK AHEAD ENDS OCT 20XX CO NTACT 612-XXX-XXX 7 LONG TERM SIDEWALK BYPASS LAYOUT 6J-25b MN Rev. 3 6J-25b Jnury, 2014

110

111 Temporry Trffic Control Zone Lyouts Miscellneous Lyouts Stndrds & Specifictions Two-Lne Two-Wy Qulity Stndrds Multi-Lne Divided Multi-Lne Undivided Flgging Hndbook Field Mnul Jnury, 2014

112 K. The Field Mnul Index Pges Introduction K-i Definitions of Shll, Should, nd My K-i Definitions K-ii thru 6K-vii Temporry Trffic Control Generl Guidelines K-viii thru 6K-xi Checklist for Estblishing Temporry Trffic Control Zone K-xii Temporry Trffic Control Devices K-xiii Work Zone Signing K-xiv Crshworthy Testing Complince K-xv Guidelines for Portble Chngeble Messge Signs K-xvi thru 6K-xvii Stndrd Abbrevitions for Use on Portble Chngeble Messge Signs K-xviii thru 6K-xix Arrow Bord Specifictions K-xx Longitudinl Drop-off Guidelines K-xxi thru 6K-xiii Components of Temporry Trffic Control Zone K-xxiv thru 6K-xxv Sign Codes Quick Reference K-xxvi thru 6K-xxvii Smple Project Inspection Checklist K-xxviii Chnnelizing Devices K-xxix MN TPAR Devices K-xxx thru -xxxi Symbols used in Typicl Lyouts K-xxxii Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts K-xxxiii *Two-Lne, Two-Wy Rods (Lyouts 1-30) K-1thru 6K-30 (A rodwy consisting of two opposing lnes of undivided trffic.) *Multi-Lne Undivided Rods (Lyouts 31-43) K-31 thru 6K-43 (A rodwy with two or more lnes of trffic in the sme direction with no physicl brrier seprting the opposing trffic lnes.) *Multi-Lne Divided Rod (Lyouts 45-66) K-45 thru 6K-66 (Two seprte rodwys where opposing trffic is seprted by physicl brrier or medin.) *Miscellneous Lyouts (Lyouts 67-90) K-67 thru 6K-90 (Lyouts for Continuously Moving nd Miscellneous Signing Opertions) Qulity Stndrds K-91 thru 6K-106 Flgging Hndbook K-107 thru 6K-118 Notes K-119 Mn/DOT Telephone Numbers K-120 thru 6K-121 Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts Inside of the Bck Cover Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts Flip out Pnel * See inside front cover of ech section for specific index to lyouts. This document s well s the Flgging Hndbook nd other documents re vilble on the Mn/DOT, Trffic Engineering website t: Jnury, 2014 A2

113 INTRODUCTION This Field Mnul is section of the Prt 6 of the Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices (MN MUTCD). It hs been reprinted s seprte document for use in field opertions. This Field Mnul contins the generl Temporry Trffic Control (TTC) stndrds nd the user should refer to the MN MUTCD - Prt 6 for more detils, nd follow ny TTC plns, specifictions, nd specil provisions written for specific project. When specific TTC plns for specific opertion re not vilble, ny public or privte gency whose work ffects vehiculr nd pedestrin trffic should use this Field Mnul to provide proper temporry trffic control (TTC). The typicl lyouts contined in this mnul do not cover ll situtions encountered. Becuse ll situtions differ, engineering judgment should be used to insure proper trffic control. The gol of the temporry trffic control zone is to provide for the sfe nd efficient movement of trffic round loction where the norml function of the rodwy is temporrily suspended. To ccomplish this, the respect of the driver must be erned by pproprite nd prudent use of trffic control devices. When work is not in progress or the hzrd no longer exists, the temporry trffic control devices shll be covered, turned wy from trffic, or removed from the re. This mnul contins typicl lyouts for temporry trffic control zones rnging from mobile opertions to zones which my remin inplce overnight for up to three dys. If the temporry trffic control zone is to remin in one plce for more thn three dys or involves detour, rod closure or sitution where the typicl lyouts do not pply, the governing rod uthority's Trffic Engineering stff should be consulted nd project specific Temporry Trffic Control Pln prepred. Advnce plnning is necessry for successful temporry trffic control zone. A checklist is included on pge 6K-xii to ssist you in plnning your temporry trffic control zone. Prior to strting work on ny public rodwy right-of-wy, permission shll be obtined from the governing rod uthority. The use of ny regultory temporry trffic control device or sign shll be pproved by the governing rod uthority prior to instlltion. To ssist you on stte highwys, numbers for the Minnesot Deprtment of Trnsporttion re included in the bck of this mnul. You my wish to note the number of other rod uthorities on the NOTES pge in the bck of this book. DEFINITION OF SHALL, SHOULD, AND MAY Shll - indictes sttement of required, mndtory, or specificlly prohibitive prctice regrding trffic control device. Should - indictes sttement of recommended prctice, but not mndtory, in typicl situtions, with devitions llowed if engineering judgment or engineering study indictes the devition to be pproprite. My - indictes sttement of prctice tht is permissive condition nd crries no requirement or recommendtion. 6K-i Jnury, 2014

114 DEFINITIONS Activity Are - tht prt of TTC zone ctivity re where the work ctully tkes plce. It consists of the work spce, trffic spce nd one or more buffer spces. Advnce Wrning Are - tht prt of TTC zone used to inform the motorist wht to expect hed. This re my contin nywhere from single sign or rotting/strobe light on vehicle to series of signs nd the use of portble chngeble messge sign (PCMS). The loction of the beginning of the TTC zone is dependent on its visibility to motorists. Good visibility is chieved where the sight distnce is sufficient to meet decision sight distnce. Advnce Wrning Sign Spcing - the distnce between signs or between sign nd some other loction or device with the TTC zone. It is determined by the posted speed limit. This will ensure tht the motorist hs sufficient time to red the signs nd rect ccordingly. Typicl Advnce Wrning Sign Spcings (A) re included in the TTC Distnce Chrts. Advisory Speed - the recommended speed for ll vehicles operting on section of highwy nd bsed on the highwy design, operting chrcteristics, nd conditions. (See Lyout 6K- 77). Approch Sight Distnce - the distnce which motorist cn visully identify work spce. The work spce my be the flgger sttion, lne closure, slow moving or stopped vehicle, or ny other sitution which requires djustments by the motorist. Attended Work Spce - work spce is considered to be ttended when the TTC devices re reviewed for knock-downs or other needed djustments on n hourly bsis. Averge Dily Trffic (ADT) - the verge 24-hour volume, being the totl volume during stted period divided by the number of dys in tht period. Buffer Spce - the spce which provides mrgin of sfety for both the driver nd the workers. It is importnt tht the buffer spce be free of equipment, workers, mteril nd vehicles. Crshworthy - is chrcteristic of rodside devices tht hve been successfully crsh tested in ccordnce with ntionl stndrd such s the Ntionl Coopertive Highwy Reserch Progrm Report 350, Recommended Procedures for the Sfety Performnce Evlution of Highwy Fetures. Jnury, K-ii

115 Decision Sight Distnce - the totl distnce trveled during the length of time required for driver to: detect n unexpected or otherwise difficult-to-perceive informtion source or hzrd in rodwy environment tht my be visully cluttered, recognize the hzrd or its potentil thret, select n pproprite speed nd pth, nd initite nd complete the required mneuver sfely nd efficiently. The decision sight distnce is used to determine the minimum dvnce wrning distnce to the furthest nd/or single sign. When determining minimum sight distnce to flggers nd mobile opertions, these distnces lso pply. The required Decision Sight Distnces (D) re included in the TTC Distnce Chrts. Divided Rod - highwy or two rodwys where opposing trffic is seprted by medin (ditch, brrier, curbing, etc.), nd the medin is generlly wide enough to plce TTC devices. Temporry trffic control for divided multi-lne rods my be lso used for one-wy rodwys. Downstrem Tper - the tper t the end of the ctivity re which guides trffic bck into its originl lne. When used, this tper is minimum length of pproximtely 100 feet with 20- foot spcing between chnnelizing devices. Durtion - the length of time ny work opertion occupies specific loction or cuses trffic obstruction without chnging the loction. This time is mesured from the first disruption to trffic until the totl clering of the re. The following durtions re defined in overlpping intervls since TTC lyouts for longer durtions my lwys be used for shorter durtions, especilly when rodwy ttributes such s trffic volume nd speed, nd the work spce loction my wrrnt higher levels of trffic control. Mobile - when n opertion is continuously moving or stopped in one loction for periods of 15 minutes or less. The trffic control devices re typiclly vehicle-mounted. The work re should chnge by t lest the decision sight distnce for it to be considered chnge in loction. Short Durtion - when n opertion stys in one loction during dylight conditions from 15 minutes to one hour, such tht miniml TTC devices re deployed. Short Term - when n opertion stys in one loction during dylight conditions from 15 minutes to twelve hours, such tht dvnce signing nd chnnelizing devices re required. Intermedite Term/Night - when n opertion stys in one loction during dylight conditions from 15 minutes to no more thn 3 dys, or stys in one loction during hours of drkness. Advnce signing nd lrger chnnelizing devices (Type B) re required. Long Term - when n opertion stys in one loction for more thn 3 dys. A project specific Trffic Control Pln is typiclly required. 6K-iii Jnury, 2014

116 Engineering Judgment - the evlution of vilble pertinent informtion, nd the ppliction of pproprite principles, stndrds, guidnce, nd prctices s contined in this Mnul nd other sources, for the purpose of deciding upon the pplicbility, design, opertion, or instlltion of trffic control device. Engineering judgment shll be exercised by n engineer, or by n individul working under the supervision of n engineer, through the ppliction of procedures nd criteri estblished by the engineer. Documenttion of engineering judgment is not required. Expresswy - ny multi-lne, divided highwy for through trffic with prtil control of ccess nd generlly with t-grde intersections. Following Distnce - the distnce in mobile opertion between the shdow vehicle nd the work vehicle. It is used to provide dvnce wrning to trffic tht some type of work is being done within the trffic lne. Trffic will hve to chnge lnes, slow down nd wit for sfe time to pss, or djust their position within the lne to llow for nrrower trffic lne. The shdow vehicle shll be equipped with pproprite dvnce wrning signing. Typicl Following Distnces (F) re included in the TTC Distnce Chrts. This distnce is rnge with minimum of the recommended distnce between dvnce wrning signs (A), nd mximum of the decision sight distnce. These distnces re dependent upon the rodwy nd trffic conditions. Engineering judgment should be used when selecting distnces for specific opertions. Freewy - ny divided highwy with full control of ccess (i.e. hs rmps nd no t-grde intersections). High Speed Rod - rodwy where the posted speed limit is 45 miles per hour or higher. Lne Closure - closure of one or more lnes of the rodwy to trffic. Work opertions tht restrict djcent lne width should consider vrious lne closure lterntives depending upon volume nd speeds on the rodwy. Lne Width - for trffic control purposes, minimum lne width of 10 feet shll be provided. Lterl Buffer Spce - the spce tht seprtes the trffic spce from the work spce. It is typiclly the extr spce provided between trffic nd workers, excvtions, pvement edge drop-offs, or n opposing lne of trffic. Trffic lnes my be closed to provide for lterl buffer spce. See the Longitudinl Drop-off Guidelines (pges 6K-xxi thru 6K-xxiii) of this mnul for more informtion. Longitudinl Buffer Spce - the distnce between the trnsition re nd the work spce. If driver does not see the dvnce wrning or fils to negotite the trnsition re, buffer spce provides room to stop before the work spce. Typicl Longitudinl Buffer Spces (B) re included in the TTC Distnce Chrts. Jnury, K-iv

117 Low Speed Rod - rodwy where the posted speed limit is 40 miles per hour or lower. Merging Tper - the tper used on multi-lne rod to close lne nd combine its trffic from tht of the djcent lne. Its length is dependent on the posted speed of the rodwy. Higher speeds require longer distnce for trffic to merge lnes. Typicl Merging Tpers (L) re included in the TTC Distnce Chrts. Mobile Buffer Spce - the distnce in mobile opertion between the shdow vehicle nd the work vehicle. This distnce is dependent on whether the shdow vehicle is being used s n dvnce wrning device or s blocking/protection device for the work vehicle. Motorist - n opertor of motorized vehicle intended to be used on rodwy. Multi-Lne Rod - rodwy where two or more lnes of trffic trvel in the sme direction. A multi-lne rodwy my be clssified s either undivided or divided. Occupied Work Spce - work spce is considered to be occupied when workers re present within the work spce. TTC devices should continuously be reviewed by workers nd djustments mde s needed. Off Shoulder - work spce locted primrily off of the shoulder, or which cuses little or no restrictions on the use of the shoulder. This work spce should hve little or no interference with trffic such tht trffic speeds generlly re not reduced. Portble Chngeble Messge Sign (PCMS) - sign either triler-mounted or vehiclemounted tht is cpble of displying more thn one messge, chngeble by remote or utomtic control. Posted Speed Limit - the speed limit determined by lw nd shown on Speed Limit signs. It is used in the chrts to determine the spcings of TTC devices nd the lengths of vrious tpers on the TTC Lyouts. Typicl Posted Speed Limits (S) re included in the TTC Distnce Chrts. Protection Vehicle - the vehicle tht is plced in dvnce of the work spce nd equipment to block errnt motorists from entering the work spce. Rod, Rodwy - Tht portion of highwy improved, designed, or ordinrily used for vehiculr trvel nd prking lnes, but exclusive of the sidewlk, berm, or shoulder even though such sidewlk, berm, or shoulder is used by persons riding bicycles or other humnpowered vehicles. Roll Ahed Distnce - the recommended minimum distnce between protection vehicle nd the work spce. A protection vehicle my be used in mobile opertion to provide extr sfety for the workers. Typicl Roll Ahed Distnces (R) re included in the TTC Distnce Chrts. Roundbout - circulr intersection with yield t entry, which permits vehicle on the circultory rodwy to proceed, nd with deflection of the pproching vehicle counterclockwise round circulr islnd. 6K-v Jnury, 2014

118 Rurl Highwy - highwy where trffic is normlly chrcterized by lower volume, higher speed, fewer turning conflicts nd fewer conflicts with pedestrins. Shdow Vehicle - the vehicle plced behind the work spce in mobile opertion to provide dvnce wrning to motorists. Becuse mobile opertions generlly hve ll dvnce wrning signing mounted on vehicles, the spcing between vehicles should be the Following Distnce (F) s included in the TTC Distnce Chrts. Shifting Tper - the tper used to move trffic from the trffic lne onto by-pss or shoulder. This trffic mneuver generlly requires hlf the distnce thn merging tper. See the TTC Distnce Chrts for the length of shifting tper clled L/2. Shoulder Closure - closure of the rodwy shoulder for work opertions. The shoulder then becomes unusble by trffic for vehicle mneuvers or brek-downs. TTC lyouts for work opertions using or on shoulder re dependent on the type of shoulder usge nd durtion. Shoulder Tper - the tper used to close the shoulder off to trffic so tht shoulder work cn be done or equipment cn be plced on the shoulder. Since this tper is used to guide errnt trffic bck to its norml lne pth, it does not require full merge distnce. The tper length is reduced to one-third of merging tper length. See the TTC Distnce Chrts for the length of shoulder closure tper clled L/3. Temporry Pedestrin Access Route (TPAR) - temporry, continuous nd unobstructed wlkwy within pedestrin circultion pth tht provides ccessibility. Temporry Trffic Control (TTC) Pln - pln describing the trffic controls to be used for fcilitting vehicle nd pedestrin movements through temporry trffic control zone. Temporry Trffic Control (TTC) Zone - n re of highwy where rod user conditions re chnged becuse of work zone or incident by the use of temporry trffic control devices, flggers, uniformed lw enforcement officers, or other uthorized personnel. See Figures 6K-6 nd 6K-7, Component Prts of Temporry Trffic Control Zone. Termintion Are - tht prt of TTC zone locted beyond the work spce which guides trffic bck into its norml trffic pth. A longitudinl buffer spce my be used between the end of the work spce nd the beginning of the downstrem tper. Trffic Control Device - sign, signl, mrking, or other device used to regulte, wrn, or guide trffic, plced on, over, or djcent to street, highwy, pedestrin fcility, or shreduse pth by uthority of public gency hving jurisdiction. Jnury, K-vi

119 Trffic Spce - tht prt of the rodwy open to trffic tht is next to the ctivity re. Trffic routing is provided with chnnelizing devices of vrious sizes nd shpes. For description of the vrious types of chnnelizing devices nd their generl uses, see the Temporry Trffic Control Devices Section (pge 6K-xiii) of this mnul. Trnsition Are - tht prt of the TTC zone tht moves the trffic from its norml pth or lne into the trffic spce. This movement of trffic is done through the use of chnnelizing devices nd directionl signing plced in vrious types of tpers. Turn Lne Closure - the closure of right or left turn lne for work opertions. Signing in the TTC zone shll provide dequte wrning to the motorists nd provide n lterntive turning mneuver. Lyouts from the vrious rodwy types should be reviewed for the best lternte depending upon rodwy intersection design, trffic control (stop, yield, signls, etc.), speed limit nd volume. Two-Lne, Two-Wy Rod - rodwy consisting of two opposing lnes of undivided trffic. Two-Wy Left Turn Lne - tht prt of the rodwy tht hs continuous two-wy left turn lne locted between the opposing lnes of trffic. This design vrition my be found on either two-lne, two-wy rods or multi-lne rods. Two Wy Tper - the tper used on two-lne, two-wy rod to chnge the rod into single lne of two-wy trffic. It is primrily used for flgging opertions nd other trffic control situtions. It is typiclly 50 feet in length nd contins five eqully spced chnnelizing devices. Undivided Rod - rodwy where opposing trffic lnes hve no physicl seprtion brriers except pvement mrkings (where required). Urbn Street - type of street normlly chrcterized by reltively low speed, wide rnges in trffic volume, nrrower rodwy lnes, frequent intersections, significnt pedestrin trffic, nd more rodside obstcles. Volume - the number of vehicles pssing given point on the rodwy or, the Averge Dily Trffic (ADT). Work Spce - tht prt of the TTC zone closed to trffic nd set side for workers, equipment nd mterils. The spce requirements for specific TTC Zone will determine the type of TTC lyout tht is pproprite for the project. The lyout will specify the pproprite sign loctions, flgger sttions nd tpers depending on the type of work spce. Work Zone Speed Limits - regultory speed limit in temporry trffic control zone. This speed limit requires proper documenttion to pprove nd instll. See Work Zone Speed Limit Guidelines t the following website for detils: 6K-vii Jnury, 2014

120 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL GENERAL GUIDELINES INDIVIDUAL RESPONSIBILITIES Before beginning work, you should fmilirize yourself with this mnul, the definitions, principles nd the following Generl Responsibilities. Qulified individuls who hve dequte trining in temporry trffic control nd hve bsic understnding of the MN MUTCD should supervise the selection, plcement nd mintennce of trffic control devices in temporry trffic control zones. GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES Except where otherwise specified ny public or privte gency performing work within the right-of-wy of streets or highwys open to public trvel shll be responsible for: supplying, instlling, nd mintining ll necessry trffic control devices outlined in this mnul nd s stipulted by the governing rod uthority to protect the work spce nd sfely direct trffic round the temporry trffic control zone. supplying their own flgger(s) when required. informing occupnts of butting properties, either orlly or by written notice, of prking prohibitions or ccess limittions. notifying the governing rod uthority when existing trffic signs need to be removed or relocted or ny regultory sign must be instlled for construction or mintennce work. replcing or reimbursing the governing rod uthority for ny dmge to or loss of existing trffic signs. keeping ll trffic control devices clen nd in proper position to ensure optimum effectiveness. removing trffic control equipment when it is no longer required or pproprite. keeping proper records of trffic control tht contin strting nd ending times, loction, nmes of personnel, trffic controls used, etc. The method of record keeping my vry from log entry to complete Trffic Control Pln. PERMISSION TO WORK WITHIN THE RIGHT-OF-WAY Prior to strting work permission must be obtined from the governing rod uthority. All rod work must be coordinted to protect the public's interest. The governing rod uthority my limit the hours of work. Pek trffic periods vry by hour or dy of week nd ll work should be scheduled during non-pek hours. When working in or ner n intersection with trffic control signl system, the rod uthority with jurisdiction over the signl should be contcted to ensure proper opertion of the signl while the work is in progress. Jnury, K-viii

121 SELECTING AN APPROPRIATE TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL LAYOUT This Field Mnul, which is Temporry Trffic Control Zone Lyouts, Prt 6K of the Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices (MN MUTCD), hs been orgnized such tht field personnel should esily be ble to determine the proper temporry trffic control lyout for the work zone they need. The lyouts re divided primrily by the type of rodwy nd type of work spce. The rodwy designtions re: Two-Lne, Two-Wy Rods (with nd without continuous left-turn lnes) These rods re further divided by trffic volume (low, intermedite, high), Multi-Lne Undivided Rods (with nd without continuous left-turn lnes), nd Multi-Lne Divided Rods After determining the type of rodwy upon which the work spce will be locted, the type of work spce needs to be determined. The work spce is the re within the right-of-wy tht will be closed from norml usge. It includes ll the re needed by support equipment, mterils, workers nd vehicles. It my require the closing of rodwy lne(s), the shoulder of the rod, or turn lne within n intersection. The work spce my even be completely off the rodwy shoulder such s on side-slopes or long sidewlks. The lyouts re listed by the typicl work spce res. Within some lyouts, there re TTC options tht my be omitted bsed upon severl fctors. These my include: durtion of the opertion, volume of the rod, speed limit on the rod, nd deprtmentl (or compny) policy. TTC supervisors should be fully wre of the vritions in the lyouts due to the vrious fctors, nd when nd how the lyouts my be modified. See the Checklist for Estblishing TTC Zone on pge 6K-xii. All distnces shown on the lyouts nd chrts re pproximte. In generl, ll chrt distnces vry bsed upon the posted speed limit. Adjustments in these distnces should be mde bsed on trffic entry points nd decision sight distnce. As stted previously, not ll situtions could be ddressed nd engineering judgment should be exercised. Fetures from severl lyouts my need to be combined together for one project. For exmple, work in or ner n intersection my require lyout for lne closure, lyout for work in the intersection nd lyout for crosswlk closure. In some situtions, TTC lyout usully required for longer durtion my be needed due to the nture of the work or the trffic. For exmple, ptching pothole on high-volume, highspeed freewy my require less thn 15 minutes of time (mobile opertion) but sttionry lne closure my be needed becuse of the high volumes of trffic. Additionl lyouts hve been plced in the mnul for unique opertions nd specil signing conditions. These lyouts my hve specil restrictions nd guidelines contined within their notes. 6K-ix Jnury, 2014

122 ENHANCEMENT OF THE TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL LAYOUTS To improve sfety, typicl lyouts contined in this mnul my need to be modified to fit more complex rodwy conditions or opertions. When conditions re more complex, modifictions my incorporte devices nd prctices from the following list: 1. Additionl Devices:. more signs or enhnced signs (using LEDs, flgs, becons, etc.) b. flshing rrow bord c. more chnnelizing devices t close spcing d. temporry rised pvement mrkers e. high-level wrning devices f. portble chngeble messge signs g. portble trffic signls h. portble brriers i. impct ttenutor crsh cushions j. glre screens k. rumble strips l. more delinetion 2. Upgrding of Devices. complete set of stndrd pvement mrkings in high hzrd res b. brighter nd/or wider pvement mrkings c. lrger nd/or brighter signs d. more visible chnnelizing devices with greter conspicuity e. temporry trffic brriers in plce of chnnelizing devices 3. Improved Geometrics t Diversions or Crossovers 4. Incresed Distnces. longer dvnce wrning re b. longer tpers 5. Lighting. temporry rodwy lighting b. stedy burn lights used with chnnelizing devices c. flshing lights for isolted hzrds d. illuminted signs e. work spce lighting 6. Work zone speed limits See Work Zone Speed Limit Guidelines t the following website for detils: Jnury, K-x

123 INSTALLING THE TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE Trffic control devices shll be instlled in the order tht drivers will see them, strting with the sign or device tht is furthest from the work spce. If trffic in both directions will be ffected, such s work in the center lnes, the devices my be plced in both directions t the sme time. When one direction of trffic will be directed into the opposing lnes of trffic, ll trffic controls for the opposing trffic should be instlled first. The devices should be removed s soon s the work is completed nd re no longer needed. Devices should be removed in the opposite order from which they were instlled. Devices which the driver sees lst should be removed first. A cler lne t lest 10 feet wide shll be mintined t ll times. After the temporry trffic control zone is inplce, it should be inspected by driving through the zone. Motorists' ctions nd rections should be noted nd if ny problems re encountered, they should be quickly corrected. Any modifictions to the Trffic Control Pln or stndrd lyouts nd the resons for the modifictions should be documented. During the life of temporry trffic control zone, mintennce of devices is frequently needed. On short term opertions, vehicles my knock over cones which then need to be plced upright. If problems re encountered, they should be corrected immeditely nd documented. 6K-xi Jnury, 2014

124 CHECKLIST FOR ESTABLISHING A TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE COMPLETED ITEM Obtin permit from governing rod uthority. Determine the type of rodwy Determine the type of work spce Determine the durtion of work. Select hours of work to void pek periods. Select the pproprite lyout(s) using type of rodwy, type of work, durtion, trffic volume, speed nd impct on pedestrin nd bicycle trvel. ( See the pproprite Index Chrt t the strt of ech section) Determine ny modifictions to typicl lyout(s). ( See the Enhncement of the TTC Lyouts on pge 6K-x) Check decision sight distnce. Advnce signing distnce. If possible, mintin ccess to intersections, prking res, nd drivewys (public nd privte). Allow for buffer spce free of obstructions. Contct the proper rod uthority if the work zone interferes with norml signl opertion in the re. Check the condition of devices. ( See the Qulity Stndrds on pges 6K-91 thru 6K-106) Instll devices beginning with the first device the driver will see. Conduct drive thru to check for problems. ( See the Enhncement of the TTC Lyouts on pge 6K-x) Document temporry trffic control zone, problems nd mjor modifictions to the lyouts. Trffic should be observed to see if the tper is working correctly. Remove the devices s soon s work is completed, beginning with the lst device seen by the motorist. Figure 6K-1 Jnury, K-xii

125 Chnnelizing Devices TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES The function of chnnelizing devices is to delinete desired vehicle pth, mrk specific hzrds on or ner the rodwy, seprte opposing trffic flows nd prtilly or totlly close the rodwy. See the "Longitudinl Drop-off Guidelines" on pges 6K-xxi thru 6K-xxiii for the use of chnnelizing devices djcent to shoulder edge drop-offs or uneven lnes. Chnnelizing devices include cones, drums, brricdes, temporry rised islnds nd vrious kinds of mrkers. The devices re broken into two type clssifictions bsed upon the nighttime visibility of the device. Their visibility is determined upon the totl mount of reflective re of the device. Devices with less thn 270 sq. in. re clssified s Type A Chnnelizing devices nd devices with more thn 270 sq. in of reflective re re Type B devices. Type A chnnelizing devices my be used in ttended TTC zones nd Type B chnnelizing devices shll be used if the TTC zone will be left unttended overnight or be in plce longer thn 12 hours. Where Type B chnnelizing device, such s drum, cuses n isolted sight restriction, or is too wide for spce, 42-inch tll weighted chnnelizer my be substituted. This substitution my be used in unttended overnight conditions t sight or spce restricted loctions s pproved by the rod uthority. When used, the spcing of the devices should be reduced by up to 50 percent. Figure 6K-11 shows brekdown of devices by Chnnelizer Type (drwn to pproximte scle). See the MN MUTCD, Prt 6F for dditionl detils on ppliction restrictions. Flshing Wrning Lights Flshing wrning lights shll supplement ll rod, rmp nd sidewlk closure signing, nd my be dded to other wrning signs nd/or brricdes to ttrct the rod user's ttention. Vehicle Wrning Lights All vehicles shll hve pproved operting vehicle wrning lights when decelerting to enter TTC zone nd gin when vehicle leves the TTC zone nd enters the trveled trffic lne. All vehicles within mobile TTC opertion; or working within 15 feet of n open trffic lne should hve pproved vehicle wrning lights. High Visibility Clothing All workers who re exposed to trffic, work vehicles or construction equipment within the TTC zone shll wer high-visibility sfety pprel tht meets the Performnce Clss 2 or 3 requirements of the ANSI/ISEA publiction entitled "Americn Ntionl Stndrd for High-Visibility Sfety Apprel nd Hedwer" (see Section 1A.11), or equivlent revisions, nd lbeled s meeting the ANSI stndrd performnce for Clss 2 or 3 risk exposure. 6K-xiii Jnury, 2014

126 Work Zone Signing Advnce wrning should be instlled for drivers entering the TTC zone from cross streets. ROAD WORK AHEAD signs on intersecting rodwys shll be instlled if the motorist will not encounter nother dvnce wrning sign prior to reching the ctivity re except for mobile opertions. As generl rule, signs should be locted on the right-hnd side of two-wy rodwy nd on both the right nd left sides of multi-lne divided rodwy. See the "TTC Distnce Chrts" for the dvnce wrning sign spcing distnce clled A. When specil emphsis is needed, signs my be plced on both the left nd right sides of two-wy rodwy. Signs, lthough ordinrily mounted on posts for long term opertions, my be mounted on or bove brricdes or on temporry supports. Signs mounted on temporry supports should not be plced in the open trveled lne where they pose hzrd to trffic. Generlly these signs re plced on the shoulder or in the prking lne of the street or highwy. The signs should not be blocked from view by prked vehicles, trees or other sight obstructions on or ner the rodwy. Signs shll not be mounted on existing trffic signs, posts or other utility structures without permission from the proper uthority. All signs shll be mounted longitudinlly perpendiculr to the rodwy surfce nd verticlly plumb in ccordnce with the Qulity Stndrds strting on pge 6K- 87. The bottom of signs mounted on brricdes or temporry supports shll be no less thn one foot bove the trveled wy. All regultory signs on portble supports shll be mounted with minimum mounting height of 4 feet mesured from the ground to the center of the sign fce. Some ctivity res move slowly down rodwy nd wy from the opertion's dvnce signing. The distnce from the lst dvnce wrning sign to the ctivity re should not llow the motorist to forget the existence of the temporry trffic control zone. For high-speed streets nd rurl highwys, the mximum distnce from the lst sign to point where the driver detects the ctivity re shll not exceed one mile. In urbn res, the number of intersections shll be considered nd this distnce reduced ccordingly. All dvnce wrning signs shll be t lest 48 x 48 inch in size when used on high speed rodwys. Wrning signs used on low speed rodwys shll be t lest 36 x 36 inch in size. Smller signs my be used s pproved by the governing rod uthority where lrger signs become n dditionl hzrd to motorists nd pedestrins. All signs used t night shll be retroreflective with mteril tht hs smooth seled outer surfce tht shows the sme shpe nd color both dy nd night. Non-retroreflective mesh signs shll not be used t ny time. Retroreflectorized roll-up signs my be used for dytime, nd for nighttime only when workers re present to monitor the signs. Jnury, K-xiv

127 On multi-lne divided rodwys, where the medin shoulder is nrrow (less thn 6 feet, the 48 x 48 inch dvnce wrning signs, s shown on the TTC lyouts, my not fit on the left side of the rodwy. Where this sitution occurs, one of the following options my be used: A.) Reduce the left side signs sizes, or B.) Eliminte the left side signing, use n dditionl RIGHT LANE CLOSED (or LEFT s pproprite) sign on the right side, nd require the use of n rrow bord on the shoulder t the beginning of the lne closure tper. Optionl Signs Severl signs re shown on the TTC lyouts s optionl or hve fctors tht my mke them optionl. Some dvnce wrning signs my be omitted for low speed rods nd/or if the durtion will be less thn n hour. Red the ssocited notes on ech lyout for options. The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD sign is n exmple of sign tht is only required for higher speeds. The BE PREPARED TO STOP sign is shown s optionl on most TTC lyouts. This sign is usully dded to the compliment of signs when restricted sight distnces wrrnt dditionl wrning to the motorist or the dvnce wrning re becomes extremely long due to sight distnces or move of the opertion. All dvnce wrning signs shll be removed, covered, or turned to fce wy from trffic when they re no longer required or pproprite. Crshworthy Testing Complince All temporry trffic control devices, including Type A nd Type B chnnelizing devices, Type III brricdes, bllst systems nd sign support structures, used on ny rodwy open to public trvel shll be crshworthy when instlled fcing trffic or turned wy from trffic. FHWA policy requires tht ll rodside ppurtennces, including temporry trffic control devices, hve been successfully crsh tested in ccordnce with the Ntionl Coopertive Highwy Reserch Progrm (NCHRP) Report 350, "Recommended Procedures for the Sfety Performnce Evlution of Highwy Fetures" or the Americn Assocition of Stte Highwy nd Trnsporttion Officils (AASHTO) Mnul for Accessing Sfety Hrdwre (MASH). 6K-xv Jnury, 2014

128 GUIDELINES FOR THE USE OF PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGNS (PCMS) The primry purpose of Portble Chngeble Messge Signs (PCMS) is to dvise the driver of unexpected trffic nd routing situtions. Importnt items when using Portble Chngeble Messge Sign re: Generl A PCMS should be used to supplement conventionl signs, pvement mrking nd lighting. If PCMS is used s n rrow bord, it shll meet ll of the requirements of n rrow pnel, nd shll be used solely s n rrow bord. Performnce specifictions cn be found in the current version of the Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices (MN MUTCD), Prt 6, Section 6F. A PCMS instlled on the shoulder of rod shll be ccompnied with Type B chnnelizing devices (see Lyout 4). Messges Ech disply should contin single thought. The entire disply should be redble twice t the posted speed limit prior to work strting. An ccurte description of the work loction or the incident loction is criticl. The PCMS shll hve redble up-to-dte informtion. Any dely messge should ccurtely reflect the trffic dely time. A PCMS messge shll use dys of the week not clendr dtes. The use of bbrevitions is discourged. The entire word should be spelled out whenever spce permits. If bbrevitions re used, they should be esily understood (see the list of stndrd bbrevitions on Pge 6K-xxviii nd xix). Displys shll not scroll horizontlly or verticlly cross the fce of the sign. For more informtion on the use of PCMSs, see 2012 CMS Mnul of Prctice t the following website: Jnury, K-xvi

129 Requirements The specifictions for use of PCMS re in the following tble. The Tble 6F-2 6K-xvii Jnury, 2014

130 Abbrevitions Tht Shll be Used Only on Portble Chngeble Messge Signs Word Messge Access Ahed Blocked Bridge Cnnot Center Chemicl Condition Congested Construction Crossing Do Not Downtown Estbound Emergency Entrnce, Enter Exit Express Frontge Hzrdous Highwy-Ril Grde Crossing Interstte It is Lne Left Locl Lower Mintennce Mjor Minor Norml Northbound Oversized Prking Pvement Prepre Qulity Right Right Rodwork Stndrd Abbrevition ACCS AHD BLKD BR* CANT CNTR CHEM COND CONG CONST XING DONT DWNTN E-BND EMER ENT EX EXP FRNTG HAZ RR XING I-* ITS LN LFT LOC LWR MAINT MAJ MNR NORM N-BND OVRSZ PKING PVMT PREP QLTY RT RT RDWK Prompt Word Tht Should Precede the Abbrevition Fog Lne (Nme) Trffic Trffic Next (Rodwy Nme)*, Right, Left, Center Wet Air Keep, Next Prompt Word Tht Should Precede the Abbrevition Lne Spill Ahed Trffic Lne Rod Driving (Number) Trffic Level Accident Accident Lod To Stop Lne Ahed, (Distnce) * This bbrevition, when ccompnied by the prompt word, my be used on trffic control other thn portble chngeble messge signs. ** A spce nd no dsh shll be plced between the bbrevition nd the number of the route. Tble 6F-3 (sheet 1 of 2) Jnury, K-xviii

131 Abbrevitions Tht Shll be Used Only on Portble Chngeble Messge Signs Word Messge Route Service Shoulder Slippery Southbound Speed Stte, county, or other non-us or non-interstte numbered route Tires with Lugs Trffic Trvelers Two-Wheeled Vehicles Upper Vehicle(s) Wrning Westbound Will Not Stndrd Abbrevition RT,RTE SERV SHLDR SLIP S-BND SPD (Route Abbrevition determined by highwy gency)** LUGS TRAF TRVLRS CYCLES UPR VEH, VEHS WARN W-BND WONT Prompt Word Tht Should Precede the Abbrevition Best Prompt Word Tht Should Precede the Abbrevition Number * This bbrevition, when ccompnied by the prompt word, my be used on trffic control other thn portble chngeble messge signs. ** A spce nd no dsh shll be plced between the bbrevition nd the number of the route. Tble 6F-3 (sheet 2 of 2) Uncceptble Abbrevitions Abbrevition ACC CLRS DLY FDR L LT PARK POLL RED STAD TH Intended Word Accident Clers Dely Feeder Left Light (Trffic) Prking Pollution (Index) Reduce Stdium Trunk Highwy Common Misinterprettion Access (Rod) Colors Dily Federl Lne (Merge) Left Prk Poll Red Stndrd misunderstood Tble 6F-4 6K-xix Jnury, 2014

132 Operting Mode Pnel Disply * 1. At lest one of the following two modes shll be provided: ( Right rrow is shown, left rrow is similr ) Flshing Arrow Move/Merge Right Sequentil Arrow Move/Merge Right Sequentil Chevron 2. The following mode shll be provided: Move/Merge Right Flshing Double Arrow 3. At lest one of the following three modes shll be provided: Move/Merge Right or Left Flshing Four Corners Flshing Br Alternting Flshing Dimonds * Element lyout for Type C pnel shown Cution Pnel Type Minimum Size Minimum Legibility Distnce (miles) (inches) Minimum Number of Elements Recommended Usge A 48x Low speed streets B 60x C 96x Anything not covered in A or C Freewys nd Expresswys Arrow Stick Arrow Sticks my supplement other TTC devices, but shll not be used in plce of rrow bords Advnce Wrning Arrow Bord Specifictions Figure 6K-2 Jnury, K-xx

133 DROP OFF inches without tper Greter thn 2-4inches with 1:3 tper Greter thn 2-4inches without tper Trffic Lne UNEVEN LANES Trffic Lne Trffic Lne Trffic Lne 1:3 Tper UNEVEN LAN ES Trffic Lne Trffic Lne Trffic Lne Milled Edge HIGH SHOULDER inches UNEVEN LAN ES >2-4 inches >2-4 inches These guidelines re intended to increse trffic sfety using trffic control devices, sfety relted ppurtennces, nd construction techniques for uneven lnes, milled edges, nd edge drop-offs tht occur in highwy work zones. The best wy to increse trffic sfety is to mke every ttempt to minimize exposure to uneven lnes, milled edges, nd edge drop-offs. Only when uneven lnes, milled edges, nd edge drop-offs re deemed necessry, shll the pproprite portion(s) of these guideline be pplied to enhnce trffic sfety. No trffic control tretments re needed if edgelines re instlled nd shoulder widths nd cross section slopes re the sme s existing djcent rodwy sections. Drop-offs of inches, t lest 8 feet from from the edge of trffic crrying lnes do not require ny trffic control tretments. Drop-offs of greter thn4-12inches djcent to trffic crrying lnes re permitted without\ tpers or portble concrete brriers for: A. Projects within n urbn re when the speed limit is 30 mph or less; or B. Short term (3 clendr dys or less) repir, less thn 50 feet in length when the speed limit is greter thn 30 mph. Wether permitting, milling nd pving opertions shll be required to complete the full width of the section under construction t the end of ech work period. At no time shll there be more thn one uneven lne condition between the trffic crrying lnes which include uxiliry lnes, turn lnes, nd rmp ccess or egress res. Tpered slopes shll be dequtely compcted to provide firm driving surfce. Approprite uneven lne wrning signs or shoulder wrning signs shll be repeted fter ech intersection. Where spce is limited or there is sight restriction, weighted chnnelizers my be used in plce of drums to delinete longitudinl drop-offs. Mximum spcing of trffic control devices shll be determined bsed on the posted speed limit nd using the following tble. Trffic Lne Shoulder Note: Milled edges greter thn 2 inches require tpers nd/or delinetion s detiled for edge drop-offs in ddition to the HIGH SHOULDER signs. Trffic Control Device Sign Drum Weighted Chnnelizer or Tubulr Mrker Type III Brricde Mximum Spcing of Devices low speed = ¼ mile high speed = 1 mile 2G G 20G Longitudinl Drop-off Guidelines Figure 6K-3 6K-xxi Jnury, 2014

134 EDGE DROP OFF DISTANCE FROM THE TRAFFIC LANE 0-3 feet 3-8 feet L O W SHOUL D E R L O W SHOUL D E R inches without tper Edge of Trffic Lne 0-3 feet inches Optionl Edgeline Edge of Trffic Lne 3-8 feet inches Note: Signs re optionl when n edgeline is instlled. Greter thn 2-4inches with 1:3 tper Edge of Trffic Lne 0-3 feet L O W SHOUL D E R >2-4 inches Optionl Edgeline 1:3 Tper 1:3 Tper Edge of Trffic Lne 3-8 feet L O W SHOUL D E R >2-4 inches Note: Signs re optionl when n edgeline is instlled. Alternte Position NO SHOUL D E R NO SHOUL D E R Greter thn 2-4inches without tper Edge of Trffic Lne 0-3 feet or For Rurl Highwys with Less thn 5000 ADT Alternte Position >2-4 inches NO SHOUL D E R Edge of Trffic Lne 3-8 feet or For Rurl Highwys with Less thn 5000 ADT >2-4 inches NO SHOUL D E R Edgeline Edge of Trffic Lne 0-3 feet >2-4 inches Edge of Trffic Lne 3-8 feet >2-4 inches Longitudinl Drop-off Guidelines Figure 6K-4 Jnury, K-xxii

135 EDGE DROP OFF Greter thn 4-12inches with 1:4 tper Greter thn 4-12inches with 1:3 tper Greter thn 4-12inches without tper Greter thn 12 inches Edge of Trffic Lne Optionl Edgeline Edge of Trffic Lne Edge of Trffic Lne Edge of Trffic Lne DISTANCE FROM THE TRAFFIC LANE 0-3 feet 0-3 feet 3 feet nd Greter All Distnces or For Rurl Highwys with Less thn 5000 ADT Greter thn 8 feet Minimum 8 feet LOW SHOULDER 1:4 or fltter Tper >4-12 inches LOW SHOULDER 1:4 or fltter Tper Edge of 3-8 feet Trffic Lne >4-12 inches Note: Signs re optionl when n edgeline is instlled. NO SHOULDER 1:3 Tper >4-12 inches NO SHOULDER 1:3 Tper >4-12 inches NO SHOULDER >4-12 inches For ny excvtion or drop-offs in excess of 12 inches, see the Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices, Prt VI, Section 6F, Temporry Trffic Brriers. These guidelines re intended to increse trffic sfety using trffic control devices, sfety relted ppurtennces, nd construction techniques for uneven lnes, milled edges, nd edge drop-offs tht occur in highwy work zones. The best wy to increse trffic sfety is to mke every ttempt to minimize exposure to uneven lnes, milled edges, nd edge drop-offs. Only when uneven lnes, milled edges, nd edge drop-offs re deemed necessry, shll the pproprite portion(s) of these guideline be pplied to enhnce trffic sfety. No trffic control tretments re needed if edgelines re instlled nd shoulder widths nd cross section slopes re the sme s existing djcent rodwy sections. Drop-offs of inches, t lest 8 feet from from the edge of trffic crrying lnes do not require ny trffic control tretments. Drop-offs of greter thn4-12inches djcent to trffic crrying lnes re permitted without tpers or portble concrete brriers for: A. Projects within n urbn re when the speed limit is 30 mph or less; or B. Short term (3 clendr dys or less) repir, less thn 50 feet in length when the speed limit is greter thn 30 mph. Wether permitting, milling nd pving opertions shll be required to complete the full width of the section under construction t the end of ech work period. At no time shll there be more thn one uneven lne condition between the trffic crrying lnes which include uxiliry lnes, turn lnes, nd rmp ccess or egress res. Tpered slopes shll be dequtely compcted to provide firm driving surfce. Approprite uneven lne wrning signs or shoulder wrning signs shll be repeted fter ech intersection. Where spce is limited or there is sight restriction, weighted chnnelizers my be used in plce of drums to delinete longitudinl drop-offs. Mximum spcing of trffic control devices shll be determined bsed on the posted speed limit nd using the following tble. Trffic Control Device Sign Drum Weighted Chnnelizer or Tubulr Mrker Type III Brricde Mximum Spcing of Devices low speed = ¼ mile high speed = 1 mile 2G G 20G Longitudinl Drop-off Guidelines Figure 6K-5 6K-xxiii Jnury, 2014

136 A B SIGN SPACING G SHIFTING TAPER BUFFER LANE SHIFT SPACING END ROAD WORK SIGN (optionl) DOWNSTREAM TAPER Termintion Are where trffic resumes norml opertions 2G SPACING DOWNSTREAM TAPER WORK SPACE LONGITUDINAL BUFFER B Activity Are where work tkes plce SHOULDER TAPER SHOULDER CLOSURE LANE CLOSURE MERGING TAPER G SIGN SPACING SIGN SPACING SIGN SPACING L A A A Trnsition Are where trffic moves out of its norml pth Advnce Wrning Are where trffic is told wht to expect hed Activity Are where work tkes plce Trnsition Are where trffic moves out of its norml pth Advnce Wrning Are where trffic is told wht to expect hed 2WAY TRAFFIC SPACING BUFFER TWO WAY TAPER SIGN SPACING SIGN SPACING SIGN SPACING 2G B A A A Components of Sttionry Temporry Trffic Control Zone Figure 6K-6 Jnury, K-xxiv

137 LANE CLOSURE WORK VEHICLE WORK SPACE ROLL AHEAD DISTANCE R Activity Are where work tkes plce PROTECTION VEHICLE FOLLOWING DISTANCE F/2 SHADOW VEHICLE OPTIONAL FOLLOWING DISTANCE F Trnsition Are where trffic moves out of its norml pth SHADOW VEHICLE Advnce Wrning Are where trffic is told wht to expect hed OPTIONAL Activity Are where work tkes plce Trnsition Are where trffic moves out of its norml pth Advnce Wrning Are where trffic is told wht to expect hed DECISION SIGHT DISTANCE SIGN SPACING D Components of Mobile Temporry Trffic Control Zone Figure 6K-7 6K-xxv Jnury, 2014

138 STOP R1-1 ROAD CLOSED X MILES AHEAD LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY R11-3 BUMP W8-1 YIELD R1-2 ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC R11-4 BUMP AHEAD W8-1 TAKE TURNS R1-X3 R3-1 W1-4R ROUGH ROAD W8-8 R3-2 W1-4L LOW SHOULDER W8-9 W1-6 R4-7c UNEVEN LANES W8-11 STOP HERE ON RED STOP HERE ON RED SIDEWALK CLOSED R10-6R R10-6L R9-9 W3-1 W3-2 W3-3 NO SHOULDER CENTER LANE CLOSED 35 MPH W8-15P W8-23 W9-3 W13-1P SIDEWALK CLOSED USE OTHER SIDE R9-10 BE PREPARED W3-4 TO STOP ROAD WORK AHEAD W20-1 SIDEWALK CLOSED AHEAD CROSS HERE R9-11R W4-2R SIDEWALK WORK AHEAD W20-1 SIDEWALK CLOSED AHEAD CROSS HERE R9-11L W4-2L ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD W20-4 ROAD CLOSED R11-2 NEXT X MILES W7-3P W20-7 SIGN CODES QUICK REFERENCE For dditionl signs nd informtion on typicl sizes nd usge, see the Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices Figure 6K-8 Jnury, K-xxvi

139 XX MILES W20-100P RIGHT LAN E CLOSED W21-X5 TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELL PHONE W22-2 MERGE MERGE W20-X3R W20-X3L SHOULDER CLOSED W21-X5 END BLASTING ZONE W22-3 CENTER LAN E MERGE LEFT W20-X12 LEFT LAN E CLOSED W21-X5L PILOT CAR FOLLOW ME G20-4 RIGHT TW O LAN ES CLOSED W20-X13R CREW W ORKING AHEAD W21-X6 ROAD CLOSED BEGINNING JUNE 24 G20-X1 LEFT TW O LAN ES CLOSED W20-X13L SLOW Flgger Pddle W21-X7 EXIT G20-X7 RAMP CLOSED AHEAD W20-X16 HIGH SHOULDER W21-X9 TURN LAN E G20-X9 TURN LAN E CLOSED RIGHT LAN E CLOSED LEFT LAN E CLOSED W20-X18 W21-1 W21-X4R W21-X4R W ET PAINT W ET PAINT KEEP OFF LINES WET PAINT WET YELLOW WET WHITE W21-X10 W21-X11 W21-X12 USE BOTH LAN ES DURING BACKUPS TAKE TURNS AT MERGE TAKE TURNS G20-X10 G20-X11 G20-X12 RAMP CLOSED SHOULDER CLOSED W21-X4RA W21-X4RS BLASTING ZONE AHEAD W22-1 STOPPED TRAFFIC WHEN FLASHING G20-X14 SIGN CODES QUICK REFERENCE For dditionl signs nd informtion on typicl sizes nd usge, see the Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices Figure 6K-9 6K-xxvii Jnury, 2014

140 SAMPLE PROJECT INSPECTION CHECKLIST PROJECT - ITEM YES NO HOW MANY? 1. Are ny devices missing? Do ny devices need repir? Were ll replced or repired? 2. Are ny lights (flshers, etc.) not functioning Were they ll replced or repired? 3. Are ny devices improperly plced? Were ll positions corrected? 4. Do ny devices need clening? Were ll devices clened? ADDITIONAL COMMENTS ON THE BACK OF THIS FORM The bove check ws completed by (nme / title) on t.m. p.m. (dte) (time) Figure 6K-10 Jnury, K-xxviii

141 TYPE A CHANNELIZERS 36 inches minimum 18 inches minimum 36 inches minimum 18 inches inches 42 inches SURFACE MOUNTED DELINEATOR TUBULAR MARKERS OPPOSING TRAFFIC LANE DIVIDER CONES WEIGHTED CHANNELIZER TYPE B CHANNELIZERS 36 inches 24 inches 36 inches minimum 36 inches minimum VERTICAL PANEL TYPE I BARRICADE TYPE II BARRICADE DIRECTION INDICATOR BARRICADE DRUM TYPE C CHANNELIZER 60 inches minimum TYPE III BARRICADE Chnnelizing Devices Figure 6K-11 6K-xxix Jnury, 2014

142 32 in. minimum Hndriling edge Pedestrin Chnnelizer 3 8 Detectble edge 2 in. mximum Detectble edge 34-38in in. mximum Riling System showing Detectble Edge using Brrier NOTES: 1. To prevent ny tripping hzrd to pedestrins, bllst shll be locted behind or internl to the device. Any support on the front of the device shll not extend into the 48 in. minimum wlkwy cler spce nd shll hve 0.5 in. mximum height bove the wlkwy surfce with pproved beveling (see note #9 on pge 6K-xxxi for beveling detils). 2. Detectble edges for long cnes shll be continuous nd 6 in. min high bove the wlkwy surfce nd hve color or mrkings contrsting with the wlkwy surfce. 3. Devices shll not block wter dringe from the wlkwy. A gp height or opening from the wlkwy surfce up to 2 in. mximum height is llowed for dringe purposes. 4. Rilings or other objects my protrude mximum of 4 in. into the wlkwy cler spce when locted 27 in. minimum bove the wlkwy surfce. 5. Longitudinl chnnelizing devices for pedestrins shll be 32 in. high or greter. 6. When hnd guidnce is required, the top ril or top surfce shll: be in verticl plne perpendiculr to the wlkwy bove the detectble edge, be continuous t height of 34 to 38 in. bove the wlkwy surfce, nd be supported with miniml interference to the pedestrin's hnds or fingers. 7. All devices shll be free of shrp or rough edges, nd fsteners (bolts) shll be rounded to prevent hrm to hnds, rms or clothing of pedestrins. 8. All devices used to chnnelize pedestrin flow should interlock such tht gps do not llow pedestrins to stry from the chnnelized pth. 9. Any pedestrin devices used to provide positive protection (trffic or hzrd) for pedestrins or workers shll meet crshworthy requirements pproprite for the brriers ppliction. 10. Brricdes shll be used to close the entire width of the wlkwy surfce. 11. A wlkwy surfce shll be firm, stble, nd slip resistnt. Typicl udible messge device loction when used SIDEWALK CLOSED 34 in. minimum 2 in. mximum Wlkwy surfce Sidewlk Brricde Typicl TPAR Devices Refer to the MnDOT TPAR website for dditionl stndrds, guidnce, nd options for designing temporry pedestrin ccess routes. htt // d t t t /t ffi / k /t ht l Figure 6K Jnury, K-xxx

143 Temporry Curb Rmp - Prllel to Curb 2-4 in. wide edge mrking non-slip protection 5 cler spce edge tretment joint/gp tretment edge tretment 12 in. min. 1 in. 9 Shown with 1 protective edge 6 non-slip protection 2 to 4 in. wide edge mrking NOTES: 1. Curb rmps shll be 48 in. minimum width with firm, stble nd non-slip surfce. 2. Protective edging with 2 in. minimum height shll be instlled when the curb rmp or lnding pltform hs verticl drop of 6 in. or greter or hs side pron slope steeper thn 1:3 (33%). Protective edging should be considered when curb rmps or lnding pltforms hve verticl drop of 3 in. or more. 3. Detectble edging with 6 in. minimum height nd contrsting color shll be instlled on ll curb rmp lndings where the wlkwy chnges direction (turns). 4. Curb rmps nd lndings should hve 1:50 (2%) mx cross-slope. 5. Cler spce of 48 x 48 in. minimum shll be provided bove nd below the curb rmp. 6. The curb rmp wlkwy edge shll be mrked with contrsting color 2 to 4 in. wide mrking. The mrking is optionl where color contrsting edging is used. 7. Wter flow in the gutter system shll hve miniml restriction. 8. Lterl joints or gps between surfces shll be less thn 0.5 in. width. 9. Chnges between surfce heights should not exceed 0.5 in. Lterl edges should be verticl up to 0.25 in. high, nd beveled t 1:2 between 0.25 in. nd 0.5 in. height. Typicl TPAR Devices Refer to the MnDOT TPAR website for dditionl stndrds, guidnce, nd options for designing temporry pedestrin ccess routes x48 in. min. lnding re 3 3 detectble edging 6 in. minimum height protective edging 2 in. minimum height Temporry Curb Rmp - Perpendiculr to Curb 2 in. minimum joint/gp tretment edge tretment 12 in. min. 1 in. 6 9 Figure 6K-13 6 edge tretment in. minimum 1 in. 12 in. min. 9 1 in. Shown with side pron 6K-xxxi Jnury, 2014

144 Symbols AFAD Mening Flgger or Opertor of Automted Flgging Assistnce Device Automted Flgging Assistnce Device (AFAD) CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN (PCMS) RIGHT LANE CLOSED Flshing Arrow Bord (FAB) Portble Chngeble Messge Sign (PCMS) Portble Equipment - includes testing devices, detection, surveying, etc. Portble Trffic Signl 360-Degree Yellow Flshing Vehicle Light(s) Work Vehicle Work Vehicle with Crsh Attenutor (Truck or Triler Mounted) Motor Grder Mower Type III Brricde ROAD WORK AHEAD Trffic Control Sign 6 Type A Flshing Wrning Light Chnnelizing Device. A combintion of Type A nd B chnnelizing devices Direction of Trffic See Note; i.e. See Note 6 Work Spce Symbols Used in Typicl Lyouts Figure 6K-14 Jnury, K-xxxii

145 Posted Speed Limit Prior to Work Strting (mph) G =25 ft G = 50 ft Posted Speed Limit Prior to Work Strting (mph) Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts G =25 ft G = 50 ft Advnce Wrning Sign Spcing (A) feet Buffer Spce (B) feet Decision Sight Distnce (D) feet Shdow Vehicle Following Distnce (F) feet Tper Length ( 12 ft lne) (L) feet Shifting Tper (L/2) feet Typicl Shoulder Tper (L/3) feet Protection Vehicle Roll-Ahed Buffer Distnce (with or without TMA) Moving (R) (15 mph mx) Stopped feet feet Type A chnnelizing devices re typiclly used in ttended temporry trffic control zones.* TYPE A CHANNELIZERS: 4 inch Dimeter Minimum 36 inch Minimum dytime low speed only 18 inch Minimum 18 inch Minimum dytime low speed only inch Minimum 42 inch Minimum TUBULAR MARKERS CONES WEIGHTED CHANNELIZER Type B chnnelizing devices shll be used if the temporry trffic control zone will be instlled for more thn 12 hours or if it is left unttended. * TYPE B CHANNELIZERS: 270 squre inch minimum of retroreflective sheeting surfce 36 inches 24 inches 36 inches minimum 36 inches minimum * VERTICAL PANEL TYPE I BARRICADE TYPE II BARRICADE DIRECTION INDICATOR BARRICADE See the MN MUTCD, Prt 6F for more detils on ppliction restrictions. Figure 6K-15 DRUM 6K-xxxiii Jnury, 2014

146 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 This pge hs been intentionlly left blnk.

147 Two-Lne Two-Wy A rod consisting of two opposing lnes of undivided trffic. Two-Lne Two-Wy

148 TWO LANE - TWO WAY ROADS Low Volume Less thn 400 ADT Lne Closure Uncontrolled One Flgger Control Work in Center of Rod Work in Intersection MOBILE 15 Minutes or Less 5 SHORT DURATION One Hour or Less SHORT TERM 12 Hours or Less 9 10 * (low speed only) INTERMEDIATE TERM 3 Dys or Less Intermedite Volume Up to 1500 ADT Lne Closure Flgger Control AFAD Work in Center of Rod MOBILE 15 Minutes or Less 5 8 * 21 * SHORT DURATION One Hour or Less SHORT TERM 12 Hours or Less 12 * INTERMEDIATE TERM 11 * 3 Dys or Less All ADTs Work on Shoulder Work off Shoulder Prking Lne Closure Lne Closure 2 Flgger Control Moving Work Spces Ner Intersection Pilot Cr Opertion Ner Rilrod Xing Portble Signl Control STOP Sign Control Work in Center of Rod Lne Shift Two-Wy Left Turn Lnes Lne Shift Center Lne Closure Turn Lne Closures Work in Intersection Rod Closure Sidewlk Closure MOBILE 15 Minutes or Less 7, 8 6, 7 * 1 SHORT DURATION One Hour or Less SHORT TERM 12 Hours or Less 2 3 * 14 *13 15, 16 * 17 * * 24 INTERMEDIATE TERM 2, (low speed only) * 84, 85 3 Dys or Less * This lyout my be used for night time opertions only if the flgging sttions re occupied nd illuminted with portble lights. These Lyouts s well s the entire Field Mnul, the Flgging Hndbook nd other documents re vilble on the Mn/DOT, Trffic Engineering website t: Jnury, 2014

149 NOTES: 1. A work vehicle without flshing rrow bord shll be followed by protection vehicle t distnce of R. The protection vehicle shll be equipped with flshing rrow pnel nd should hve truck mounted ttenutor. 2. Any shdow vehicle or protection vehicle operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 3. The shdow vehicle or protection vehicle my encroch into the trffic lne when the shoulder is too nrrow to drive on. 4. Any vehicle not displying flshing rrow bord shll disply high-intensity rotting, flshing, oscillting, or strobe lights. 5. The PCMS shll be used for nighttime opertions. 6. When the PCMS is used, the SHOULDER CLOSED or NO SHOULDER sign becomes optionl. 7. The distnce between the work re nd the shdow vehicle should be djusted between nd bsed on trffic volume nd sight distnce. R F Work Vehicle Work Vehicle or 1 Work Are R R minimum F mximum 7 Protection Vehicle 3 Shdow Vehicle 2 SHOULDER CLOSED or 6 or SHOULDER CLOSED 6 or NO SHOULDER 6 Vrible The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K OPTIONAL SHOULDER CLOSURE MOBILE AND SHORT DURATION 1 HOUR or LESS LAYOUT 1 6K-1 Jnury, 2014

150 NOTES: 1. All signs, brricdes nd chnnelizing devices my be omitted when the work occupies n isolted shoulder loction for less thn one hour nd it hs little or no interference with trffic. 2. An opertion which moves between work spces tht re less thn the decision sight distnce long the shoulder should use sttionry or mobile shoulder closure. 3. The ROAD WORK AHEAD sign my be omitted for short term dylight opertions if:. the distnce from curb fce to the work spce is t lest 2 feet, or b. the distnce from the edge of the rodwy to the work spce is t lest 15 feet nd vehicle displying 360-degree flshing becon is operting. 4. This ROAD WORK AHEAD sign shll be instlled on 2-lne, 2-wy rods if trffic control devices re instlled for work spce in the opposite shoulder. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K SEE NOTE 1 2G 3 G L/3 NO SHOULDER OPTIONAL WORK OFF SHOULDER 3 WORK ON SHOULDER SHOULDER CLOSURE WORK ON OR NEAR SHOULDER 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 2 Jnury, K-2

151 NOTE: 1. This lyout is intended for use where prking lne is closed. If this prking lne is normlly open to vehicle trvel during the time of dy this closure will be in effect, the lne shll be considered trveled lne nd not prking lne. The pproprite lyout shll then be used to provide trffic control for the lne closure. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 OPTIONAL For two-wy rod only No Prking L/3 1 PARKING LANE CLOSURE OPTIONAL 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 3 6K-3 Jnury, 2014

152 NOTES: 1. Type B chnnelizing devices shll be used in the shoulder tper regrdless of the loction on the shoulder or the width of the shoulder. 2. Triler mounted trffic control devices shll be plced t lest 4 feet from the edge of the trveled lne. If the 4 feet clernce cn not be met, then full shoulder closure shll be provided. 3. Typicl triler mounted trffic control devices my include flshing rrow bords, utomted flgging ssistnce devices (AFADs), portble signls, portble chngeble messge signs, portble dynmic speed disply signs, communictions equipment, or other dt collection devices. 2 4 foot Minimum The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet 1 Number of Devices Device Spcing (feet) Speed Limit (mph) PARTIAL SHOULDER CLOSURE TRAILER MOUNTED TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES ON SHOULDER 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 4 Jnury, K-4

153 NOTES: 1. If the pproch sight distnce is restricted, spotter should be used to protect the work re nd to wrn the driver. 2. If the visibility is poor or the opertion does not move t lest the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ) every 15 minutes, the pproprite sttionry lyout should be used. 3. This lyout my be used for nighttime opertions only in loctions where the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 4. The slow moving or stopped work vehicle should keep the trffic lne s wide s possible by using the shoulder spce whenever possible. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 1500 ADT ONLY 4 LANE CLOSURE TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 5 6K-5 Jnury, 2014

154 NOTES: 1. If the work spce is not visible for t lest the Decision Sight Distnce, the motorists cnnot see beyond the work spce or trffic volumes do not llow pssge, then Lyout 7 shll be used. 2. Any shdow vehicle or protection vehicle operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 3. The shdow vehicle or protection vehicle my encroch into the trffic lne when the shoulder is too nrrow to drive on. 4. If the work spce does not move t lest the Decision Sight Distnce every 15 minutes, the pproprite sttionry lyout should be used. 5. This lyout my be used for nighttime opertions only in loctions where the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 6. For nighttime opertions, the flshing rrow bord shll be used. 7. The slow moving or stopped work vehicle nd shdow vehicle should keep the trffic lne s wide s possible by using the shoulder spce whenever prcticl. 8. The distnce between the work re nd the shdow vehicle should be djusted between nd bsed on trffic volume nd sight distnce. R F Work Vehicle 7 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 R minimum F mximum 8 Shdow Vehicle 2 3 or LANE CLOSURE WITH RANDOM WORK AREAS TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 6 Jnury, K-6

155 NOTES: 1. The dvnce wrning signs should be moved or reset fter ech mjor rod intersection or fter ech mile whichever comes first. 2. Any shdow vehicle or protection vehicle operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck/triler mounted ttenutor. 3. The shdow vehicle or protection vehicle my encroch into the trffic lne when the shoulder is too nrrow to drive on. 4. If the work re does not move t lest the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ) every 15 minutes, the pproprite sttionry lyout should be used. 5. A compct work re should be mintined with minimum spce llowed between work vehicles. When the work re extends beyond 500 feet in totl length, other trffic control lyouts should be considered. 6. This lyout my be used for nighttime opertions only in loctions where the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 7. The Shdow Vehicle with flshing rrow bord shll be used during nighttime opertions. 8. Flggers shll be used when the pproch sight distnce is restricted, the motorists cn not see beyond the work re, or trffic volumes do not llow sfe pssge. A The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 A up to 1 mile Mximum feet Minimum D Mximum Multiple Work Vehicles Length of Compct Work Are 5 OPTIONALShdow Vehicle R Minimum 7 OPTIONAL 50 feet Minimum 8 1 A up to 1 mile Mximum A LANE CLOSURE WITH A MOVING WORK AREA TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 7 6K-7 Jnury, 2014

156 NOTES: 1. The work vehicle shll not be prked on the shoulder opposite of the coned re. 2. The flgger nd the Flgger Ahed symbol sign my be omitted when trffic volumes do not restrict trffic s bility to regulte itself through the length of the work spce. 3. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using 5 eqully spced chnnelizing devices. USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 1500 ADT ONLY ROAD WORK AHEAD or CREW W ORKING AHEAD The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet Mximum 2G CREW W ORKING AHEAD or ROAD WORK AHEAD EQUIPMENT IN TRAFFIC LANE TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 1 HOUR or LESS LAYOUT 8 Jnury, K-8

157 NOTES: 1. When trffic cn not regulte itself through the length of the work spce, use Lyout STOP signs shll be instlled if the work spce must be left unttended t night - see Lyout The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using 5 eqully spced chnnelizing devices. USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 400 ADT ONLY OPTIONAL The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K G 500 feet Mximum 3 OPTIONAL 12 HOURS or LESS LANE CLOSURE, NO FLAGGER TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD LAYOUT 9 6K-9 Jnury, 2014

158 NOTES: 1. The pproch sight distnce to the flgger shll be t lest the Decision Sight Distnce. 2. If the flgger s bility to see oncoming motorists beyond the work spce is less thn the Decision Sight Distnce ( ), two flggers shll be used - See 3. Lyout 13. STOP signs shll be instlled if the work spce must be left unttended t night - see Lyout The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using 5 eqully spced chnnelizing devices. D USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 400 ADT ONLY A 4 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet Mximum 2G B A A LANE CLOSURE, ONE FLAGGER TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 10 Jnury, K-10

159 NOTES: 1. The pproch sight distnce to the flgger shll be t lest the Decision Sight Distnce. 2. If the flgger s bility to see oncoming motorists beyond the work spce is less thn the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ), two flggers shll be used - See Lyout The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 4. STOP signs shll be instlled if the work spce must be left unttended t night, - see Lyout The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length nd using five eqully spced chnnelizing devices. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K A A 5 USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 1500 ADT ONLY 2G 500 feet Mximum B 5 A 1 2 A A OPTIONAL A 3 LANE CLOSURE, ONE FLAGGER TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 11 6K-11 Jnury, 2014

160 NOTES: 1. The pproch sight distnce to the Automted Flgging Assistnce Device (AFAD) shll be t lest the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ). 2. The ONE LANE AHEAD sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 3. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using 5 eqully spced chnnelizing devices. 4. When using single opertor, they shll be locted so they cn to see trffic t both AFAD loctions Use the pproprite sign on the AFAD. A up to 1 mile Mximum AFAD 5 G OPTIONAL 12x18 inches The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet 3 2G 4 Opertors B 3 12x18 inches G 5 50 feet AFAD A up to 1 mile Mximum OPTIONAL 2 LANE CLOSURE, AUTOMATED FLAGGERS TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 12 Jnury, K-12

161 NOTES: 1. The pproch sight distnce to the flgger shll be t lest the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ). 2. The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 3. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet nd using five eqully spced chnnelizing devices. 2 A The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 OPTIONAL A A 1 A up 1 Mile Mximum 50 feet 3 2G 3 1 A up to 1 Mile Mximum A OPTIONAL A A 2 LANE CLOSURE, TWO FLAGGERS TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 13 6K-13 Jnury, 2014

162 1 1 OPTIONAL mile C 1 mile 1 mile Time Period 3 D 6 Time Period 2 B 6 NOTES: 1. This lyout shll be used with the pproprite flgger lyout to select the loction of dditionl required trffic control devices. 2. This lyout my be used for those short term sttionry trffic control zones tht cover reltively long segment of highwy in short period of time but do not meet the requirements for mobile trffic control zone. It is intended to be used to eliminte the multiple movement of signs long corridor. 3. The mximum distnce for trffic control zone is 3 miles. 4. This Flgger Ahed symbol sign shll be used t Loction A during Time Period 1 nd t Loction B during Time Periods 2 nd This Flgger Ahed symbol sign shll be used t Loction C during Time Periods 1 nd 2 nd t Loction D during Time Period For dvnce wrning signs on crossrods, see Lyout A 1 mile The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K Time Period 1 OPTIONAL HOURS or LESS MOVING WORK SPACES TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE LAYOUT 14 Jnury, K-14

163 NOTES: 1. The spcing between devices should be reduced to G or less when the work spce is within 300 feet of the intersection. This will help keep motorists from entering into the work spce ner the intersection. 2. The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 3. When the trffic volume of the minor rod exceeds 1500 ADT or turning movements cuse unsfe opertions, the following steps should be considered:. Control the trffic t the intersection with lw enforcement officer; b. Restrict vehicle turns from the mjor rodwy with flgging, signing, nd/or closing the turn lnes; or c. Completely close leg of the minor rodwy until the work spce hs left the re ner the intersection. (Locl trffic only) 4. For other temporry trffic control devices in dvnce of the work spce, see Lyouts 10, 11, or 13. OPTIONAL A A A MAJOR ROADWAY inplce sign 2 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K G 1 G A A A MINOR ROADWAY inplce sign A A A OPTIONAL LANE CLOSURE ON MINOR ROAD BEFORE INTERSECTION OF MAJOR ROAD TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 15 6K-15 Jnury, 2014

164 NOTES: 1. When the work spce is locted between A nd 3A beyond controlled intersection, the norml sign nd buffer spcing in the pproch re my be reduced during dylight opertions. The Flgger sign should be centered between the flgger sttion nd the intersection. 2. The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD sign my be omitted when the posted speed is 40 mph or less. 3. When the trffic volume of the minor rod exceeds 1500 ADT or turning movements cuse unsfe opertions, the following steps should be considered:. Control the trffic t the intersection with lw enforcement officer; b. Restrict vehicle turns from the mjor rodwy with flgging, signing, nd/or closing the turn lnes; or c. Completely close leg of the minor rodwy until the work spce hs left the re ner the intersection. (Locl trffic only) 4. For other temporry trffic control devices in dvnce of the work spce, see Lyouts 10, 11, or The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using five eqully spced chnnelizing devices. OPTIONAL A A A MAJOR ROADWAY inplce sign 1 Ato3A The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K MINOR ROADWAY 5 2G A A 2 inplce sign A A OPTIONAL A LANE CLOSURE ON MINOR ROAD BEYOND INTERSECTION OF MAJOR ROAD TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 16 Jnury, K-16

165 NOTES: 1. The pproch sight distnce to the flgger shll be t lest the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ). 2. The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 3. Chnnelizing devices long the edge of the work spce my be omitted unless:. Trffic is trveling next to longitudinl drop-offs tht re greter thn 4 inches, or b. Visibility of the open trveled lne is restricted. 4. Pilot crs should led trffic through the work zone t sfe speed. See the Flgger Hndbook for dditionl guidnce. 5. Advnce wrning signs re the sme for both directions pproching the work re. 6. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using five eqully spced chnnelizing devices feet The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K PILOT CAR FOLLOW ME 4 3 2G A 6 1 A A A 2 OPTIONAL LANE CLOSURE, PILOT CAR METHOD TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 17 6K-17 Jnury, 2014

166 NOTES: 1. If the bckup of vehicles cross ctive rilrod trcks cnnot be voided, lw enforcement officer or flgger shll be provided t the crossing to prevent vehicles from stopping within the rilrod crossing even if utomtic wrning devices re in plce. 2. The pproch sight distnce to the flgger shll be t lest the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ). 3. The ctivity re should be extended beyond the rilrod crossing so tht the bckup of trffic creted by the flgging opertion will not extend cross the rilrod crossing. 4. The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is A 4 40 mph or less. 5. The two-wy tper should be A 50 feet in length using five eqully spced chnnelizing devices. A OPTIONAL A 2 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet 5 2G ROAD CROSSING DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS RAIL Extended Buffer Spce RAIL ROAD CROSSING 5 A DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS 2 A A OPTIONAL A 4 LANE CLOSURE NEAR GRADE CROSSING TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 18 Jnury, K-18

167 NOTES: 1. Approch signs re the sme in both directions. 2. Signl timing nd signl hed loctions shll be estblished by qulified personnel nd pproved by the locl rod uthority. 3. Two signl heds shll be instlled per pproch. The first shll be instlled on the right shoulder. The second signl hed my be instlled on either the left shoulder or mounted over hed on the sme structure s the first signl hed. 4. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using five eqully spced chnnelizing devices. STOP HERE ON RED 1 G 12x18 inches The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet 3 50 feet 4 2G feet 12x18 inches G STOP HERE ON RED LANE CLOSURE WITH PORTABLE SIGNALS TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 19 6K-19 Jnury, 2014

168 NOTES: 1. Approch signs re the sme in both directions. 2. STOP signs shll be 48 x 48 inch. The left-side STOP sign my be 30 x 30 inch. 3. If dequte sight distnce is not vilble to recognize stopped vehicle or trffic volume restricts vehicles from tking turns through the open lne, use Lyout 13 or The ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 5. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet in length using five eqully spced chnnelizing devices. TURNS TAKE 1 TURNS TAKE The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 1500 ADT ONLY 5 2G - Type A Red Flshing Wrning Light 400 feet Mximum feet Mximum feet TAKE TURNS TAKE TURNS 4 OPTIONAL LANE CLOSURE WITH STOP SIGNS TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 20 Jnury, K-20

169 NOTES: 1. The work vehicle shll be prked off of the rodwy. Do not obstruct the shoulder in the coned res. 2. The flgger nd Flgger Ahed sign my be omitted if there is t lest 10 feet of rodwy nd shoulder vilble to sfely pss the work equipment on the centerline of the rodwy. ROAD WORK AHEAD or CREW W ORKING AHEAD The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K Use shoulder, ditch or field entrnce 2 1 L/2 USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 1500 ADT ONLY 50 feet Mximum L/2 2 2 CREW W ORKING AHEAD or ROAD WORK AHEAD EQUIPMENT ON CENTERLINE TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 1 HOUR or LESS LAYOUT 21 6K-21 Jnury, 2014

170 NOTES: 1. Minimum pved lne width from the chnnelizing devices to the edge of pvement or outside edge of the shoulder shll be 10 feet. 2. Prking nd stopping my be prohibited long the work re nd tpers. 3. The flgger shll be visible for t lest the Decision Sight Distnce (D). 4. The flggers nd Flgger Ahed signs my be omitted if the posted speed limits is 40 mph or less. OPTIONAL A 4 A A 3 4 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 L/2 B G B L/2 3 4 A 4 A A OPTIONAL WORK SPACE IN CENTER OF ROAD TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 12 HOURS or LESS LAYOUT 22 Jnury, K-22

171 NOTES: 1. Minimum pved lne width from the chnnelizing devices to the edge of pvement or outside edge of the shoulder shll be 10 feet. 2. Prking nd stopping my be prohibited long the work re nd tpers. USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 400 ADT ONLY The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 L/ G 2 L/2 WORK SPACE IN CENTER OF ROAD TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 23 6K-23 Jnury, 2014

172 NOTES: 1. Prking nd stopping my be prohibited long the work spce nd tper. 2. The minimum pved lne width from the chnnelizing devices to the edge of pvement or outside edge of the shoulder shll be 10 feet. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 ONLY FOR SPEED LIMITS 40 MPH OR LESS A L/2 OPTIONAL 12x18 inches B L/2 100 feet 1 G 1 B 2 L/2 OPTIONAL 12x18 inches A A OPTIONAL WORK SPACE OCCUPIES ONE HALF OF ROAD TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 24 Jnury, K-24

173 NOTES: 1. The minimum pved lne width from chnnelizing devices to edge of pvement or outside edge of pved shoulder or fce of curb shll be 10 feet. 2. Prking, stopping, nd left turning movements my be prohibited long the work spce nd tper. 3. The Lne Shift symbol sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet 2 L/2 100 feet 2 1 L/2 50 feet 3 LANE CLOSURE TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD WITH TWO WAY LEFT TURN LANE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 25 6K-25 Jnury, 2014

174 NOTES: 1. The minimum pved lne width from chnnelizing devices to edge of pvement or outside edge of pved shoulder or fce of curb shll be 10 feet. 2. Prking, stopping, nd left turning movements my be prohibited long the work spce nd tper. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet G 50 feet TURN LANE CLOSURE TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD WITH TWO WAY LEFT TURN LANE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 26 Jnury, K-26

175 NOTES: 1. Contct the pproprite rod uthority for signl timing modifictions before beginning work t ny signlized intersection. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 OPTIONAL OPTIONAL L/3 L/3 ROAD WORK AHEAD or TURN LAN E CLOSED ROAD WORK AHEAD or TURN LAN E CLOSED Divided Rods All Rods TURN LANE CLOSURES 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 27 6K-27 Jnury, 2014

176 NOTES: 1. The minimum pved lne width from chnnelizing devices to the edge of the pvement or to the outside edge of the shoulder shll be 10 feet. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 400 ADT ONLY ONLY FOR SPEED LIMITS 40 MPH OR LESS CLOSURE IN CENTER OF INTERSECTION 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 28 Jnury, K-28

177 NOTES: 1. Contct the pproprite rod uthority for signl timing modifictions before beginning work t ny signlized intersection. 2. The minimum pved lne width from chnnelizing devices to the edge of the pvement or to the outside edge of the shoulder shll be 10 feet. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 ONLY FOR SPEED LIMITS 40 MPH OR LESS L P L P L P L P Posted Speed Limit Prior to Work Strting (mph) G=25 ft W LP Prtil Lne Closure Tper Lengths bsed on encrochment distnce into the lne ( W) (LP) feet feet feet feet feet CLOSURE IN CENTER OF INTERSECTION 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 29 6K-29 Jnury, 2014

178 This pge hs been intentionlly left blnk. There is no Lyout 30

179 Multi-Lne Undivided A rod hving two or more lnes of trffic trveling in the sme direction with no physicl brriers seprting the opposing trffic lnes. Multi-Lne Undivided

180 MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROADS The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn Work on Shoulder Work off Shoulder Prking Lne Closure Lne Closures Mobile Ner Intersection Left Lne Right Lne Turn Lne Double Lne Two Wy Left Turn Lnes Left Lne Closure Rod Closure Sidewlk Closure MOBILE 15 Minutes or Less * SHORT DURATION One Hour or Less SHORT TERM 12 Hours or Less 2 3 INTERMEDIATE TERM 2, 4 3 Dys or Less 26, 36, 40, , 35, 36 39, 40 26, 43 41, 42 37, 38 84, 85 * NOTE: Low Speed, Intermedite Volume Rods Only. These Lyouts s well s the entire Field Mnul, the Flgging Hndbook nd other documents re vilble on the Mn/DOT, Trffic Engineering website t: Februry, 2011

181 NOTES: 1. A work vehicle without flshing rrow bord shll be followed by protection vehicle t distnce of R. The protecting vehicle shll be equipped with flshing rrow bord nd should hve truck mounted ttenutor. 2. Any shdow vehicle operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 3. The Shdow Vehicle my encroch into the trffic lne. 4. If the opertion does not move t lest the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ) every 15 minutes, the pproprite sttionry lyout should be used. 5. If this lyout is used for nighttime opertions, the PCMS shll be used. 6. The RIGHT LANE CLOSED sign my be omitted when the PCMS is used. NOT FOR USE ON FREEWAYS All Speeds Work Vehicle Work Are Work Vehicle 0-40 mph or or 1 R F Protection Vehicle 2 Shdow Vehicle 0-40 mph All Speeds or RIGHT LANE CLOSED 6 Vrible OPTIONAL 5 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 MOBILE LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 31 6K-31 Jnury, 2014

182 NOTES: 1. The opertion shll not to remin in one loction for more thn 15 minutes. 2. There should be little or no encrochment into the cross-street trffic pth 3. The trffic control signl should be put in n ALL-RED flsh mode to fcilitte trffic control t the work site. If the intersection flshes YEL-RED, the pproprite sttionry lyout shll be used. 4. If the work spce is not visible for t lest the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ), the pproprite sttionry lyout shll be used. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 signl heds LANE CLOSURE FAR SIDE OF SIGNALIZED INTERSECTION 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 32 Jnury, K-32

183 USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 1500 ADT ONLY ONLY FOR SPEED LIMITS 40 MPH OR LESS The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet Mximum RIGHT LAN E CLOSED CREW W ORKING AHEAD or ROAD WORK AHEAD EQUIPMENT IN TRAFFIC LANE MULTI-LANE ROAD 1 HOUR or LESS LAYOUT 33 6K-33 Februry, 2011

184 USE FOR ROADS LESS THAN 1500 ADT ONLY ONLY FOR SPEED LIMITS 40 MPH OR LESS The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet Mximum RIGHT LAN E CLOSED CREW W ORKING AHEAD or ROAD WORK AHEAD EQUIPMENT IN TRAFFIC LANE MULTI-LANE ROAD 1 HOUR or LESS LAYOUT 33 Jnury, K-34

185 NOTES: 1. The dvnce wrning sign sequence is shown for one wy direction only. Signing from the other direction shll be identicl. 2. The flshing rrow pnel shll be used where the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 1 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet feet vrible OPTIONAL LEFT LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 35 6K-35 Jnury, 2014

186 NOTES: 1. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 2. The lne closure my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less, or when the workers re not t the work site. OPTIONAL vrible The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet Minimum 1 2 or 2 G vrible or L 1 G A A A OPTIONAL LEFT LANE CLOSURE WORK SPACE AT INTERSECTION MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 36 Jnury, K-36 vrible

187 NOTES: 1. Prking, stopping nd left turning vehicles my be prohibited long the work spce nd tper. ONLY FOR SPEED LIMITS 40 MPH OR LESS The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet 1 1 vrible OPTIONAL LEFT LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD WITH TWO-LANE TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 37 6K-37 Jnury, 2014

188 NOTES: 1. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 2. Prking, stopping nd left turning vehicles my be prohibited long the work spce nd tper. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet 100 feet 2 2 or feet vrible LEFT LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD WITH TWO-LANE TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 38 Jnury, K-38 OPTIONAL

189 NOTES: 1. The flshing rrow bord shll be used where the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 2. The RIGHT LANE CLOSED sign nd the MERGE with rrow sign or Lne Drop sign, my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet Minimum vrible OPTIONAL RIGHT LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 39 6K-39 Jnury, 2014

190 NOTES: 1. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45mph or greter. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet Minimum G vrible 1 vrible OPTIONAL RIGHT LANE CLOSURE WORK SPACE AT INTERSECTION MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 40 Jnury, K-40

191 NOTES: 1. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K L/2 100 feet 2G G L/2 L 1 G L vrible OPTIONAL DOUBLE LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 41 6K-41 Jnury, 2014

192 NOTES: 1. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 2. Contct the pproprite rod uthority for the plcement of temporry STOP signs or signl timing modifictions before beginning work t ny signlized intersection. 3. For the plcement of dvnce wrning signs, see Lyout For the plcement of dvnce wrning signs, see Lyout 34 or The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K x18 inches 100 feet G G OPTIONAL G OPTIONAL G 12x18 inches G DOUBLE LANE CLOSURE AT INTERSECTION MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 42 Jnury, K-42 3

193 NOTES: 1. Contct the pproprite rod uthority for signl timing modifictions before beginning work t ny signlized intersection. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 ROAD WORK A HEAD G G OPTIONAL G ROAD WORK A HEAD or TURN LANE C L OSE D LEFT TURN LANE CLOSURE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 43 6K-43 Jnury, 2014

194 This pge hs been intentionlly left blnk. There is no Lyout 44.

195 Multi-Lne Divided Two seprte rodwys where opposing trffic is seprted by medin. Multi-Lne Divided

196 MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROADS Work on Shoulder Work off Shoulder Prking Lne Closure Lne Closures Mobile/Short Durtion Nighttime Center Lne Left/Right Lne Left/Right Lne Turn Lne Double Lne Extended Lne Lne Shift Ner Rmp Prtil Rmp Closure Rmp Closure Work ner Intersection Rod Closure Sidewlk Closure MOBILE 15 Minutes or Less 1 SHORT DURATION One Hour or Less 45, SHORT TERM 12 Hours or Less 2, , 54, 55, 56 33* 27 57, , 62, , 48, 49 65, , 54, , 85 INTERMEDIATE TERM 3 Dys or Less * NOTE: Low Speed, Intermedite Volume Rods Only. These Lyouts s well s the entire Field Mnul, the Flgging Hndbook nd other documents re vilble on the Mn/DOT, Trffic Engineering website t: Jnury, 2014

197 NOTES: 1. A work vehicle without flshing rrow bord shll be followed by protection vehicle t distnce of R. The protecting vehicle shll be equipped with flshing rrow bord nd should hve truck mounted ttenutor. 2. All shdow vehicles operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 3. The lterl plcement of shdow vehicle 1 my be djusted to crete tper when Protection Vehicle is used. 4. Shdow Vehicle 1 my be omitted on non-freewy design rodwys. 5. Shdow Vehicle 2 my encroch into the trffic lne when the shoulder is too nrrow to drive on. 6. If the opertion does not move t lest the Decision Sight Distnce ( D ) every 15 minutes, Lyout 50 or the pproprite sttionry lyout should be used. 7. The PCMS shll be used for nighttime opertions. 8. When the PCMS is used, the RIGHT LANE CLOSED sign becomes optionl. Work Vehicle Work Vehicle or 1 Work Are R 3 Shdow 4 Vehicle 1 F/2 2 Protection Vehicle F The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K Shdow Vehicle 2 2 RIGHT LANE CLOSED 8 Vrible OPTIONAL 7 MOBILE LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 45 6K-45 Jnury, 2014

198 NOTES: 1. All shdow vehicles operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 2. The lterl plcement of shdow vehicle 1 my be djusted to crete tper when Protection Vehicle is used. 3. Shdow Vehicle 1 my be omitted on non-freewy design rodwys. 4. Shdow Vehicle 2 my encroch into the trffic lne when the shoulder is too nrrow to drive on. Work Vehicle The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 R Protection Vehicle As stted in Lyout 45, the Protection Vehicle my be omitted when the Work Vehicle hs n operting flshing rrow bord. F/2 Shdow Vehicle 1 F Shdow Truck 2 Opertor is responsible for detecting the trffic queue nd chnging the PCMS messge ppropritely for the conditions. Opertors of the two PCMS s shll hve rdio communiction. Shdow Vehicle 2 TAKE TURNS OR MERGE LEFT PCMS MESSAGE OPTIONS rt lne closed No Queuing MERGE LEFT BEGIN MERGE Queuing Detected Advnce Wrning Vehicle End of Queue plus (min.) MOBILE LANE CLOSURE WITH LATE MERGE MULTI-LANE ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 46 Jnury, K-46 F TAKE TURNS AT MERG E Signge shll be t lest Distnce F before queue (re where trffic slows) Slow TRAFFIC STOPPED TRAFFIC PCMS MESSAGE OPTIONS rt lne closed USE ALL LANES No Queuing Queuing Detected

199 NOTES: 1. The protection vehicle should remin positioned ner the rmp gore to prevent trffic from using the exit rmp. If protection vehicle follows the work vehicle up the rmp, then it shll remin minimum distnce R from the work re. 2. Any shdow or protection vehicle operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 3. The vehicles blocking the exit rmp should not encroch into lnes open to trffic. 4. If the rmp cn not be reopened within 15 minutes, the pproprite sttionry lyout should be used. 5. The PCMS shll be used for nighttime opertions. Work Vehicle OPTIONAL The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K Shdow Vehicle 1 2 or RAM P C L OSE D F The PCMS s shll disply the RAMP CLOSED messge. Shdow Vehicle 2 2 Vrible or RAM P C L OSE D Vehicle should not encroch into trffic lne except where the shoulder is too nrrow 5 OPTIONAL MOBILE RAMP CLOSURE EXPRESSWAY/FREEWAY 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 47 6K-47 Jnury, 2014

200 NOTES: 1. The protection vehicle should remin positioned ner the rmp gore to prevent trffic from using the exit rmp. If the opertion requires one protection vehicle to follow the work vehicle up the rmp, then it shll remin minimum distnce R from the work re. 2. Any shdow or protection vehicle operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 3. The vehicles blocking the exit rmp should not encroch into lnes open to trffic nd should llow trffic to use the escpe lne. 4. If the rmp cn not be reopened within 15 minutes, the pproprite sttionry lyout should be used. 5. The PCMS s shll be used for nighttime opertions. 6. The optionl second protection vehicle my be needed to block wider exit rmps. 1 3 AUXILIARY LANE ESCAPE LANE Protection Vehicles Shdow Vehicle 1 2 Work Vehicle 2 2 F Vrible OPTIONAL or RAMP C L OSED Both vehicles should disply the sme messge. Vehicles should not encroch into the escpe lne. 5 6 Vehicle should not encroch into trffic lne except where the shoulder is too nrrow OPTIONAL OPTIONAL The PCMS s shll disply the RAMP CLOSED messge. or RAM P C L OSE D The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 MOBILE RAMP CLOSURE with ESCAPE LANE EXPRESSWAY/FREEWAY 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 48 Jnury, K-48

201 NOTES: 1. The protection vehicle should remin positioned ner the rmp gore to prevent trffic from using the exit rmp. If protection vehicle follows the work vehicle up the rmp, then the flshing rrow disply shll chnge to the cution mode shll remin minimum distnce R from the work re. 2. Any shdow or protection vehicle operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 3. The vehicles blocking the exit rmp should not encroch into lnes open to trffic. 4. If the rmp cn not be reopened within 15 minutes, the pproprite sttionry lyout should be used. 5. The PCMS shll be used for nighttime opertions. 6. The optionl second protection vehicle my be needed to block wider exit rmps. Work Vehicle OPTIONAL The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K Protection Vehicles 2 OPTIONAL 2 F/2 6 or RAM P C L OSE D Both vehicles should disply the sme messge Shdow Vehicle 1 2 or RAM P C L OSE D F The PCMS s shll disply the RAMP CLOSED messge. Shdow Vehicle 2 AUXILIARY LANE 2 Vrible 5 Vehicle should not encroch into trffic lne except where the shoulder is too nrrow OPTIONAL MOBILE RAMP CLOSURE with LANE DROP EXPRESSWAY/FREEWAY 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 49 or RAM P C L OSE D 6K-49 Jnury, 2014

202 NOTES: 1. All Shdow nd Protection Vehicles shll be equipped with truck-mounted ttenutor. 2. The lterl plcement of Shdow Vehicle 1 my be djusted to crete tper. 3. Shdow Vehicle 2 my encroch into the trffic lne when the shoulder is too nrrow to drive on. 4. If the opertion does not move t lest the Decision Sight Distnce once ech hour, the pproprite sttionry lyout should be used. 5. A typicl messge should be ROAD WORK AHEAD nd RIGHT LANE CLOSED. Work Vehicle The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 OPTIONAL G R Protection Vehicle 1 Shdow Vehicle F/2 F Shdow Vehicle RIGHT LANE CLOSED Vrible 5 SHORT DURATION LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE ROAD 1 HOUR or LESS LAYOUT 50 Jnury, K-50

203 NOTES: 1. The Lne Reduction sign nd the MERGE sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 2. In order to use this lyout, two flshing rrow bords, t lest one PCMS, nd dvnce wrning signs shll be used. If these devices re not vilble, either Lyout 52 shll be used. 3. When using combintion of cones (28 inch minimum height) nd Direction Indictor Brricdes every third device in the merge tper nd every tenth device in the tngent re shll be Directionl Indictor Brricde. 4. All shdow vehicles operting totlly or prtilly in trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 3 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K A 1 A 2 or A vrible 2 LANE CLOSURE OCCUPIED NIGHTTIME WORK SPACE MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 12 HOURS or LESS LAYOUT 51 6K-51 Jnury, 2014

204 NOTE: 1. If trffic volumes re low, double lne closure is preferred. ONLY FOR SPEED LIMITS 40 MPH OR LESS The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 or OPTIONAL CENTER LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE DIVIDED OR ONE WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 52 Jnury, K-52

205 NOTES: 1. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 2. The Lne Drop symbol sign nd the Merge with rrow sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 3. Use the pproprite trffic control devices for right lne closure. 100 feet The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K or or vrible OPTIONAL LANE CLOSURE MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 53 6K-53 Jnury, 2014

206 NOTES: 1. This lyout should be used on high speed rodwys where trffic queues my extend t lest 0.5 mile upstrem of the tper. If little or no queuing is nticipted, use the typicl lne closure Lyout Use the pproprite trffic control devices for left lne closure. 3. A PCMS my be used in plce of pir of USE BOTH LANES DURING BACKUPS signs. 4. Distnce plques re recommended when the distnce is 2 miles or more. 2 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K BEGIN MERGE TAKE TURNS LEFT LAN E CLOSED AHEAD TAKE TURNS AT MERGE A A TAKE TURNS 2 LEFT LAN E CLOSED AHEAD TAKE TURNS AT MERGE USE BOTH LAN ES DURING BACKUPS USE BOTH LAN ES DURING BACKUPS USE BOTH LAN ES DURING BACKUPS 1 to 2 mile spcing Continue spcing for the estimted mximum queue distnce A 1 mile USE BOTH LAN ES DURING BACKUPS USE BOTH LAN ES DURING BACKUPS USE BOTH LAN ES DURING BACKUPS XX MILES XX MILES 4 LANE CLOSURE WITH LATE MERGE MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 54 Jnury, K-54

207 NOTES: 1. Use the pproprite dvnce wrning sign spcing for the speed on the cross rod. 2. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 or greter. 3. The Lne Drop symbol sign nd the MERGE with Arrow sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet G 25 feet TURN LAN E 25 feet 200 feet G L 200 feet or 2 G 3 or 3 vrible OPTIONAL LEFT LANE CLOSURE WORK SPACE BEYOND INTERSECTION MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 55 6K-55 Jnury, 2014

208 NOTES: 1. Use the pproprite dvnce wrning sign spcing for the speed on the cross rod. 2. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 3. The Lne Drop symbol sign nd the MERGE with Arrow sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 G 100 feet 25 feet 25 feet 200 feet TURN LAN E L G 200 feet 3 G or 3 3 or 2 vrible OPTIONAL RIGHT LANE CLOSURE WORK SPACE BEYOND INTERSECTION MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 56 Jnury, K-56

209 NOTES: 1. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 2. The Lne Drop symbol signs, the Merge with rrow signs, nd the rrow bord my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 3. If the flshing rrow bord will not fit entirely on the left shoulder, it should be plced behind the tper, encroching on the lne s little s possible. 4. When the Lne Drop symbol sign or the MERGE with rrow sign is used, the sme sign shll be used for both lne closures in ech direction. 100 feet The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 or or or or or vrible OPTIONAL LEFT TWO LANES CLOSED MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 3DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 57 6K-57 Jnury, 2014

210 NOTES: 1. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 2. The Lne Drop symbol sign nd the Merge with rrow sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 3. When the Lne Drop symbol sign or the MERGE with rrow sign is used, the sme sign shll be used for both lne closures in ech direction. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet or or or or or 2 3 vrible OPTIONAL RIGHT TWO LANES CLOSED MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 58 Jnury, K-58

211 NOTES: 1. Instll Type III brricde t the beginning of ech work spce nd t intervls from 500 feet minimum to 1000 feet mximum within the closed lne. 2. The Type III brricde within the work spce my be omitted when the work spce is occupied. 3. For dvnce signing, plcement of trffic control devices, nd lne tper, see the pproprite sttionry lyout. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 or 2 1 or 1 or 1 or 3 LANE CLOSURE EXTENSION MULTI-LANE DIVIDED OR ONE WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 59 6K-59 Jnury, 2014

212 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 NOTES: 1. For one lne of trffic only. 2. Continue the pttern nd the spcing of devices for dditionl lterl shift. 3. For dvnce signing, plcement of trffic control devices, lne tper, see the pproprite sttionry lyout. 4. The Lne Shift sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. 5. Directionl rrows shll be used on either the drums or the Type III brricde 3 B 5 G Spcing between ech device 2 L/2 2G 5 or G Spcing between ech device 2 2G A 4 3 LANE SHIFT MULTI-LANE DIVIDED OR ONE WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 60 Jnury, K-60

213 NOTES: 1. Adjust the rmp exit to fit the conditions. 2. For dvnce signing, plcement of trffic control devices, nd lne closure, see the pproprite sttionry lyout. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 G EXIT feet 2G 2 MAINLINE RIGHT LANE CLOSED EXIT RAMP OPEN 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 61 6K-61 Jnury, 2014

214 NOTES: 1. The dvnce wrning sign spcing is dependent on the rmp length nd the loction of inplce signing. The spcing should be s long s is prcticl. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K inplce MAINLINE LEFT LANE CLOSED ENTRANCE RAMP OPEN 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 62 Jnury, K-62

215 NOTES: 1. Adjust the rmp entrnce to fit the conditions. 2. The dvnce wrning sign spcing is dependent on the rmp length nd the loction of inplce signing. The spcing should be s long s is prcticl. 3. For dvnce signing, plcement of trffic control devices, nd lne closure, see the pproprite sttionry lyout. G The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K G inplce 3 3 DAYS or LESS MAINLINE RIGHT LANE CLOSED ENTRANCE RAMP OPEN LAYOUT 63 6K-63 Jnury, 2014

216 NOTES: 1. Truck off-trcking should be considered when determining whether the 12 foot minimum lne width is dequte. 2. Use minimum of 250 foot tper. 3. For Loops use 25 foot spcing between devices. For Rmps use 50 foot spcing between devices. 4. The spcing for dvnce wrning signs is dependent on the design of the interchnge, nd the loction of inplce signing feet Minimum 3 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet Minimum 2 A 4 OPTIONAL See Rod Authority for pproprite speed. PARTIAL RAMP CLOSURE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 64 Jnury, K-64

217 RAMP CLOSED FRI 10pm THRU MON 5m NOTE: 1. The spcing for dvnce wrning signs is dependent on the rmp length nd design, nd the loction of inplce signing. The spcing should be s long s prcticl. 2. The tper length is dependent on trffic speeds nd volumes nd should be s long s prcticl. 3. Detour signing should be considered if the rmp is closed for n hour or greter. 2 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K EXIT LOOP CLOSURE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 65 6K-65 Jnury, 2014

218 This pge hs been intentionlly left blnk. There is no Lyout 66. 6K-66

219 Miscellneous Lyouts Lyouts for Continuously Moving nd Miscellneous Signing Opertions. Miscellneous Lyouts

220 MISCELLANEOUS LAYOUTS Refer to the lyouts for rodwy type, volume, or speed limit restrictions. Miscellneous Opertions Normlly, these re continuously moving opertions where the equipment opertors remin inside/on the work vehicle. Pvement Mrking - Two-Lne Rods Pvement Mrking - Multi-Lne Rods Off Rod Opertion Motor Grder - Grvel Rod Mintennce Flgging Cross-Rods nd Blind Curves Flgging Sttion Options Lne Closure, Single Lne Roundbout Left Lne Closure, 2 Lne Roundbout Right Lne Closure, 2 Lne Roundbout Lyout No. 67, 68 69, Miscellneous Signing These re unusul lyouts tht my be used to wrn motorists of unexpected rodwy opertions. Surfcing Opertion t Intersection Bump Blsting Multiple Work Spces Multiple Cross-Rod Intersections Advisory Speed Limits Dynmic Speed Disply Sign Stopped Trffic Wrning System Lyout No Miscellneous Closures These re specilized lyouts for closures or rodwy or pedestrin fcilities. 2-Lne, 2-Wy Rod Closure Undivided, Multi-Lne Rod Closure Divided, Multi-Lne Closure Sidewlk Detour These Lyouts s well s the entire Field Mnul, the Flgging Hndbook nd other documents re vilble on the Mn/DOT, Trffic Engineering website t: Lyout No. 80, Jnury, 2014

221 NOTES: 1. All vehicles shll disply two 360-degree yellow flshing vehicle lights or strobes. 2. The seprtion distnce between the striper nd the lst shdow vehicle should be determined by the trck free time of the pvement mrking mteril. 3. Any vehicle(s) operted totlly or prtilly in high speed trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 4. If trcking of the wet pint is nticipted, the use of cones or sttionry Wet Pint signs should be considered. FRONT FACING SIGNS REAR FACING SIGNS W ET PAINT Striper W ET PAINT KEEP OFF LINES The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 All optionl vehicles shll hve the sme signing s the striper. Optionl Vehicle WET PAINT or WET YELLOW or WET WHITE Select pproprite messge W ET PAINT OPTIONAL Shdow Vehicle W ET PAINT KEEP OFF LINES or WET PAINT nd KEEP OFF WET PAINT or WET YELLOW or WET WHITE Select pproprite messge STRIPING OPERATIONS TWO LANE TWO WAY ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 67 6K-67 Jnury, 2014

222 NOTES: 1. All vehicles shll disply two 360-degree yellow flshing vehicle lights or strobes. 2. The seprtion distnce between the striper nd the lst shdow vehicle should be determined by the trck free time of the pvement mrking mteril. 3. Any vehicle(s) operted totlly or prtilly in high speed trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 4. If trcking of the wet pint is nticipted, the use of cones or sttionry Wet Pint signs should be considered. FRONT FACING SIGNS REAR FACING SIGNS W ET PAINT Striper W ET PAINT KEEP OFF LINES The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 All optionl vehicles shll hve the sme signing s the striper. Optionl Vehicle WET PAINT or WET YELLOW or WET WHITE W ET PAINT OPTIONAL Shdow Vehicle W ET PAINT KEEP OFF LINES WET PAINT or WET YELLOW or WET WHITE or WET PAINT nd PASS ON SHOULDER Select pproprite messge 10 foot Minimum width STRIPING OPERATIONS TWO LANE TWO WAY ROAD - PASSING ON SHOULDER 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 68 Jnury, K-68

223 NOTES: 1. All vehicles shll disply two 360-degree yellow flshing vehicle lights or strobes. 2. The seprtion distnce between the striper nd the lst shdow vehicle should be determined by the trck free time of the pvement mrking mteril. 3. Any vehicle(s) operted totlly or prtilly in high speed trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 4. If trcking of the wet pint is nticipted, the use of cones or sttionry Wet Pint signs should be considered. 5. Remove sign when operting this vehicle in the right lne. FRONT FACING SIGNS REAR FACING SIGNS W ET PAINT 5 Striper W ET PAINT KEEP OFF LINES The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 WET PAINT or WET YELLOW Select pproprite messge All optionl vehicles shll hve the sme signing s the striper. Optionl Vehicle Shdow Vehicle W ET PAINT KEEP OFF LINES WET PAINT or WET YELLOW or WET WHITE or LANE CLOSED nd NEXT 1/2 MILE Select pproprite messge STRIPING OPERATIONS CENTERLINE - LANE LINE - EDGELINE STRIPING FOUR LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 69 6K-69 Jnury, 2014

224 NOTES: 1. All vehicles shll disply two 360-degree yellow flshing vehicle lights or strobes. 2. The seprtion distnce between the striper nd the lst shdow vehicle should be determined by the trck free time of the pvement mrking mteril. 3. Any vehicle(s) operted totlly or prtilly in high speed trffic lne should be equipped with truck mounted ttenutor. 4. If trcking of the wet pint is nticipted, the use of cones or sttionry Wet Pint signs should be considered. REAR FACING SIGNS The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 or or Striper W ET PAINT KEEP OFF LINES WET PAINT Optionl Vehicle All optionl vehicles shll hve the sme signing s the striper. Shdow Vehicle W ET PAINT KEEP OFF LINES WET PAINT or LANE CLOSED nd NEXT 1/2 MILE STRIPING OPERATIONS LANE LINE STRIPING - CENTER LANE OPERATIONS MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 70 Jnury, K-70

225 NOTES: 1. The opertions should be scheduled nd completed during dylight work shifts nd hve little or no interference with trffic. The work should be suspended during periods of poor wether or visibility. 2. All vehicles shll be equipped with flshing vehicle light visible 360-degrees round the vehicle when viewed from distnce of 60 feet. 3. The ROAD WORK AHEAD sign my be omitted when there is n dequte pproch decision sight distnce to the equipment long the mjority of the route. 4. When dvnce wrning signs re used, the signs should be no more thn 3 miles from the work vehicle. The loction of the signs should be determined by the sources of trffic, such s mjor cross rods. 5. On rodwys where decision sight distnce is restricted nd the equipment must encroch into the trffic lne routinely, shdow vehicle my be used s shown. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 SEE NOTE required for ll slow moving vehicles operting on public rodwys F Optionl Shdow Vehicle 5 OPTIONAL 4 3 WORK OFF ROADWAY MOBILE OPERATIONS HAVING LITTLE OR NO INTERFERENCE WITH TRAFFIC 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 71 6K-71 Jnury, 2014

226 NOTES: 1. Grding opertions should be scheduled nd completed during dylight work shifts. Work should be suspended during poor wether or visibility conditions. 2. Motor Grders shll be equipped with flshing vehicle light visible 360 degrees round the vehicle when viewed from distnce of 60 feet. 3. Motor grder blde end(s) my be mrked with red or ornge flgs to provide dditionl wrning nd mke the equipment more visible to pssing vehicles. 4. The ROAD WORK AHEAD signs my be omitted when there is n dequte pproch decision sight distnce to the motor grder long the mjority of the route. 5. When dvnce wrning signs re used, the signs should be no more thn 3 miles from the work vehicle. The loction of the signs should be determined by the sources of trffic, such s mjor cross rods. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 A 4 5 required for ll slow moving vehicles operting on public rodwys 4 GRAVEL ROAD MAINTENANCE GRADING OPERATIONS TWO LANE TWO WAY ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 72 Jnury, K-72

227 NOTES: 1. When used, Advisory Speed plques shll be instlled below the pproprite wrnings. 2. These devices my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. For two-lne two-wy rod 1 XX The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K For two-lne two-wy rod 1 XX BUMP 5 feet BUMP XX 1 For multi-lne divided or one-wy rod only (optionl on two-lne, two wy rod) 5 feet BUMP XX XX 1 For multi-lne divided or one-wy rod only XX 1 TYPICAL BUMP SIGNING 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 73 6K-73 Jnury, 2014

228 NOTES: 1. When used, Advisory Speed plques shll be instlled below the pproprite wrnings. 2. Use the sme dvnce wrning signs nd spcings for the other pproch to the milled rodwy surfce re. 3. The BUMP AHEAD nd Advisory Speed plque my be omitted when the posted speed is 40 mph or less. 4. Use the pproprite dvnce wrning sign for the rodwy condition, i.e. GROOVED PAVEMENT, LOOSE GRAVEL, ROUGH ROAD, STEEL PLATE AHEAD. A Motorcycle plque my be instlled below the pproprite dvnce wrning sign if the wrning is directed primrily to motorcyclists. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 BUMP 2 1 ROUGH ROAD XX 4 BUMP XX 1 BUMP 3 3 BUMP 1 4 XX XX ROUGH ROAD 1 ROUGH ROAD XX BUMP 1 4 BUMP BUMP XX 1 1 XX 3 ROUGH ROAD 4 XX 1 RE-SURFACING OPERATION WORK SPACE BEFORE AND THRU INTERSECTION MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 74 Jnury, K-74

229 NOTES: 1. Whenever electric blsting cps re used for blsting within 1000 feet of rodwy, the signing shown shll be used. On divided highwy, the signs should be instlled on both sides of the directionl rodwys. 2. The signs shll be covered or removed when there re no explosives in the re or the re is otherwise secure. 3. Any intersecting rod within the 1000-foot rdius of the blsting re shll be signed in similr mnner. 4. Prior to blsting, the blster in chrge shll determine whether highwy trffic in the blsting zone will be endngered by the blsting opertion. If there is dnger, highwy trffic will not be permitted to pss through the blsting zone during blsting opertions. See Lyouts 81, 82, or 83. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELL PHONE 1000 feet 1000 foot Rdius BLASTING ZONE 1000 foot Rdius 1000 feet TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELL PHONE feet BLASTING ZONE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 75 6K-75 Jnury, 2014

230 NOTES: 1. This lyout should be used for those sttionry temporry trffic control zones tht extend over reltively long segment of rodwy. 2. The pproprite lyout shll be used for the ctive work spce (such s re of pving, etc). 3. Confirmtion signing for continuous condition should be plced t pproximtely 1 mile spcing. 4. Use the pproprite dvnce wrning sign for the rodwy condition, i.e. GROOVED PAVEMENT, LOOSE GRAVEL, ROUGH ROAD STEEL PLATE AHEAD. A Motorcycle plque my be instlled below the pproprite dvnce wrning sign if the wrning is directed primrily to motorcyclists. ROAD WORK AHEAD A 4 LOW SHOULDER The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K LOW SHOULDER A A ROAD WORK AHEAD ROAD WORK AHEAD 4 LOW SHOULDER A A LOW SHOULDER 4 1 mile Mximum 1 mile Mximum 4 LOW SHOULDER A A LOW SHOULDER 4 ROAD WORK AHEAD ROAD WORK AHEAD 4 LOW SHOULDER A A A LOW SHOULDER ROAD WORK AHEAD 4 CROSSROAD & CONFIRMATION SIGNING TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 76 Jnury, K-76

231 Notes: 1. Use the pproprite lyout for chnnelizing, dvnce signing, nd spcing. 2. In long work zones, this sign ssembly my be repeted before ech worker re. When used, it shll be instlled less thn one mile in dvnce of the workers. 3. If used, n Advisory Speed Limit plque shll be instlled beneth the Worker Ahed symbol sign or the pproprite dvnce wrning sign(s). 4. The dvisory speed vlue shll not be higher thn ny inplce regultory speed limit. 5. An dvnce wrning sign with n Advisory Speed Limit plque should not be plced ner regultory speed sign. 6. See Work Zone Speed LimitGuidelines for more informtion on work zone speed limits. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 A XX 3 2 A XX 3 1 ADVISORY SPEED LIMIT MULTI-LANE ROAD 12 HOURS or LESS LAYOUT 77 6K-77 Jnury, 2014

232 NOTES: 1. The dvisory speed plque nd pproprite wrning sign should be locted ner the Dynmic Speed Disply (DSD) (lso known s "YOUR SPEED") sign, but my be up to mximum of 100 feet hed if found necessry. 2. The dvisory speed plque shll be removed when workers re not present, nd the DSD sign should be removed, disbled, or re-progrmmed for the posted speed limit. 3. If the DSD sign is used with regultory speed limit (blck on white sign), then the "YOUR SPEED" sign on the DSD device shll lso be blck legend on white bckground. 4 TTC devices required to closed the trffic lne hve not been shown. 5. Refer to the "Work Zone Speed Limit Guidelines" for dditionl guidnce on setting Advisory Speed Limits nd optimum lyout distnces. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 Worker loction is djcent to n open trffic lne A/2 1 XX MPH A/2 3 4 XX MPH DYNAMIC SPEED DISPLAY SIGN (YOUR SPEED SIGN) 12 HOURS or LESS LAYOUT 78 Jnury, K-78

233 This pge hs been intentionlly left blnk.

234 NOTES: 1. The lyout only shows the dditionl signs nd devices required to setup Stopped Trffic System. See other Temporry Trffic Control lyouts for the proper temporry trffic control devices beyond the ROAD WORK AHEAD signs. 2. The STOPPED TRAFFIC WHEN FLASHING signs or the PCMS should ctivte nd dectivte when the downstrem detector senses verge trffic speeds meeting threshold vlues s set by the engineer. A mximum one minute verge speed drop of 20 mph or more below the posted speed limit (posted prior to rod work in the queue re) my typiclly be used for threshold vlue on high speed rodwys. To dectivte the signge, the mximum one minute verge speed typiclly should recover to within 10 mph of the posted speed limit or higher. 3. The estimted mximum queue length my be determined by engineering nlysis or previous experience, nd should be reviewed nd field djusted to fit ctul trffic conditions such tht the first wrning device is upstrem of the queue. 4. When PCMS devices re used, the two prt messge should red: STOPPED TRAFFIC - - PREPARE TO STOP nd the PCMS my be used for other pproprite messges whenever the stopped trffic messge is not required. STOPPED TRAFFIC AHEAD WARNING SYSTEM Lyout 79 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 79 & b Jnury, K-79

235 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 WORK AREA nd ADVANCE SIGNING s required A Detector Loction for wrning sign one mile upstrem ROAD WORK AHEAD One mile spcing One mile spcing One mile spcing Detector Loction for wrning sign one mile upstrem STOPPED TRAFFIC WHEN FLASHING Detector Loction for wrning sign one mile upstrem STOPPED TRAFFIC WHEN FLASHING ROAD WORK AHEAD or or Detector Loction for wrning sign one mile upstrem 4 4 STOPPED TRAFFIC WHEN FLASHING Continue spcing to extend beyond nticipted mximum queue length or 3 4 STOPPED TRAFFIC WHEN FLASHING or 4 STOPPED TRAFFIC AHEAD WARNING SYSTEM Lyout 79b 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 79 & b 6K-79b Jnury, 2014

236 NOTES: 1. The Rod Authority will determine if detour is required nd specify the detour route. 2. Rod Closure Notice sign should be instlled seven dys in dvnce of the closure. 3. Instll t the lst drivewy or intersection beyond which there is no public ccess. ROAD CLOSED BEGINNING XXXX XX 2 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 B ROAD CLOSED 3 Minor Rod or Drivewy A A XXX FEET ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC or ROAD CLOSED 10 MILES AHEAD LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY Use when it is 2 miles or greter to the rod closure A ROAD CLOSURE 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 80 Jnury, K-80

237 NOTES: 1. The trffic from both lnes should not be stopped for more thn 15 minutes. 2. Conditions represented re for work during dytime hours only. 3. For night closures, the following should be used:. Lw enforcement officers with squd cr for flggers. b. A chngeble messge sign in ech direction. 4. The BE PREPARED TO STOP sign my be omitted when the posted speed limit is 40 mph or less. A The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K A A 50 feet 50 feet A A 4 A TEMPORARY ROAD CLOSURE TWO LANE TWO WAY ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 81 6K-81 Jnury, 2014

238 NOTES: 1. The trffic from both lnes should not be stopped for more thn 15 minutes. 2. The BE PREPARED TO STOP sign nd the flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 3. For rods with 3 or more lnes of trffic in one direction, use the pproprite sttionry lyout. 4. A lw enforcement officer with squd cr shll be used insted of flgger during night opertions. 5. Advnce trffic control devices for left lne closure shll be s shown in Lyouts 34 or The dvnce wrning sign sequence is shown for one wy direction only. The other direction shll be identicl. The Temporry Trffic Control 5 6 Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet A Minimum or 2 5 TEMPORARY ROAD CLOSURE MULTI-LANE UNDIVIDED ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 82 Jnury, K-82

239 NOTES: 1. The trffic from both lnes should not be stopped for more thn 15 minutes. 2. The BE PREPARED TO STOP sign nd the flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 3. For rods with 3 or more lnes of trffic in one direction, use the pproprite sttionry lyout. 4. A lw enforcement officer with squd cr shll be used insted of flgger during night opertions. 5. Advnce trffic control devices for left lne closure shll be s shown in Lyout 52. The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet A Minimum or 2 5 TEMPORARY ROAD CLOSURE MULTI-LANE DIVIDED ROAD 15 MINUTES or LESS LAYOUT 83 6K-83 Jnury, 2014

240 NOTES: 1. When crosswlks, sidewlks or other pedestrin fcilities re blocked, closed or relocted, temporry fcilities shll include ccessibility fetures consistent with the fetures present in the existing pedestrin fcility. 2. The exmples show only key typicl dimensions. Refer to the MnDOT Temporry Pedestrin Access Route (TPAR) website ( for stndrds, guidnce nd options when blocking, closing, or relocting pedestrin fcilities. 3. Only trffic control devices controlling pedestrin flows re shown. Other devices my be needed to control trffic on the streets. 4. An pproved udible messge device or tctile messge should be provided for sight-impired pedestrins. When used, messge device should provide complete physicl description of the temporry pedestrin detour including durtion, length of (nd/or distnce to) the by-pss, ny restrictions or hzrds nd project informtion s listed in note 5 below. The number nd loction of devices should be determined for ech project prior to strting work. Devices my be plced prior to sidewlk work to wrn regulr users of the plnned work. 5. Typicl sign messge for temporry pedestrin detour should include informtion such s the durtion of the wlkwy restrictions (beginning nd/or end dtes) nd project contct number for 24/7 questions or reporting hzrds. 6. The Interntionl Symbol of Accessibility should be displyed when ny wlkwy through work zone hs been determined to be TPAR complint. The Symbol of Accessibility shll not be displyed if persons with disbilities should not use the primry temporry pedestrin detour. The reson for the non-complince should be posted nd n lternte route should be posted when the primry temporry pedestrin detour is non-complint to TPAR stndrds. 7. Conditions tht re beyond recommended stndrds should be documented. A wlkwy is non-complint if it is missing key ADA elements such s curb rmp(s), truncted domes, nd detectble edging. Other restrictions or hzrds my include insufficient width or pinch-point widths, trffic conflicts, steep grdes, non-continuous rilings, tripping hzrds, or uneven/rough/soft surfce conditions, etc. 8. Pedestrin trffic signl displys controlling closed crosswlks shll be covered. 9. Pedestrin detour trilblzing signs should be used if the pedestrin detour is locted someplce other thn cross the street from the sidewlk closure. CROSSWALK CLOSURES AND PEDESTRIAN DETOURS LAYOUT 84 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 84 & b Jnury, K-84

241 USE OTHER SIDE EST. COMPLETION OCT 20XX PROJECT CONTACT 612-XXX-XXX 4CONTACT 612-XXX-XXX 5 6 SIDEWALK CLOSED 4 SIDEWALK CLOSED EST. COMPLETION OCT 20XX PROJECT CONTACT 612-XXX-XXX USE OTHER SIDE SIDEWALK CLOSED SIDEWALK CLOSED SIDEWALK CLOSED SIDEWALK C LOSED AHEAD CROSS H ERE ENDS OCT 20XX 6 5 SIDEWALK CLOSED SIDEWALK CLOSED AHEAD CROSS HERE 4 ENDS OCT 20XX CONTACT 612-XXX-XXX 6 5 CROSSWALK CLOSURES AND PEDESTRIAN DETOURS LAYOUT 84b 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 84 & b 6K-84b Jnury, 2014

242 NOTES: 1. When crosswlks, sidewlks or other pedestrin fcilities re blocked, closed or relocted, temporry fcilities shll include ccessibility fetures consistent with the fetures present in the existing pedestrin fcility. 2. The exmples show only key typicl dimensions. Refer to the MnDOT Temporry Pedestrin Access Route (TPAR) website ( for stndrds, guidnce nd options when blocking, closing, or relocting pedestrin fcilities. 3. Where high speeds nd/or high trffic volumes re nticipted, brrier should be used to seprte the temporry pedestrin wlkwy from vehiculr trffic. When used, brriers shll be instlled s detiled in the MN MUTCD Prt 6F. 4. Only trffic control devices controlling pedestrin flows re shown. Other devices my be needed to control trffic on the streets. 5. When both sides of temporry pedestrin bypss require chnnelizing devices, then the devices should be similr type (riling system, brricde, or fencing system), excluding when brrier (such s concrete brrier) is used to protect pedestrins from n open trffic lne. 6. An pproved udible messge device or tctile messge should be provided for sight-impired pedestrins. When used, messge device should provide complete physicl description of the temporry pedestrin by-pss including durtion, length of (nd/or distnce to) the bypss, ny restrictions or hzrds nd project informtion s listed in note 7 below. The messge device(s) my lso describe n lternte route. The number nd loction of devices should be determined for ech project prior to strting work. Devices my be plced prior to sidewlk work to wrn regulr users of the plnned work. 7. Typicl sign messge for temporry pedestrin bypss should include informtion such s the durtion of the wlkwy restrictions (beginning nd/or end dtes) nd project contct number for 24/7 questions or reporting hzrds. 8. The Interntionl Symbol of Accessibility should be displyed when ny wlkwy through work zone hs been determined to be TPAR complint. The Symbol of Accessibility shll not be displyed if persons with disbilities should not enter the temporry pedestrin by-pss. An lternte route should be posted when the temporry pedestrin bypss is non-complint to TPAR stndrds. 9. Conditions tht re beyond recommended stndrds should be documented. A wlkwy is non-complint if it is missing key ADA elements such s curb rmp(s), truncted domes, nd detectble edging. Other restrictions or hzrds my include insufficient width or pinch-point widths, trffic conflicts, steep grdes, non-continuous rilings, tripping hzrds, or uneven/rough/soft surfce conditions, etc. 10. When sidewlk is closed but workers re present who will provide ssistnce or directions to pedestrins, then the devices s shown re not required. SIDEWALK BY-PASS LAYOUT 85 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 85 & b Jnury, K-85

243 LOW-SPEED ROADWAY 5 MINOR ROAD Temporry truncted domes, optionl bsed upon usge of cross-street TPAR width of 60 inches is preferred. If width is 48 inches, then t lest one 60 x 60 inch pssing spce is required for every 200 feet of length. Temporry curb rmp providing 12:1 (8%) slope or fltter nd non-slip tretment dded Rmp lnding re providing 48 x 48 inch minimum re nd 2% or fltter cross-slope 5 device tper 25 feet long (1 stll), recommended when the closed re ws used s n intermittent trffic lne or bypss lne. Additionl udible messge devices my be needed for route informtion 6 8 SIDEWALK WORK AHEAD ENDS OCT 20XX CONTACT 612-XXX-XXX 7 HIGH-SPEED ROADWAY or LOW-SPEED MULTI-LANE Curb & gutter or other trnsition between rodwy nd sidewlk A brrier with tper nd ttenution (length s required) TPAR width of 60 inches is preferred. If width is 48 inches, then t lest one 60 x 60 inch pssing spce is required for every 200 feet of length. Temporry curb rmp providing 12:1 (8%) slope or fltter nd non-slip tretment dded Rmp lnding re providing 48 x 48 inch minimum re nd 2% or fltter cross-slope Temporry wlkwy surfce covering rough, soft or uneven ground or hzrds SIDEWALK WORK AHEAD ENDS OCT 20XX CONTACT 612-XXX-XXX 7 SIDEWALK BY-PASS LAYOUT 85b 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 85 & b 6K-85b Jnury, 2014

244 NOTE: 1. Approch signs re the sme in both directions. 2. Full flgging sttion signing nd pilot cr turn-round res shll be locted t both ends of the work re. 3. When flgger is positioned t low volume intersection, they: shll hve 2-wy rdio communictions with the pilot cr; nd my need dditionl flggers to direct trffic when the crossrod consistently hs multiple vehicles per direction witing ech pilot cr cycle. 4. A flgger my be plced t blind curve, crest of hill or other site obstruction where trffic might enter from other drivewys or entrnces to wrn the pilot cr tht there my be oncoming trffic. When used, the flgger: shll be locted to clerly see trffic from both directions; shll not be positioned in the open trffic lne; shll hve 2-wy rdio communictions with the pilot cr; shll hve flgger pddle; nd should hve mens to wrn n errnt driver such s ir horn. 5. This sign my be used in work res where pilot cr brochures hve been distributed to the locl residents nd businesses. 6. This sign shll be mounted on the pilot cr. 7. Chnnelizers shll be plced ner intersections nd flgging sttions. 8. Chnnelizers re optionl with pilot cr opertions. 9. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet using 5 eqully spced chnnelizing devices. FLAGGING CROSSROADS AND BLIND CURVES PILOT CAR OPERATIONS LAYOUT 86 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 86 &b Jnury, K-86

245 1 2 STOP 7 Low Volume Rod 3 7 STOP The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K P ILO T CAR F O LLOW ME Blind Curve or Crest of Hill 8 4 STOP 5 Locl Access Rod STOP FLAGGING CROSSROAD AND BLIND CURVES PILOT CAR OPERATIONS LAYOUT 86b 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 86 &b 6K-86b Jnury, 2014

246 This pge hs been intentionlly left blnk.

247 NOTE: 1. Approch signs re the sme in both directions. 2. The flgger my be equipped with n irhorn. 3. The STOP/SLOW pddle my hve flshing conspicuity lights on the signs. 4. The Flgger Ahed sign my hve flshing conspicuity lights on it. 5. Type A chnnelizing devices such s weighted chnnelizers, cones, tubulr mrkers, or centerline delinetors. 6. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet using 5 eqully spced chnnelizing devices. 7. The centerline chnnelizers re optionl with pilot cr opertions. 8. The portble rumble strips shll be spced ccording to the mnufcturer s recommendtions or typicl 4 foot on center. 1 2G 7 B The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet 2 3 OPTIONAL 12x18 inches G OPTIONAL 5 4 or Portble rumble strips OPTIONAL OPTIONAL FLAGGING STATION OPTIONS TWO-LANE TWO-WAY ROAD 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 87 6K-87 Jnury, 2014

248 NOTES: 1. Ech roundbout is unique nd the trffic control shll be developed to meet the specific conditions of the loction nd the work opertion. A detour could better serve trffic movement nd shll be considered s n lterntive to the flgger opertion. 2. Flgging opertions my not be necessry when working on the shoulders or in the islnd of the roundbout. If driving lne(s) width of t lest 10 feet (or more) cn be mintined while shoulder work on n pproch is being conducted, the driving lne(s) my remin open to trffic. 3. Approch signs re the sme in ll directions. 4. Flggers shll control trffic flow on ll pproches of the one-lne roundbout. 5. A led flgger shll be designted nd rdio communiction shll be used by the flggers. 6. Only one pproch of trffic shll be relesed t time. 7. At night, flgger sttions shll be illuminted. Street lights nd vehicle hedlights shll not be used to illuminte the flgger sttion. 8. Type B chnnelizers my be used. 9. A PCMS sign should be considered s prt of this opertion to provide cler guidnce to motorists on ll pproches of the roundbout, especilly 10. pproches tht must reverse trffic flow. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet using 5 eqully spced chnnelizing devices. LANE CLOSURE IN ROUNDABOUT SINGLE LANE ROUNDABOUT LAYOUT 88 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 88 & b Jnury, K-88

249 3 10 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K G 10 ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD vrible OPTIONAL LANE CLOSURE IN ROUNDABOUT SINGLE LANE ROUNDABOUT LAYOUT 88b 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 88 & b 6K-88b Jnury, 2014

250 This pge hs been intentionlly left blnk.

251 NOTES: 1. Ech roundbout is unique nd the trffic control shll be developed to meet the specific conditions of the loction nd the work opertion. A detour could better serve trffic movement nd shll be considered s n lterntive to the flgger opertion. 2. Approch signs re the sme in ll directions. 3. On divided highwys hving medin wider thn 8 feet, right nd left sign ssemblies shll be required. 4. Type B chnnelizers my be used. 5. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 2 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K feet 2 or 5 4 G 3 3 or 3 3 vrible OPTIONAL LEFT LANE CLOSURE IN ROUNDABOUT TWO LANE ROUNDABOUT 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 89 6K-89 Jnury, 2014

252 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 NOTES: 1. Ech roundbout is unique nd the trffic control shll be developed to meet the specific conditions of the loction nd the work opertion. A detour could better serve trffic movement nd shll be considered s n lterntive to the flgger opertion. 2. Approch signs nd devices re the sme in ll directions. 3. On divided highwys hving medin wider thn 8 feet, right nd left sign ssemblies shll be required. 4. Type B chnnelizers my be used. 5. The flshing rrow bord shll be used when the posted speed limit is 45 mph or greter. 6. The distnce between chnnelizing devices should be 10 feet or djusted for locl conditions G feet OPTIONAL 2 or or 3 3 vrible OPTIONAL RIGHT LANE CLOSURE IN ROUNDABOUT TWO LANE ROUNDABOUT 3 DAYS or LESS LAYOUT 90 Jnury, K-90

253 Qulity Stndrds Methods to determine whether the vrious trffic control devices re Acceptble, Mrginl, or Uncceptble. Qulity Stndrds

254 Contents Pge Introduction K-91 Qulity Clssifiction & Requirements of Devices K-93 Evlution Guide - Wrning Signs K-95 Evlution Guide - Type A nd B Chnnelizers K-98 Evlution Guide - Type I, II or III Brricde Pnels or Verticl Pnels K-100 Evlution Guide - Wrning Lights K-101 Evlution Guide - Arrow Bords K-102 Evlution Guide - Portble Chngeble Messge Signs K-105 Evlution Guide - Triler-Mounted Electronic TCDs K-106 These Lyouts s well s the entire Field Mnul, the Flgging Hndbook nd other documents re vilble on the Mn/DOT, Trffic Engineering website t: Jnury, 2014

255 INTRODUCTION Trffic controls re necessry prt of Temporry Trffic Control Zone to wrn motorists of hzrds, dvise them of the proper pth through the zone, delinete res where they my not operte, nd to seprte them from the workers. This is ccomplished by the deployment of system of devices. The success of this system depends on the visibility of ech device t the time of project's initil instlltion s well s throughout the life of the project. Since it is not prcticl to require new devices t ll times, stndrds re needed to evlute the condition of the devices to ssure their continued effectiveness. The stndrds in this publiction should id in the determintion of the qulity of temporry trffic control devices. The use of temporry trffic control zone devices subjects them to wer which does not occur with permnent devices. Although errnt vehicles cuse much of the dmge to the devices, they lso deteriorte in ppernce from wer occurred during their storge, shipment, instlltion, reloction, nd removl. Whenever high number of these worn nd dmged devices pper on the sme project, the generl ppernce of the Temporry Trffic Control Zone deteriortes, reducing the level of sfety provided to the workers, pedestrins, nd trveling public. These stndrds hve been developed in n effort to offset the deteriortion in the ppernce of Temporry Trffic Control Zone devices. A determintion of the condition of device qulity should be mde t severl stges: while in storge, during preprtion for delivery to the Temporry Trffic Control Zone, during initil set up nd periodiclly during the course of the work. Suppliers nd contrctors re encourged to pply this stndrd prior to delivery of devices to the jobsite. Doing so will minimize gency involvement nd reduce costs relted to on-site replcement. These stndrds re intended to ddress the dy-to-dy opertions of trffic control within Temporry Trffic Control Zone nd re not ment to cover the needs of emergency situtions. 6K-91 Jnury, 2014

256 The Temporry Trffic Control Distnce Chrts cn be found on pge 6K-125 This pge hs been intentionlly left blnk. Jnury, K-92

257 QUALITY CLASSIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS The qulity of the Temporry Trffic Control Zone devices in this stndrd hs been divided into three clssifictions: cceptble, mrginl, nd uncceptble. Acceptble devices meet the ll MN MUTCD requirements such s design, size, color, weight, etc., nd re properly plced s specified, nd clerly perform their intended function. The term "Mrginl" for the purpose of this mnul mens "mrginlly cceptble", reching the lower end of cceptbility. Devices tht fll into the uncceptble clssifiction shll not be delivered to the jobsite. The required minimum percentge of cceptble devices hs been estblished for ech type of device nd vries upon the durtion of the Temporry Trffic Control Zone. Intermedite nd Long Term Durtion Within ech Temporry Trffic Control Zone tht is plnned to remin inplce for more thn twelve (12) hours, the following requirements shll be followed: At the time of the initil set up or t the time of mjor stge chnges, one hundred percent (100%) of ech type of device (chnnelizers, brricdes, signs, wrning lights, rrow pnels portble chngeble messge signs, pvement tpe nd rised pvement mrkers) shll be clssified s "cceptble". Throughout the durtion of the project, the number of cceptble devices my decrese to seventy-five percent (75%) of the initil quntity of ech prticulr device, s result of dmge nd/or deteriortion during the course of the work with the reminder of the devices in the mrginl ctegory. Devices in the mrginl ctegory my remin in the Temporry Trffic Control Zone until their totl number exceeds the twenty-five percent (25%) mximum for tht type of device, which is considered n uncceptble sitution. Should the percentge of devices in the mrginl ctegory exceed twenty-five percent (25%), ll mrginl devices shll be replced so s to bring the group of devices bck up to cceptble stndrds. All devices ctegorized s uncceptble shll be replced within twelve (12) hours of notifiction. Missing or knocked down devices should be replced or re-set in timely mnner. 6K-93 Jnury, 2014

258 Short Term Durtion Within Temporry Trffic Control Zones tht re plnned to be inplce for less thn twelve (12) hours, the following requirements my be followed: At the time of the initil set up, one hundred percent (100%) of ll TTC devices except chnnelizing devices nd brricdes shll be clssified s "cceptble". During the short term durtion of the project, the intermedite nd long term durtion stndrds shll be mintined for these devices. At the time of the initil set up, minimum of seventy-five percent (75%) of ech type of chnnelizer nd brricde shll be clssified s "cceptble". Up to mximum of twentyfive percent (25%) of these devices my be clssified s "mrginl". Uncceptble devices shll not be instlled. During the short term durtion of the project, the number of mrginl devices my increse beyond the twenty-five percent (25%) of the initil quntity, s result of dmge nd/or deteriortion during the course of the work. Missing or knocked down devices should be replced or re-set in timely mnner. The following descriptions, together with the ccompnying photogrphs, should be used to determine if the device is cceptble, mrginl or uncceptble. Jnury, K-94

259 EVALUATION GUIDE: WARNING SIGNS Acceptble To be considered cceptble, sign shll meet ll of the following conditions: There my be severl brsions on the surfce, but very little loss of lettering. There hs been no touchup of the lettering. This messge is legible both dy nd night. Signs on portble structures shll be longitudinlly perpendiculr to the ground nd my be plced on side slope resulting in 3 inches mximum out-of-plumb per foot of height. Post mounted signs shll be instlled within 3 inches of plumb for the height of the posts. The bck side is free of ny reflective mterils except smll logos or identifiction mrkings nd hve bre surfce or be pinted uniform color s pproved by the locl rod uthority. The sign is inplce t the specified spcing nd properly ligned to trffic. The sign support structure hs been instlled ccording to the pproved crshworthy requirements. Exmples of "Acceptble" wrning signs 6K-95 Jnury, 2014

260 EVALUATION GUIDE: WARNING SIGNS Mrginl The sign is considered mrginl, if it meets ny of the following conditions: There re mny surfce brsions throughout the sign fce, nd only few re within the individul letters of the messge. The sign fce is free of ny residue. Some color fding my be evident, but the bckground color nd retroreflectivity re still pprent t night. This messge is legible both dy nd night. Signs on portble structures re longitudinlly perpendiculr to the ground nd the side slope results is no more thn 3 inches out-of-plumb per foot of height. Post mounted signs shll be within 3 inches of plumb for the height of the posts. All wrning signs re inplce t the specified spcing nd properly ligned to trffic. Exmples of "Mrginl" wrning signs Jnury, K-96

261 EVALUATION GUIDE: WARNING SIGNS Uncceptble A sign is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: Asphlt spltter, cement slurry, other residue, or brsions tht re evident throughout the fce of this sign. Portions of letters re missing such tht they become confusing to identify. The messge is illegible. There is noticeble color fding or loss of retroreflectivity t night. The sign fce is not perpendiculr to the rodwy. ipost-mounted signs re instlled more tht 3 inches out-of-plumb for the entire height of the ssembly. Signs on portble structures re more thn 3 inches out-of-plumb for the entire height of the ssembly. Signs re dmged or defced in wy tht they no longer hve the sme shpe s new sign. Exmples of "Uncceptble" wrning signs 6K-97 Jnury, 2014

262 EVALUATION GUIDE: TYPE A & B CHANNELIZING DEVICES Acceptble To be considered cceptble, chnnelizing device shll meet ll of the following conditions: The devices' shpe should remin clerly identifi ble with no significnt distortion nd must be free stnding in its norml position. Surfce is free of punctures nd brsions. Surfce is free of sphlt spltter, cement slurry, or other mteril nd will redily respond to wshing. The reflective bnds hve little or no loss of retroreflectivity, with only minor ters nd scrtches. Any dents do not seriously reduce the retroreflec tivity of the sheeting Any dents do not seriously reduce the retroreflec tivity of the sheeting Mrginl The chnnelizing device is considered mrginl, if it meets ny of the following conditions: The surfce hs some sphlt splttering or cement slurry nd my not be redily clened due to brsions nd discolortion. The reflective bnds hve numerous ters nd scrtches; but hve no lrge res of residue or missing reflective mteril. Any dents do not reduce the strength of the device. The device mintins its intended shpe. No more thn one device in row is missing. Jnury, K-98

263 EVALUATION GUIDE: TYPE A & B CHANNELIZING DEVICES Uncceptble A chnnelizing device is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: Punctures nd lrge res of stining sphlt spltter or cement slurry tht cnnot be clened due to brsions or discolortion. There is noticeble fding of the device's color. Lrge res of missing or stined reflective mteril. Substntil deformtion of device, which reduces the originl dimensions, or the device hs lost the intended shpe. Severl dents or frctures tht ffect their stbility or bility to retin the reflective sheeting. Two or more consecutive devices re missing. 6K-99 Jnury, 2014

264 EVALUATION GUIDE: TYPE I, II OR III BARRICADE PANELS OR VERTICAL PANELS Acceptble To be cceptble, the pnel shll meet ll of the following conditions: Pnels re not deformed to n extent so s to decrese the pnels trget vlue. There my be severl brsions on the surfce but very little loss of reflective sheeting. The ornge is vivid nd the stripes provide contrst. The brricde is instlled in its specified loction with dequte bllst, nd properly ligned to trffic. The Type III brricde hs been fbricted ccording to the pproved crshworthy requirements. Mrginl The pnel is considered mrginl, if it meets ny of the following conditions: There re numerous surfce brsions through the pnel surfce. Some color fding is evident; however, it hs no lrge res of residue or missing reflective mteril. The ornge is vivid nd the stripes provide contrst. The brricde is turned t skew to trffic tht reduces it's effectiveness. Uncceptble A pnel is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: The surfce is mrred over high percentge of the pnel re. There is noticeble loss of reflectivity nd obvious color fding. Pnels with sphlt spltter nd/or cement slurry, or ny combintion of missing nd covered reflective mteril would mke the pnel uncceptble. Brricdes hve bent or twisted legs, or deformtion of the support ssembly to the extent tht the brricde pnel is not resonbly prllel to the rodwy surfce. The brricde is missing, knocked down, or turned wy from trffic. Jnury, K-100

265 EVALUATION GUIDE: WARNING LIGHTS Acceptble To be cceptble, the wrning lights shll meet ll of the following conditions: One hundred percent (100%) of ll wrning lights shll be operting properly. Any wrning light tht is out of lignment from the intended driver's line of vision is considered not operting properly. Type A Low-Intensity Flshing wrning lights nd Type C Stedy-Burn wrning lights shll be mintined so s to be cpble of being visible on cler night from distnce of 3000 feet. Type B High-Intensity Flshing wrning lights shll be mintined so s to be cpble of being visible on sunny dy when viewed without the sun directly on or behind the device from distnce of 1000 feet. Wrning lights shll hve minimum mounting height of 30 inches to the bottom of the lens. Mrginl The wrning light is mrginl, when it meets ny of the following conditions: Type A nd C wrning lights - t lest ninety percent (90%) of the wrning lights shll be operting properly with no more thn three (3) djcent lights filing, or Type B wrning lights - one (1) light filing. Uncceptble A wrning light is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: Type A nd C wrning lights - less thn ninety percent (90%) of the wrning lights operting properly, or more thn three (3) djcent lights filing, or Type B wrning lights - more thn one (1) light filing. 6K-101 Jnury, 2014

266 EVALUATION GUIDE: ARROW BOARDS Acceptble conditions for ll rrow bords For n rrow bord to be cceptble, it must meet ll of the following conditions: All lmps re properly ligned for the intended driver's line of vision. Any operting lmp which is out of lignment shll be considered not functioning properly. No lmps re burnt out. All lmps dim properly. All lmps re the sme level of intensity. Uncceptble conditions only for truck or triler-mounted rrow bords An rrow bord is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: The rrow bord is not within 3 inches of plumb for the height of the bord, The triler-mounted rrow bord is not rised to t lest 7 feet bove the rodwy surfce (mesured to the bottom of the bord), or The truck-mounted rrow pnel is mounted less thn 6 feet bove the rodwy surfce (mesured to the bottom of the pnel) unless the rod uthority determines the height is s high s prcticl.. FLASHING ARROW MODE nd SEQUENTIAL ARROW MODE Mrginl An rrow bord in this mode is mrginl, when it meets the following condition: Up to two (2) lmps out in the stem nd no lmps out in the hed. Uncceptble An rrow bord in this mode is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: Any lmp out in the hed, More thn two (2) lmps out in the stem, or The rrow messge is not visible t 1000 feet. Jnury, K-102

267 EVALUATION GUIDE: ARROW BOARDS CHEVRON MODE Mrginl An rrow bord in this mode is mrginl, when it meets the following condition: No more thn one (1) lmp out in ny one chevron segment. Uncceptble An rrow bord in this mode is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: Two (2) or more lmps out in ny one chevron The rrow messge is not visible t 1000 feet. CAUTION MODE (Br, 4 Corners, or Alternting Dimonds) or or Mrginl An rrow bord in this mode is mrginl, when it meets the following condition: At lest four (4) lmps functioning properly (on the Br or 4 Corners), or At lest seven (7) lmps functioning properly in ech dimond shpe (on the Alternting Dimonds). Uncceptble An rrow bord in this mode is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: Less thn four (4) lmps functioning properly (on the Br or 4 Corners), or less thn seven (7) lmps functioning properly in either of the 2 dimond shpes (on the Alternting Dimonds), or The rrow messge is not visible t 1000 feet. 6K-103 Jnury, 2014

268 EVALUATION GUIDE: ARROW BOARDS DOUBLE ARROW MODE Mrginl An rrow bord in this mode is mrginl, when it meets the following condition: Two (2) lmps out in the stem nd both heds completely functionl with no lmps out. Uncceptble An rrow bord in this mode is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: More thn two (2) lmps out in the stem, One (1) lmp out in the hed, or The rrow messge is not visible t 1000 feet. Jnury, K-104

269 EVALUATION GUIDE: PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGNS (PCMS) Acceptble To be cceptble, PCMS shll meet the following condition: One hundred percent (100%) of the pixels per chrcter module shll be operting properly. Mrginl A PCMS is mrginl, when it meets the following condition: At lest ninety percent (90%) of the pixels per chrcter module shll be operting properly. Uncceptble for ll PCMSs A PCMS is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: Less thn ninety percent (90%) of the pixels per chrcter module re operting properly, or. The PCMS is not properly ligned for the intended driver s line of vision. Uncceptble for Triler-Mounted PCMS A triler-mounted PCMS is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: The sign pnel is more thn 3 inches out of plumb, or The sign pnel is rised less thn 5 feet bove the rodwy surfce on rurl rodwys or less thn 7 feet on urbn todwys (mesured to the bottom of the bord). 6K-105 Jnury, 2014

270 EVALUATION GUIDE: TRAILER-MOUNTED ELECTRONIC TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES This includes devices such s Automted Flgges Assistnce Debices (AFADs), Portble Trffic Signls, nd Dynmic Speed Disply Signs: Acceptble For n electronic trffic control device to be cceptble, shll meet the following conditions: The device shll be operting correctly for its intended usge within llowble tolernces nd with ll fil-sfes properly functioning. All lmps, LED displys nd signs re properly ligned for the intended driver's line of vision. Any operting lmp, LED disply or sign which is out of lignment shll be considered not functioning properly. One hundred percent (100%) of the LED pixels per chrcter module re operting properly. One hundred percent (100%) of the lmps re opertionl.. All lmps nd LED displys dim properly. The signs meet or exceed the qulity stndrds for cceptble "Wrning Signs". The device's leveling stnds shll be djusted to properly plumb the device. The bottom of ny overhed signl hed shll be between 17 nd 19 feet bove the rodwy surfce. Mrginl An electronic trffic control device when it meets ny of the following conditions: At lest ninety percent (90%) of the LED pixels per chrcter module re operting properly. The signs meet the qulity stndrds for mrginl Wrning Signs. Uncceptble An electronic trffic control device is considered uncceptble if it meets ny of the following conditions: The device is mlfunctioning for ny of its intended functions including but not limited to signl opertions, rdio communictions, detection, or messge disply, Any of the lmps re bumned out, Less thn ninety percent (90%) of the LED pixels per chrcter module re operting properly, The device is not properly ligned for the intended driver's line of vision, The lmps nd LED displys re not dimming properly, The device is not within 3 inches of plumb for the height of the device (excluding n overhed signl hed mst), or The bottom of ny overhed signl hed is lower thn 17 feet or higher thn 19 feet bove the rodwy surfce. Jnury, K-106

271 MINNESOTA FLAGGING HANDBOOK Jnury, 2014 Qulity Stndrds

272 This Flgger Hndbook hs been developed following the guidelines of the 2005 edition of the Minnesot Mnul on Uniform Trffic Control Devices, including its ltest updte. According to Minnesot Sttute , Subd. 4(e), flgger is permitted to stop nd hold trffic s necessry to ensure the sfety of highwy workers nd the motoring public. These Lyouts s well s the entire Field Mnul, the Flgging Hndbook nd other documents re vilble on the Mn/DOT, Trffic Engineering website t: Jnury, K-108

273 INTRODUCTION To You, the Flgger: REMEMBER - Your job is the most importnt one on the crew. The lives of ll individuls in the work spce depend on YOU! The following informtion is designed to give you some bsic guidelines regrding flgging opertions. Fmilirize yourself with these procedures. If you hve ny questions or concerns, don't hesitte to sk your supervisor. For your personl sfety s flgger NEVER turn your bck on or stnd in the pth of moving trffic. EQUIPMENT Clothing All clothing shll be in ccordnce with current Minnesot OSHA Rules nd your gency's policies. Vest, shirt, or jcket nd pnts (when required) shll be ornge, yellow, strong yellow-green or fluorescent version of these colors. At night nd in low visibility situtions, the vest, shirt or jcket nd pnts shll be retroreflective. Pnts shll be worn t night nd in low visibility situtions. A ht in the bove colors is lso recommended. Net ppernce Retroreflective clothing Retroreflective clothing shll: Be visible t minimum distnce of 1000 feet. Identify the werer s person through the full rnge of body motions. Tools Stndrd STOP/SLOW pddle - 18 x 18 inch minimum octgon - 5 foot minimum stff (to the bottom of the sign). 7 foot is recommended - Fully reflectorized in stndrd colors Two-wy rdios for two flgger situtions Floodlights nd Flshlight with wnd, if flgging t night. FLAGGING POSITION Be lert, remin stnding t ll times Fce oncoming trffic - NEVER turn your bck to oncoming trffic or stnd in the pth of moving trffic. See Figure 1. A flgger s norml sttion is on the shoulder of the rod. Prk your vehicle off the rod, wy from your sttion. Stnd lone, do not mingle with the work crew or the public. Mke sure you re visible to oncoming trffic, not stnding where the sun is impeding visibility or in shdow. Stnd in loction tht llows pproching trffic dequte time to respond. Use the Decision Sight Distnce in the following chrt to determine good visibility loction. The driver must be ble to recognize you s flgger for t lest the Decision Sight Distnce. 6K-109 Jnury, 2014

274 Decision Sight Distnce Posted Speed (mph) Decision Sight Distnce (feet) FLAGGING SITUATIONS Prior to the strt of flgging opertions, ll signing shll be inplce. A good visibility loction is one where the sight distnce is sufficient nd the flgger is clerly visible to pproching motorists. When the temporry trffic control zone covers long segment of highwy, dditionl flgger signs my be needed. In high speed res, the mximum distnce from the lst sign to point where the driver detects the flgger shll not exceed 1 mile. When more thn one flgger is being used, ll communiction procedures should be cler before ny flgging begins. If there is mjor intersection within the closed re, n dditionl flgger my be needed to control trffic entering the temporry trffic control zone from the mjor intersection. Figure 1 Preferred Flgging Position Jnury, K-110

275 Posted Speed Limit Prior to Work Strting (mph) Advnce Wrning Sign Spcing (feet) ( A) Chnnelizing Device Spcing (feet) ( G) Buffer Spce (feet) ( B) Decision Sight Distnce (feet) ( D) A Minimum to 1 Mile Mximum * 1 * For dditionl required signs, see pproprite lyout in Field Mnul 50 feet 2 - Chnnelizing Device 2G 2 1 A Minimum to 1 Mile Mximum NOTES: 1. The pproch sight distnce to the flgger shll be t lest the Decision Sight Distnce. 2. The two-wy tper should be 50 feet using 5 eqully spced chnnelizing devices. * Figure 2 Flgger Loction for Lne Closure 6K-111 Jnury, 2014

276 Trffic bcking up over long distnces due to flgging opertions my cuse potentilly dngerous situtions. These situtions my include trffic bcking up through n intersection, up n exit rmp onto the freewy, or stopping prior to the first wrning signs. When the flgger observes this type of sitution occurring, they should notify their immedite supervisor. To reduce trffic bckups, the flgger my be given instructions on how to help mintin shorter bckup of vehicles. Single Flgger There re two different pplictions of the single flgger sitution. 1. On intermedite volume rod (less thn 1500 ADT) with good visibility, single flgger my be used to control one direction of trffic while the other direction flows free. In this sitution, the flgger is positioned in the closed lne t the beginning of the tper. The flgger stops the trffic pproching in the closed lne. When the open lne is cler, the flgger llows trffic to proceed. If the Decision Sight Distnce is not vilble beyond the work spce for the flgger to detect oncoming trffic, two flggers shll be used. Two flggers my lso be required during high pek trffic periods or if there is mjor intersection ner the ctivity re. 2. A single flgger my lso be used to stop trffic in lne while tht lne is closed. An exmple would be truck depositing mteril off the edge of the rodwy. In this sitution, the flgger would stop the trffic in this lne while the other lne flows free. When the lne is open gin, the flgger llows the trffic to proceed in their norml lne. After stopped trffic is llowed to proceed, the flgger should turn the flgger pddle prllel to trffic so tht no messge is displyed to either direction of trffic. Two Flggers When two flggers re required, lines of communiction must be estblished prior to the strt of flgging opertions. The two flggers must be ble to see ech other or hve two-wy rdios designted for proper communiction. One flgger should be the led flgger nd coordinte ll ctivities. Figure 3 Two Flgger Opertion Jnury, K-112

277 When two flggers re used nd two-wy rdios re unvilble, the flg trnsfer method my be used. The driver of the lst vehicle proceeding into the one lne section is given flg (or other token object) nd instructed to deliver it to the flgger t the other end. The opposite flgger then knows tht it is sfe to llow trffic to move in the other direction. The flg (or token object) being crried should lwys be clen nd dry. Two flggers my lso be used in conjunction with pilot cr. In this sitution, the flgger stops the trffic until the pilot cr rrives nd hs pulled into position to led the trffic through or round the ctivity re. The flgger then releses trffic to follow the pilot. When lrge gp in trffic or pre-determined length of time occurs, s instructed by the supervisor, trffic is stopped. During pilot cr opertions, trffic should follow the pilot cr nd remin in tight group to prevent trffic from seprting long the route. To help keep the trffic group tight, flggers should not llow dditionl crs to follow the group if lst cr in the group hs proceeded more thn 300 feet from the flgging loction. The flgger shll then stop nd hold ll trffic until the pilot cr hs returned for the next trip. Figure 4 Use of Pilot Vehicle Advnce Flgger An dvnce flgger my be used where there is limited sight distnce to the ctivity re or where long lines of trffic form. In sitution such s limited sight distnce, the dvnce flgger should stop ech vehicle nd inform the driver of the sitution hed. Where there re long lines of stopped trffic witing to proceed, the dvnce flgger should move down the line nd inform ech driver of the reson for the dely nd the pproximte length of the dely. 6K-113 Jnury, 2014

278 FLAGGING PROCEDURES To Stop Trffic Stnd on the shoulder of the rod, wy from moving trffic. Fce trffic nd extend the STOP pddle in sttionry position with the rm extended horizontlly wy from the body. The free rm should be rised with the plm towrd pproching trffic. Look directly t the pproching driver. Mke sure tht you mke direct eye contct with this driver! Remin on the shoulder of the rod fter the first vehicle hs stopped. Alwys mke certin tht the flgger nd the pddle re visible to the drivers of ll stopped vehicles. The flgger should never stnd in the trffic lne unless, in the flgger's opinion, the drivers of the stopped vehicles re unwre of the flgger's presence. If it is necessry for the flgger to stnd in the trffic lne, the flgger my only stnd ner the centerline nd never cross it. When the flgger is stisfied tht the drivers of ll stopped vehicles re wre of his/her presence, the flgger should return to the shoulder of the rod. NOTE: Anytime the flgger is required to tke position ner the centerline of the trffic lne, the flgger should remin wre of the trffic trveling in the opposite direction. To Direct Stopped Trffic to Proceed Remin t the flgger sttion on the shoulder. If the flgger is in the stopped trffic lne, return to the shoulder. Fce trffic nd turn the SLOW pddle to fce trffic. Hold the SLOW pddle in sttionry position with the rm extended horizontlly wy from the body. The flgger my motion with the free hnd for trffic to proceed. Do not wve the pddle. To Alert or Slow Trffic Stnd on the shoulder of the rod nd fce trffic with the SLOW sign pddle held in sttionry position with the rm extended horizontlly wy from the body. The flgger my motion up nd down with the free hnd, plm down, indicting tht the vehicle should slow down. Never stnd in the pth of oncoming trffic. AUTOMATED FLAGGING DEVICES Automted Flgging Assistnce Devices (AFADs) enble the opertor to be positioned out of the lne of trffic nd re used to control rod users through temporry, one-lne, two-wy trffic control zones. These devices re cpble of displying STOP messge followed by SLOW messge without the need for flgger in the immedite vicinity of the sign or on the rodwy. They cn be remotely operted by one opertor t centrl loction or by seprte opertors ner ech device loction. A single opertor my only be used on rodwys with unobstructed sight lines, less thn 1500 ADT, nd less thn 1000 feet between the devices. NIGHTTIME FLAGGING At night, flgger sttions should be well illuminted. The flgger shll wer retroreflective pnts, nd vest, shirt or jcket. Reflective chnnelizing devices shll be used. EMERGENCY SITUATIONS In emergency situtions minimum size 24 x 24 inch red flg my be used in lieu of pddle until pddle is vilble. However, s soon s STOP/SLOW pddle is vilble it shll be used. Jnury, K-114

279 The Use of Hnd Signlling Devices by Flgger 18 min. 6 min. To Stop Trffic 18 min. 6 min. Trffic Proceed To Alert nd Slow Trffic Figure 5 Preferred Flgging Method Using Pddle. Figure 6 Alternte Flgging Method Using Flg. 6K-115 Jnury, 2014